PunchHomeHelp.pdf

Architect 3DUser’s Guide

User’s Guide

Architect 3D User’s Guide

© 2015 WD Encore Software, LLC, a subsidiary of WD Navarre Holdings, LLC and its licensors. All Rights Reserved. Punch! Software, the Punch! Software logo, Architect 3D, PlantFinder, PhotoView, ClearView, Cabinet Assistant, Roofing Assistant, Decorator Palette, IntelliDeck, Site Planner, Material Importer, QuickStart, LogiCursor, AutoFraming, Framing Editor, Fireplace Assistant, Precision Lighting Planner, Global Sun Positioning, Plant Importer, RealModel, Object Organizer, and 3D Custom Workshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of WD Encore Software, LLC. SketchUp is registered trademark of Trimble Navigation Limited Corporation. Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. RealModel technology is protected by U.S. Patent No. 6,404,424.

This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under the terms of the license agreement contained herein. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document can be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of WD Encore Software, LLC. The information in this document is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Encore Software, Inc. assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.

First edition, 2015

Table of Contents

Part 1: Nuts & Bolts 11

Welcome 13System Requirements 13Important System Settings 14Installing Architect 3D 14About This Guide 14Integrated Help 15Tool Tip Pop-Ups 16Tips & Tricks 16Training Center 17Technical Support 18Speed Tips 19Display Settings 19Setting the Units of Measurement 19Setting the Scale 19Check for Software Updates 19About Punch! Product Providers 20About Architect 3D 20

A Quick Tour 23Title Bar 23Menu Bar 24Plan Tabs 24Working Floor Button 24Elevation Bar 25Measurement Tools 25View Icons 25Zoom and Pan Toolbar 25Edit Toolbar 26Text & Dimension Toolbar 26Properties Tab 27Libraries Tab 27Preview Bar 28Status Bar 28Interface Color Scheme 28Build Green Information 29

Before You Draw 31Starting a New File 31Opening a File 31Accessing the Sample Plans 31Closing a File 32Saving a File 33Importing Files 33Exporting Files 34Printing Floor Plans 35Plotter Print Service 37Printing a 3D View Rendering 37

Working with Floors 38

Viewing in 2D & 3D 39Viewing the 2D Plan 39Customizing Visible Plans 39Show Topography Lines 40Zooming In and Out in 2D 40Panning Across the 2D Drawing 40Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size 41Working with 3D Views 41Using the 3D Cutaway Slider 43Setting the Walk-Through Viewpoint Angle 44Selecting Features in 3D 44

Drawing in 2D 472D Drawing Methods 472D Editing Methods 49Using the Grid 50AutoSnap and Alignment Options 51Selection Filter 53Text Font 54Edit Text and Text Properties 56Dimensioning 57Dimension and Font Default Settings 61The Virtual Ruler 64Screen Colors 65

Adding 3D Features 67Organizing Library Content 67Using the ProjecTape 703D Objects Libraries 72Editing 3D Objects 732D Symbols Library 74Wall Accessories Library 75Plants Libraries 76Plant Inventory Bar 80Viewing Hardiness Zones 80Finding Plants 81Growing the Landscape 83Exporting a Landscape Quote 84Applying Trims 85Applying Paint and Color 86Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View 88Applying Building Materials 89Using the SmartWand 93Working with QuickPalettes 94Editing QuickPalettes 95Adding a Visual Array 97Building Rooms Using Templates 98

Architect 3D User’s Guide 3

Contents

Creating New Templates 99

Part 2: From the Ground Up 101

QuickStart 103Launching QuickStart 103Show Welcome Screen at Startup 104Project Settings 105Adding Rooms 106Viewing a QuickStart Design in 3D 107Setting QuickStart Render Options 108Accessing the Sample Plans 108

Foundation Plan Tab 111Adding Stiffener Beams 111Stiffener Beam Properties 111Adding Foundation Piers 112Foundation Piers Properties 113Adding Post-Tension Strands 113Drawing the Foundation Slope 113

Floor Plan Tab 115Drawing Walls 115Wall Properties 119Changing Wall Segment Length 120Automatic Flooring 121Automatic Ceiling 122Placing a Room Addition 123Breaking a Wall 124Adding Doors and Openings 125Door Properties 127Adding Windows 128Window Properties 129Placing a Staircase 130Staircase Properties 132Adding Railings 134Railing Properties 135Adding and Removing Flooring 135Floor Properties 137Adding Accessories 138Wall Accessory Properties 138Adding Cabinets 139Cabinet Properties 140Adding Columns 144Column Properties 145Editing Floor Properties 146Adding and Deleting Floors 147 149

Electrical Plan Tab 151Placing Receptacles 151Adding Lighting 155Light Properties 156Adding a Ceiling Fan 158Placing Phone and Cable Outlets 160Adding Smoke Detectors 161Adding Thermostats 162

4 Architect 3D User’s Guide

Adding Home Theater Components 163Adding Home Security Components 165Adding Home Automation Components 170

Plumbing Plan Tab 175Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas Bib 175Adding Floor Drains 176Placing Toilets 177Toilet Properties 177Placing Sinks 178Sink Properties 179Placing Bath Tubs 180Bath Tub Properties 180Placing a Shower 181Shower Properties 182Placing the Hot Water Heater 183

Roofing Plan Tab 185Automatically Adding a Roof 185Auto-Roof Properties 186Adding a Predefined Roof Shape 186Using the Freehand Roof Tools 188Adding a Dormer 190Creating a Dormer Cutout 193Roof Properties 194Adding a Skylight 195Skylight Properties 195Drawing a Gambrel Roof 196

HVAC Plan Tab 199Placing Air Ducts 199Air Duct Properties 199Placing Vents and Registers 200Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and Pumps

203Placing Heaters and Radiators 204Heater and Radiator Properties 205

Deck Plan Tab 207Adding a Deck 207Deck Properties 210Editing Deck Step Properties 210Adding Custom Deck Railings 211Railing Properties 211Placing a Custom Staircase 211Staircase Properties 213Creating a Deck Cutout 213

Landscape Plan Tab 215Defining the Property Line 215Adding a Fill Region 217Drawing a Patio 219Patio Properties 219Adding Outdoor Cabinets 220Outdoor Cabinet Properties 220Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways 224Pathway/Driveway Properties 225Edging an Area 225

Contents

Edging Properties 226Drawing Fences and Gates 228Fence and Gate Properties 229Drawing Retaining Walls 230Retaining Wall Properties 231Designing a Sprinkler System 231Drawing Topography Objects 235Topography Object Properties 236Adding Slopes 237Slope Lot Properties 237Excavating Topography 238

Detail Plan Tab 239Drawing Rectangles and Squares 239Drawing Circles and Ovals 240Drawing Lines 241Drawing Polygons 241Drawing Arcs 242Drawing Circular Arcs 243Drawing Multigons 243Drawing Curves 244Changing Curve Tension 245Using Different Lines and Fills 245Controlling Layers of Detail Shapes 247Converting Details to Intelligent Features 247Editing Detail Shapes 247Filling a Shape with Plants 249

Framing Plan Tab 251Adding Structural Components 251Framing Beam 251Framing Beam Properties 252Floor Joist 252Joist Properties 253Framing Support Column 254Support Column Properties 254Customizing Wall Framing Properties 255Customizing Roof Framing Properties 255Customizing Staircase Framing Properties 256Customizing Deck Framing Properties 256Customizing Foundation Framing Material 257

Part 3: Drawing and Design Settings 259

Edit Your Design 261Undo 261Cut, Copy, and Paste 261Nudging a Selection 262Moving a Selection 262Rotating a Selection 263Flip and Mirror 263Aligning Objects 264Elevating Objects 264Copy To Floor 266Move To Plan 267Move Entire Plan 267

Rotate Entire Plan 267Flip Entire Plan 268

Control Your Design 269Setting the Working Elevation 269Setting the Scale 269Setting the Units of Measurement 270Defining Lot Properties 271Update Topography Grid 272Work on Floor 272Calculate Floor Area 272Floor Plan Image Trace 272Design Options 274

Control 3D Options 277Moving Around in 3D 277Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles 281Adjusting Rendering Quality 283Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering Styles 284Adjusting Photo-Realistic Rendering Quality 286Setting Rendering Options 286Setting Photo-Realistic Rendering Effects 287Depth of Field Focus 289Rendering 3D Effects 291Adding Lighting and Shadows 292Photo-Realistic Scene Lighting 293Drawing Animation Paths 294Previewing and Exporting Animations Paths 295Animation Path Properties 296Naming and Prioritizing Animation Paths 297Using the Decorator Palette 298Identifying Colors and Materials from the Decorator

Palette 298Managing Decorator Palette Groups 298Managing Decorator Palettes 299Organizing Decorator Palettes 300Customizing the 3D View 301Saving a 3D View 301Organizing Saved 3D Views 302Preparing to Construct a RealModel 303Defining Scale 304Printing RealModel Templates 304Constructing Wall Templates 305Constructing Roof Templates 306Printing Template Materials and Colors 306Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your

Model 306

Part 4: Design & Drawing PowerTools 307

Door Designer 309Designing Custom Doors 309Drawing Door Components 310Door Component Properties 310Editing Your Door Design 311Flipping & Mirroring Objects 311


Contents

Controlling Drawing Settings 312Using Snaps to Draw Components 312Viewing your Drawing in 3D 313Managing Door Designs 313Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing 314

Window Designer 317Designing Custom Windows 317Drawing Window Components 318Window Component Properties 318Editing Your Window Design 319Flipping & Mirroring Objects 319Controlling Drawing Settings 320Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements 320Managing Window Designs 320Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing

321

Ceiling Designer 323Placing an Auto Ceiling 324Drawing a Custom Ceiling 324Custom Drawn Ceiling Properties 324Drawing a Predefined Ceiling Shape 326Hip and Gable Ceiling Properties 326Barrel and Dome Ceiling Properties 327Ceiling Beam Properties 328Editing a Ceiling 328Flipping & Mirroring Objects 329Define Ceiling Elevations 329Controlling Your 2D View 3292D Drawing Colors 3293D View Window Options 329Navigating in 3D 3293D Rendering Options 330Selecting Render Style 330Adjusting 3D Lighting 330Using Templates 331

Fireplace Wizard 335Fireplace Wizard 335Defining Dimension Increments 337Customizing the Fireplace Properties 338Customizing the Face Dimensions 338Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions 339Customizing the Chimney Dimensions 341Moving around in Fireplace Wizard 342Applying Material or Color to Fireplaces 342Adding Lighting and Shadows 343Default Views 343Saving a Fireplace 344Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop 344

Mantel Designer 345Mantel Designer 345Drawing Mantel Shapes 346Editing Your Mantel Design 346Dental Mantel Face Properties 347Editing Your Door Design 347


Flipping & Mirroring Objects 348Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements 348Tracing an Image 348Controlling Your 2D View 348LiveView Window Options 348Navigating in 3D 348Adjusting 3D Lighting 349Using Templates 349Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop 352

Pool Designer 353Create a Pool Using Pool Wizard 353Shaping your Pool 355Pool Shape Properties 355Defining the Depth of your Pool 356Pool Depth Properties 357Managing Your Pool Design 358Adding a Ladder with Steps 358Adding Ladder Rails without Steps 359Adding a Hand Rail 360Adding Steps 361Adding Pool Equipment 363Adding Pool Accessories 368Controlling Your Working Plan Views 371Controlling Elevations 371Editing Your Door Design 372Calculating Pool Volume 372Using Snaps to Draw Objects 372Adding Lighting and Shadows 372Applying Colors and Materials 373Using Templates 373

Fence Designer 377Designing Fences 377Customizing Chain-Link Fence Properties 378Customizing Ornamental Iron Fence Properties 379Customizing Picket Fence Properties 380Customizing Privacy Fence Properties 381Customizing Rail Fence Properties 381Freehand Detail Drawing 381Editing Fence Shapes 382Customizing Fence Materials and Color 383File Management 383Using Fence Designer Images in Your Project 384

Part 5: Enhancement & Customization PowerTools 385

PhotoView and PhotoView Editor 387Tips for Using PhotoView 387Importing PhotoView Images 387PhotoView Properties 389Landscaping Using PhotoView Images 389Right in Your Own Backyard 390PhotoView Editor 391Editing Your PhotoView Image 391Editing Shapes 391

Contents

Editing Material Perspective 392File Management 392

Estimator 395Launching Estimator 395Customizing the Spreadsheet 396Selecting a Plan Tab 397Calculating Construction Costs 398Completing the Various Schedules 398Creating a Master Pricelist 398Exporting a Pricelist 399Printing a Pricelist 399

Trim Designer 401Managing Trim Designs 401Trim Properties 403Designing Custom Trims 403Flipping Objects 404Controlling Drawing Settings 404Viewing your Trim Design in 3D 405Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! Drawing 405

Section Detailer 407Managing Section Details 408Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Details 409Adding 2D Symbols to a Detail 409Using Rules and Fills 409Adding Text to Details 410Using Dimensioning Tools 411Editing Section Detail Objects 411Flipping Objects 413Mirroring Objects 413Duplicating Objects 413Grouping Objects 414Locking Objects 414Controlling Drawing Settings 415Drawing Parallel Segments 417Using Object or Point Selection Modes 418Drawing from Corner or Center 418Changing Curve Tension 418Changing Grid Settings 418Using Snaps to Draw CAD Objects 419Viewing your Drawing 419Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File 420

Symbol Editor 423Managing Symbols 423Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Symbols 424Adding Text to Symbols 424Using Rules and Fills 424Using Dimensioning Tools 424Editing Symbol Editor Objects 425Flipping Objects 426Mirroring Objects 427Duplicating Objects 427Grouping Objects 428Locking Objects 428Controlling Drawing Settings 428

Drawing Parallel Segments 431Using Object or Point Selection Modes 432Drawing from Corner or Center 432Changing Curve Tension 432Changing Grid Settings 432Using Snaps to Draw CAD Objects 433Viewing your Drawing 433Exporting and Importing 433

Part 6: 3D Custom Workshop 435

Before You Draw in 3D 437Opening File and Objects 437Saving a File 438Saving to an Object Library 438Exporting Files 439Printing Objects 440Drawing Grids 440Changing Grid Settings 442Setting a Nudge Distance 443Elevation Slider 443Tracing an Imported Image 444

Drawing 2D & 3D Entities 447Drawing from Corner or Center 447Switching Between 2D and 3D Tools 448Drawing Shapes 4482D/3D Shape Properties 462Applying Materials 463Applying Paint and Color 463Controlling Application of Color or Material 464Using AutoClick Placement 466Using the Decorator Palette 467Searching for Colors or Materials 467

Editing 2D & 3D Objects 469Controlling Selection Mode 469Selecting Points within an Object 470Adding and Removing Points 470Changing Curve Tension 471Extruding a 2D Object 472Revolving a 2D Object 473Applying Skew 474Rotating an Object 475Elevation Slider 475Specifying Object Size 476Grouping Objects 476Locking Objects in Place 476Hiding Detection 476Working in Layers 477Moving an Object 478Using Flip 479Using Mirror 480Duplicating Objects 481

Controlling Views 483Using Zoom 483


Contents

Using Perspective or Orthographic 3D Views 483Using Different Views 484Using 2D Views 486Setting the 3D Camera Angle 488


Using Fly-Around 490Controlling Default Colors 490Changing Curve Tension 491Using Nudge and the Grid 492

Contents


Contents


Part 1

Nuts & Bolts

Chapter 1: Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 2: A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 3: Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 4: Viewing in 2D & 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Chapter 5: Drawing in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Chapter 6: Adding 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 1

WelcomeArchitect 3D is a professional-level home design system developed for anyone who needs fast, accurate home drawings and wants the flexibility to view and edit their plan in 3D.

Uses for Architect 3D include:

■ Architectural drawings

■ Presentations

■ Deck design

■ 3D visualization

■ DXF/DWG Import and Export

■ Electrical plans

■ Framing customization

■ Interior design

■ Landscaping

It’s simple to get started designing the home of your dreams. Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this manual, so you’ll know where to quickly find the answers. Be sure to see “A Quick Tour”, which begins on page 23 for an overview of the screen layout and a quick tour of the program.

For a basic overview of tools and techniques that you’ll use throughout the design process, see “Drawing in 2D”, which begins on page 49.

A very important adjustment to make before beginning work with Architect 3D will be setting your display to 32-bit color. To do this, right-click the Desktop, then click Properties on the pop-up menu. Click the Settings Tab on the Display Properties dialog box, then select True Color (32-bit).

System RequirementsIn order to run Architect 3D, it is recommended that you have a Pentium-based computer. In addition, your system should include the following:

■ Windows® Vista or higher¹

■ Intel® or compatible 1.0 GHz processor or higher (multi-core processors supported)

■ 1 GB of RAM

■ 3.0 GB of Hard Disk Space

■ VGA Video Card displaying at least 1024x768 with 32-bit color

■ 128 MB Video Card Memory

■ Internet access and Internet Service Provider account required²

■ DVD-ROM drive (for media installations only)

Please note that not all features in this User’s Guide are available in every Punch! Software title. Some features, Reflections, for example, are available only in Punch! Professional and Architectural Series.


Chapter Welcome1

■ Mouse with wheel recommended

¹ Administrator privileges are required to properly install the program on Windows® Vista or higher.

² User is responsible for all Internet access fees and phone charges.

Important System SettingsSome of your computer’s settings can impact Architect 3D’s efficiency. By changing one (or more) of these settings, you can control how the program performs.

■ Set your Display Settings to at least 1024x768 pixels and True Color (32-bit). Right-click your Desktop and choose Screen Resolution from the context menu.

Note: Refer to your computer’s Help information for recommended display settings.

■ By default, the program determines the default Unit of Measure based on the computer’s location and regional settings. To choose a different setting, click Design menu > Unit of Measure and choose the desired units from the Measurement Units drop-down menu.

■ The recommended computer text size is 96 dpi. To configure the dpi settings, follow the steps based on your operating system.

Windows 7 and above

1 Right-click the Desktop and choose Personalize.

2 Click Display at the bottom of the left pane and then click Set custom text size (DPI).

3 Ensure the DPI setting is 96 pizels per inch and then click OK.

Windows Vista

1 Right-click the Desktop and choose Personalize.

2 Click Adjust Font Size (DPI) in the left pane.

3 Select Default Scale (96 DPI) and then click OK.

Installing Architect 3DTo install Architect 3D, you must run Setup. You can’t install or reconfigure Architect 3D by copying files directly from the distribution DVD to your hard drive.

To install Architect 3D via DVD

1 Insert Architect 3D Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. Installation begins as soon as you insert the DVD.

2 Follow the installation prompts that appear.

Note: If installation did not begin when you inserted the Architect 3D Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive, Autorun may be turned off on your computer.

To install Architect 3D if installation does not begin automatically

1 Insert Architect 3D Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive.

2 Navigate to your computer disk drives (for example, Start > Computer for a WIndows 7 operating system).

3 Double-click the DVD-ROM drive (most computers will begin the installation at this point).

4 Double-click SETUP.

About This GuideThe text and graphics in this guide are tailored to help you find the information you need quickly and get the most out of Architect 3D. Each section of this guide is divided into a series of step-by-step instructions, making it easy for you to


Integrated Help

scan a page to find exactly what you need. You can also refer to the index for additional topics on the same subject, if necessary. You can access this guide quickly from the Help menu, or from any of the available tool tip pop-ups that are displayed in the application.

Instructions for installing and using Microsoft Windows do not appear in this guide. If you’re uncomfortable with your knowledge of Windows or with the concepts associated with a user interface object, you should review Windows online Help before attempting any serious work with Architect 3D.

Basic TermsThe following is a list of terms used throughout this guide. Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the language used in this guide and to reinforce your understanding of basic terminology.

■ Click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once.

■ Right-click Pressing and releasing the right mouse button once.

■ Double-click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice.

■ Click-and-drag Pressing the left mouse button, holding it down and moving the mouse, simultaneously.

■ Drag-and-drop Clicking to select an item, holding down the mouse button, then dragging and releasing.

■ Scroll Using the scroll bars on the sides of the application window by clicking the slider box, holding down the mouse button and dragging.

Graphic CuesThis guide uses several types of graphic elements. Some show the window or a dialog box that is displayed during an operation. When this type of graphic illustration is used, every effort is made to show the element exactly as it is displayed on the screen.

Keyboard commands are visually called out in a different font; for example, SHIFT and ENTER.

Graphic Cues Used in this Guide

Integrated HelpThere are various ways to access the help information provided with Architect 3D.

To access the user’s guide

■ Click Help menu > User’s Guide (or press F1).

To access help for a specific part of your 2D drawing

■ Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with and choose Help from the context menu. The User’s Guide open for the selection.

Convention Meaning

mouse click that selects a point — the number, when present, specifies the mouse click’s position in a series of clicks

click and drag operation — beginning of arrow indicates where to start; end of arrow indicates where to stop

a right mouse click — the number, when present, specifies the mouse click’s position in a series of clicks


Chapter Welcome1

To access tutorial videos for a specific part of your 2D drawing

■ Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with and choose Video Tutorial from the context menu. The Training Center opens for your selection using your default web browser.

Tool Tip Pop-UpsTool tip pop-ups are displayed when you hover over most of the tools or buttons in the application. These tool tips provide a quick description of the tool or button and in some cases, a preview is available to demonstrate the functionality. Additionally, links to more detailed information in the User Guide or a video tutorial may be available as well. Below is an example of the tool tip pop-up for the Room Addition Tool, which includes a preview and links to more detailed information.

Descriptions are also displayed when you hover over an item in the design window. In some cases more information may be available. For example, when hovering over a pathway, the material and area of the pathway is also displayed.


Tips & Tricks

The tool tips settings are controlled in the Preferences window.

■ Show descriptions of items in the design checkbox turn on or off the pop-up descriptions when hovering over items in the design window.

■ Show Advanced Tool Tips checkbox turns on or off the tool tips. When selected, tool tips are displayed.

■ Pop-up Delay controls how long you need to hover over a tool or button before the pop-up is displayed.

Note: You can keep the pop-up open by moving the cursor over the pop-up window after it appears.

To access tool tip settings

■ Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and edit the Tool Tip Options as needed.

Tips & TricksArchitect 3D makes it easy to get started by providing users with tips and tricks for each tool. Tips & Tricks provide information about each tool and some general information about the program.

To access tips & tricks for a part of your 2D drawing

■ Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with and choose Tips at the top of the context menu. The Tips & Tricks menu for that feature, object, or plant is displayed.

Click Back or Next to cycle through the tips available for that feature, object, or plant.

Training CenterYou can get started easily with Architect 3D’s Step-by-Step Tutorials. They are available at all times, in the Training Center. Also available in the Training Center are videos showing exactly how most tools function.

To access the video tutorials and tooltips

1 Click Help menu > Training Center. The Training Center is displayed in your default web browser.

The topics are displayed on the left side of the window, organized into categories.

2 Click to expand Tools or Tutorials and then choose a category to display the cascading list of videos available.

3 Click the video you want to view and the video is displayed.


Chapter Welcome1

Note: (optional) You can download the corresponding tutorial drawing by clicking the link below the video; save the file to a location on your computer and then open the drawing file.

When you call, you should be in front of your computer, with the program running, and have the above information handy. The technical support contact information can be located at the Customer Support Center - http://support.encore.com.

Speed Tips You can “Speed Up” Architect 3D by changing some of the program's settings.

■ Close the 3D View window when you are not working in 3D. No 3D calculations are performed when the 3D View window is closed.

■ Turn off shadows. For more information, see “Adding Lighting and Shadows”, which begins on page 286.

■ Hide floors that are not active. Turning off inactive floors means the program will not waste resources on them.

■ Decrease the render qulality. Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed with the Navigation & Render Quality options displayed. The lower the render quality settings, the faster 3D View renders your design.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Final Quality Options > Low.

■ Hide unused 3D objects. Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options > Visible 3D Elements. Deselect unneeded elements to hide them in the 3D view and then click OK.

Display SettingsArchitect 3D is designed to run effectively, based on the system requirements printed on the software packaging and noted on the software’s website. However, there are some specific settings you can select to obtain the best display possible.

To adjust your display settings

1 On the Start menu, click Control Panel. The Control Panel program group is displayed.

2 If Category view is active, under Appearance and Personalization click Adjust screen resolution and then click Advanced settings.

If Icon view is active, click Display and then click Screen Resolution > Advanced settings.

3 On the Monitor tab, choose True Color (32-bit) from the Colors drop-down menu and then click OK.

(optional) Adjust the Resolution to at least 1024x768 pixels.

4 Click OK and close the Control Panel window. The new window settings are applied. You may be prompted to restart your computer to apply the new settings. If so, click OK or Yes.

Setting the Units of MeasurementYou can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened. For more information, see “Setting the Units of Measurement”, which begins on page 264.

Setting the ScaleScale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. For more information, see “Setting the Scale”, which begins on page 263.

Check for Software UpdatesBy default, the software checks for newly available updates upon startup. You can also disable this and manually check for software updates to make sure you’re using the most recent version available.


About Punch! Product Providers

To disable automatic updates at startup

1 Click Edit menu > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.

2 Click User Interface and, under the Startup section, deselect Automatically check for updates and then click OK.

To enable automatic updates at startup


2 Click User Interface and, under the Startup section, select Automatically check for updates and then click OK.

To check for software updates

1 Click Help menu > Check for Updates. If updates are available, the Punch! Updater is displayed with a summary of the update.

2 Click Install to install the update.

3 When the download completes, click OK and restart the application.

About Punch! Product ProvidersYou can access information about each manufacturer of name-brand content, for example, materials, paint, or flooring.

To access information about product providers

1 Click Help menu > About Punch! Product Providers. The About Punch! Product Providers dialog box is displayed.

2 Click a product provider’s name to read information about them, and then click OK to close the window.


Chapter Welcome1

About Architect 3DYou can access your serial number or check the version of your program, with one click, at any time.

To access your serial number

1 Click Help menu > About Architect 3D. The program’s splash screen is displayed.

2 Click Close to close the window.

2

About Architect 3D


Chapter Welcome1


Chapter 2

A Quick TourTo get the most benefit from Architect 3D, you should take a minute to become familiar with the layout of the Punch! drawing space, plan tabs, and toolbars.

In most cases, detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu items is not provided here. For information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the Control menu, the window border, the maximize button, dialog box controls, and other standard computer functions, refer to Windows online Help.

Title BarThe title bar extends across the top of the application window. It displays the name of the program and the name of the current drawing file. Using the buttons at the right end of the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close, or restore the window. You can also maximize or restore a window by double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. If the application is running in a window, rather than maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window on the desktop.

Pan & Zoom tools

Edit toolbar

Visual Array tool

Text & Dimension tools

Plant inventory bar

ProjecTape tool

Animator tool

Status bar

Plan toolbar

Design window

Libraries drop-down

Content drop-down

Preview bar

Working floor button

Elevation bar

Viewpoint icon

3D Quarter View

3D Cutaway Slider

Title bar Menu bar Plan tabs 2D & 3D View icons

Propertiestab

Librariestab

A
rchitect 3D Use r’s Guide 23

Chapter A Quick Tour2

Menu BarYou can choose menu items using either the mouse or the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name; when the menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with an arrow to the right display cascading menus when you place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a menu item, a description is displayed on the Status Bar.

To use the keyboard, press ALT and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the menu item’s name. If there is a cascading menu, you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. Pressing ESC backs out of the menu items one level at a time.

There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available shortcut keys to the right of the item’s name. You can use the techniques for choosing menu items in combination.

Plan TabsArchitect 3D utilizes a collection of layers, which are accessible by clicking the tabs along the top of the design window. Clicking a plan tab accesses a set of tools that you can use to design your floor plan; for example, clicking the Electrical tab accesses outlets, switches, and ceiling fans, while clicking the Landscaping Tab accesses tools for edging, fencing, ground fill, excavation, and so on.

Tip: You can also change plans by clicking Design menu > Work on Plan and choosing the plan you want.

Once placed, each component, such as a door, window, plant, or outlet, can be altered at any time. Click the component and its properties are displayed on the Properties tab (a default that can be changed) where the customizable properties of that component are available.

You can further customize which plan layer or combination of plan layers you want to be active. In addition, you can make each plan layer a different color, so you can tell at a glance which layer a specific feature is on. You can even move some of the components to a different plan, when necessary.

By controlling which plan tabs are visible at any time, you are also controlling which layer(s) will be printed. For example, if you just want to print your electrical plan, you can turn off all other layers and just print that one.

For more information, see “Customizing Visible Plans”, which begins on page 41.

Working Floor ButtonUse the Working Floor button to switch the current view, based on the number of floors in your home plan. For more information on working on different floors, see “Work on Floor”, on page 266.

The Floor button also provides access to floor management options to control existing and new floors. For more information on adding and inserting floors, see the chapter titled “Working with Floors”, which begins on page 38.


Elevation Bar

Elevation BarWith Architect 3D’s Elevation Bar you can easily place the selected item(s) to any level, including those that you have previously drawn. In addition to making sure windows, doors, and other components are placed at the correct elevation, you can easily place objects relative to previously-drawn entities. For example, placing a lamp on a table. For more information, see “Elevating Objects”, which begins on page 258.

Measurement ToolsThe measurement tools, available from the 2D Menu, include associative dimensions, window/door callouts and cursor dimensions visibility.

Associative Dimensioning are the measurements that appear as you are adding features. For example, the Associative Dimensioning feature will show how far from the ends of each wall the window is positioned.

When the Window/Door Callouts option is checked, the measurements of all window and door openings will be shown, with the wall measurements, and be displayed in the floor plan view.

Cursor Dimensions show exactly where your cursor is located, making it easy to place lighting a precise distance from a wall, for example.

For more information on these and other measurement tools, see “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

View IconsWhen you load Architect 3D, you will be working in 2D Full Plan View. This allows you to quickly draw walls, add doors and windows, and other drawing plan elements.

When you want to focus primarily on your 2D actions, while maintaining a clear view of the 3D design, select 3D View Window or Split 2D/3D View. These views are also useful for adding colors or materials. The Full 3D View and Elevation View are ideal when viewing or navigating the design in 3D.

As you move on to building a scale model of your design, RealModel View provides the pieces you will need.

For a full explanation of the view options, see the chapter titled “Viewing in 2D & 3D”, which begins on page 41.

Zoom and Pan ToolbarThe Zoom and Pan tools are quickly accessible from the main toolbar to make it easy to navigate your 2D drawing.

Zoom Tool - get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. For more information, see “Zooming In and Out in 2D”, which begins on page 42.

Pan Tool - moves the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view. For more information, see “Panning Across the 2D Drawing”, which begins on page 42.



Edit ToolbarTools that you will use most frequently are located on the Edit Toolbar. From top to bottom, these tool include:

■ Selection Tool used to select any 2D element in the design window. When an item is selected, its properties become available on the Properties tab. Use the Selection Tool to move selections and drag points to reshape.

■ Resize Segment Tool precisely update the length of an individual, previously-drawn wall, stairway, railing, or other straight segment.

■ Rotate Tool freely rotate the selection, or specify the exact amount of rotation (by double-clicking the tool).

■ Insert Point adds a point where you click.

■ Remove Point deletes the point where you click.

■ Fillet Corner adds a fillet (curved) corner to your topography, patio, freehand roof panel, floor, and other angled edges.

■ Chamfer Corner adds a chamfer (straight) corner to your topography, patio, freehand roof panel, floor, and other angled edges.

■ Visual Array Tool place a line of plants or objects at exact distances from each other.

Text & Dimension ToolbarTools for adding text and dimensions are located on the Text & Dimension Toolbar. Simply click a tool to activate it.

Note: When the application window is not large enough to display the entire toolbar, the Text & Dimension tools are collapsed and are accessible by clicking the arrow button that is displayed below the active tool.

■ Multi-Line Text add important information to your drawing. For example, add text to annotate rooms, specify a home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan.

■ Rotated Text place text at any angle needed.

■ Dimension Wall Spacing especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, for situations where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved.

■ Zero-Offset Dimension adds a horizontal, vertical, or angled dimension directly onto the measured element.

■ Offset Dimension adds a horizontal or vertical dimension with a custom offset distance between the extension lines and the measured element.

■ Length Dimension allows you to measure the distance of a single segment by placing a horizontal, vertical, or angled dimension with a custom offset distance between the extension lines and the measured element.

■ Diameter Dimension measure the diameter of a circle by dragging along the circle’s perimeter, automatically detects the opposite edge and displays the dimension in the middle of the circle.

Note: The Diameter Dimension Tool does not measure ellipses.

■ Leader Dimension annotate the elements in your workspace by positioning a leader dimension that points to an object, for example, when associating text with a 2D object. You can also automatically add a room’s name and area by pointing into an enclosed room.

■ ProjecTape sets and measures points at specified distances from walls, fences, as well as objects like furniture.


Properties Tab

Properties TabYou can easily modify elements you have previously drawn by selecting them and editing their options on the Properties tab. Properties are easily accessed by clicking an element on your floor plan.

For example, clicking a door accesses the customizable properties for doors and clicking a plant accesses the properties for plants.

If the Properties tab does not automatically display when you select an object, enable the auto display by clicking Window menu > Auto Display Tool Options. When a checkmark is visible, properties auto-display.

Note: You can also enable Auto Display by clicking Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and selecting the Auto display Tool Options on selection checkbox.

Libraries TabThe Libraries tab gives you access to the expansive libraries for adding objects, colors, materials, plants, and more to your design. Each library is organized into Content categories, and in some cases the categories include sub-categories. The available libraries include:

■ Stock Library content included with the initial installation

■ User Library items copied from the default library that can be edited

■ Downloaded Library content items downloaded from content packs

■ Favorites List items tagged as favorites

When you switch content libraries, the Preview bar is updated to only display those items that exist in the active library, so you can easy sort through items as you work on your design.

For more information on using the available libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.



Preview BarYou can click and drag objects, templates, materials, colors, and other items available from the Libraries tab, from their Preview Bars into your design. The Preview Bar changes to reflect your selection. For instance, if you click the Plants tab, plant options are displayed.

If you cannot add an object or material, try adding it to a different view. For example, you cannot add paint in the 2D view; this must be applied to a surface in a 3D view. Objects such as furniture or plants can be added to either the 2D or 3D view.

Status BarThe Status Bar is located in the lower left of the window and displays prompts, program messages, and measurements. It is a good place to look when you are holding the pointer over certain buttons or menu items to find their function.

Interface Color SchemeThe application interface uses a default color scheme, which you can change as desired. Color schemes are not saved with drawing files, so the application and .PRO files always open using the default color scheme.

To change the interface color scheme


Libraries tab

Libraries drop-down menu

Categories drop-down menu

Library categories

Category content displayed in Preview bar

Default library tab (active)

User library tab

Downloaded content library tabFavorites list tab


Build Green Information

2 Select User Interface and choose the color scheme you want from the Color Scheme drop-down menu.

3 Click OK to set the color scheme. The interface is updated when you select an option.

Build Green InformationArchitect 3D includes information to help you with designing an energy-efficient, environmentally-minded home. Tips and information are available to help guide you as you are creating your design. Features in your design that have “green” information available are highlighted with green in the design window when the Green Information Center is open. To access information about that feature, click to select the feature.

While nothing is selected in your design, general tips and guidelines are available for review.

To access green tips for features in your design

1 Click Help menu > Going Green. The Green Information Center window is displayed.

2 Click to select a feature in your drawing that is displayed in green and the green information that is available is displayed in the Green Information Center window.




Chapter 3

Before You DrawTo get the most benefit from Architect 3D, you should take a minute to become familiar with some of its basic concepts. With Architect 3D you can set a precise drawing scale, define units of measurement, and set the reference grid. There are also many performance settings you can apply to optimize drawing speed and 3D viewing.

Starting a New FileStarting a new file displays QuickStart, an easy way to start your design process. For more information, see “QuickStart”, which begins on page 103.

To save a new, unnamed file

1 Click File menu > Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and then click OK. Architect 3D automatically adds the PRO extension.

Opening a FileOpening a file makes it available for you to edit or print the plan. You can have more than one file open at a time. The exact number of files you can have open depends on the amount of memory in your system and the complexity of the home plan file. When you open a file, Architect 3D displays it in a new window.

To open an existing file

1 Click File menu > Open. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by browsing folders or drives.

3 Select the file you want and click Open.

To see a list of recently opened files

■ Click File menu > Open Recent and choose the file you want to open. The file loads into memory.

To clear the recently opened files listing

1 Click File menu > Open Recent > Clear Recent Designs List. A warning box is displayed.

2 Click Yes to delete all files from the listing.

Accessing the Sample PlansSample plans are a set of pre-designed home plans, not created by an architect. They can be used as-is or can be edited to your liking. Each of the available sample plans include 2D and 3D previews, and room dimensions.


Chapter Before You Draw3

To open a sample plan

1 Click File menu > Open Sample Plan.

(alternatively) Click Sample Plans on the Welcome window.

By default, all home styles are displayed. You can narrow the options by choosing the home style you want from the Style drop-down menu.

2 Scroll through the style options and choose the one you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as the plan’s dimensions.

(optional) Click the 3D Preview radio button to see the home in 3D.

3 When you find the plan you want, click Open Sample Plan. The plan is displayed in the design window.

Closing a FileWhen you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computer’s memory. When you are done working in Architect 3D, close all your files and exit the program.

To close a file

■ Click File menu > Close. If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, Architect 3D prompts you to save them before it closes the file.

To close all open files and exit

■ Click File menu > Exit. If any open drawings have unsaved changes, Architect 3D prompts you to save them before it closes their files.


Saving a File

Saving a FileWhen you open a file, Architect 3D copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disc. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo.

When you click the Save command, Architect 3D saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks.

To save an existing file

■ Click File menu > Save.

(alternatively) Right-click and choose Save on the context menu that is displayed (or press CTRL+S).

To save a file to a different name, drive, or folder


2 If you want to save the drawing under another name, type a name in the File Name text box.

3 If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box.

4 Click OK.

Importing FilesYou can import a variety of file types into Architect 3D. You can import the following types of files:

■ 2D DXF/DWG file (described below)

■ SketchUp file (described below)

■ 3D Custom Workshop object (see “3D Objects Libraries”, on page 74)

■ 3DS File (see “3D Objects Libraries”, on page 74)

■ Material To Library (see “Applying Building Materials”, on page 91)

■ Plant To Library (see “Plants Libraries”, on page 78)

■ 3D Background (see “Applying Building Materials”, on page 91)

To import a DXF/DWG file (2D only)

1 Click File menu > Import > DXF/DWG File. The Import DXF/DWG Design dialog box is displayed.

2 Find the file you want to import and then click to select it.

3 Click Open. The Import Scale dialog box is displayed. This determines the scale at which the file is imported.

Note: The import scale must match the scale units in the original plan.

4 Choose a Scale from the drop-down menu and then click OK.

Note: Once you have imported your file, you will need to convert the lines and surfaces into Punch! intelligent features or intelligent elements before they can be viewed in 3D. For more information, see “Converting Details to Intelligent Elements”, which begins on page 241.

To import a SketchUp file

1 Click File menu > Import > SketchUp File. The Import SketchUp Design dialog box is displayed.




3 Click Open. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design. The Status Bar displays the progress, as the file is converted.

Exporting FilesYou can export a 2D drawing file or a rendered image of your 3D View window to BMP, JPG, PNG, or TIFF format. Images can be exported in Textured, Wireframe, or ClearView modes. The exported image appears just as your 3D View window does. For best results, adjust your rendering settings to a high-resolution before exporting. Size is also controlled by how your 3D View window appears; the larger the 3D View window, the larger the file will be. For more information on controlling the 3D View environment, see “Viewing in 2D & 3D”, which begins on page 41.

You can also export an animation (see “To export animation”, on page 289) and a landscape quote (see “Exporting a Landscape Quote”, on page 85), if your file includes these features.

You can even send a list of plants and mulch beds to your iPhone and load it into the Landscape Quote app. Then you can enter the prices from the nursery to keep track of costs.

Exporting a DXF or DWG FileYou can export 2D floor plan files using a DXF or DWG file format so they are compatible with another CAD system.

■ Format drop-down menu allows you to choose either a DXF or DWG file format.

■ Version drop-down menu allows you to choose which version of the file format you want to export.

■ Color checkbox allows you to maintain the plan colors that are associated with the components on different plan tabs. When deselected, the entire drawing is exported in a monochromatic color scheme for all of the components.

To export a DXF/DWG file

1 Click File menu > Export > DXF/DWG File. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose the Format and Version you want.

(optional) Select the Color checkbox to maintain the different plan colors in the drawing.

3 Click Export. The Export dialog box is displayed.

4 Choose a destination for the file then type a file name in the File Name text box.

5 Click Save. Architect 3D automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension.

Exporting a 2D ImageYou can export your 2D drawing as an image file. There are many options available for exporting a 2D image.

■ Export Format specifies the file format for the 2D image.

■ Keep image size proportional checkbox allows you to resize the image so the width and height are the same as the largest direction. When deselected, the original image size is maintained.

■ Crop at lot boundary checkbox crops the image where the lot ends when selected. When deselected, the image extends past the lot boundary.

■ Image Size slider controls the size of the image to be exported.

■ Print current view only checkbox limits the exported image to what is visible in the current 2D view.

■ Ignore Topography Bounds checkbox controls if the topography line boundaries are considered in the exported image. When selected, the image is cropped to include the home design; when deselected the image fits the


Printing Floor Plans

home design and the length of each topography line. If you do not need to see the full length of all of the topography lines select this option.

■ Layer Visibility allows you to choose to export all of the visible layers on the current plan or just the current plan layer.

To export a 2D image

1 Click File menu > Export > 2D Image. The 2D Image Export Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose settings you want under Export Format, Image, and View Options, and then click Export. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.


4 Click Save. The 2D image is exported to the location you’ve specified. Architect 3D automatically adds the extension.

Exporting a 3D ImageYou can export your rendered 3D view as an image file. There are many options available for exporting a 3D image.

■ Export Format specifies the file format for the 3D image.

■ Export Quality specifies the render quality for the 3D image.

■ Size options allow you to export the image using the current 3D view size or choose a custom width and height.

To export a 3D Image

1 Click File menu > Export > 3D View Image. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose settings you want under Export Format, Export Quality, and Size, and then click OK. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.


4 Click Save. The 3D image is exported to the location you’ve specified. Architect 3D automatically adds the extension.

Exporting a VRML FileYou can export a drawing to VRML file mainly for use in 3D modeling.

To export a VRML file

1 Click File menu > Export > VRML. The Export VRML dialog box is displayed.


3 Click Save. The VRML file is exported to the location you’ve specified. Architect 3D automatically adds the extension.

Printing Floor PlansArchitect 3D prints, using the current Windows printer drivers. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print Setup dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. You can print your drawing in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, depending on your needs. Follow these steps to print your 2D drawing.

Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed.



■ Print Scale options allow you to print to a specified scale or fit the drawing to the page.

■ Print current view only checkbox limits the printout to what is visible in the current 2D view.

■ Ignore Topography Bounds checkbox controls if the topography line boundaries are considered in the exported image. When selected, the image is cropped to include the home design; when deselected the image fits the home design and the length of each topography line. If you do not need to see the full length of all of the topography lines select this option.

■ Layer Visibility allows you to choose to print all of the visible layers on the current plan or just the current plan layer.

■ Print Leader Markers button allows you to print just the leader dimensions in your drawing that use the Marker type.

To print a floor plan

1 Click File menu > Print (or press CTRL+P). The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose the Print Scale options and View Options you want and then click Print. The drawing is printed based on your current settings.

To change printer settings

1 Click File menu > Print (or press CTRL+P). The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Printer Setup button, in the top left corner. The Print Setup window is displayed.


Plotter Print Service

3 Choose the printer you want to use.

(optional) Change the paper orientation and size.

4 Click OK and then click Print.

Plotter Print ServiceYou can order scaled prints of your design on 36"x42" paper using the plotter print service. This menu option opens a web browser window so you should have internet access.

Note: Allow 7 to 14 days for delivery.

To print a large-scale drawing

1 Click File menu > Plotter Print Server. Your default web browser opens to the service website.

2 Follow the instructions on the page to complete this process.

Printing a 3D View RenderingArchitect 3D streamlines the process used to print the 3D View images. With just a couple of clicks, you can print beautiful, full-color renderings of your design.

■ Export Quality specifies the render quality for the 3D view printout.

■ Size options allow you to print the image using the current 3D view size or choose a custom width and height.

To print a 3D View rendering

1 Click File menu > Print 3D View. The Print 3D Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose the Export Quality and Size options you want.

3 Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed.



5 Click OK.



Printing an Elevation ViewYou can print the current elevation view to create a fully rendered printout of the view.

■ Print Quality specifies the render quality for the 3D view printout.

■ Print Options allow you to print the image to fit the printed page or using the plan scale that is specified.

To print a 3D Elevation View rendering

1 Open the Elevation View and set the view of your design that you want to print.

2 Click File menu > Print 3D View. The Print Elevation Options dialog box is displayed.

3 Choose the Print Quality and Print Options you want.

4 Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed.



6 Click OK.

Working with FloorsFloors are designated levels upon which your structure is built. Your design may use only one floor or up to 20 (depending on your software version). Floors are not necessarily placed one on top of another; floors may also exist at the same elevation but independent of each other.

By default, a project includes three floors:

■ Floor 1 is the base level floor■ Floor 2 is above Floor 1■ Floor 3 is above Floor 2

When a floor is positioned above another floor, an association is established so changes to the underlying floor are reflected in the above floors. For example, if Floor 2 is above Floor 1, and the ceiling height of Floor 1 is changed from 8'-0" to 10'-0", the base elevation of Floor 2 is also updated to include the additional two feet.


Working with Floors

Additionally, walls and interior elements that exist on the current floor and above floors can be updated to reflect changes to the floor properties.

As you design, you can edit your floor properties. For information, see “Editing Floor Properties”, on page 145.

You can also add or delete floors as needed. For more information, see “Adding and Deleting Floors”, on page 147.





Chapter 4

Viewing in 2D & 3DArchitect 3D provides many options for looking at your design on-screen. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, in Elevation view, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view, or using only Full 3D View.

When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction.

3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design.

In this chapter, you’ll learn about the numerous commands designed to let you view your design in both 2D and 3D.

Viewing the 2D PlanWhen initially designing your plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. In addition, Architect 3D organizes your floor plan into layers, which are each easily accessible with a single mouse click. For example, you can choose to view the deck plan with landscaping one moment, then quickly switch to view electrical and plumbing. Any combination ... any time!

To view the 2D plan only

■ On the View Toolbar, click the 2D Plan View icon. The 2D plan view is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > 2D Plan View.

To view all 2D floor plan levels at once

■ Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View All Floors.

To view the working floor only

■ Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View Working Floor Only.

Customizing Visible PlansDuring the design of your floor plan, there may be times when you want to view certain layers that are hidden by default. For example, while working on your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing will be. Architect 3D makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers. The visible plans are controlled on the Properties tab under Plan and Editing.

Note: Items on a hidden plan layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your drawing.

You can also assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans, inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of your crosshair. These color settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D menu. For more information, see “Screen Colors”, which begins on page 67.


Chapter Viewing in 2D & 3D4

To customize plan layers

1 Click the plan tab you want to use, and then make sure nothing is selected in the 2D or 3D views and click the Properties tab. The Plan and Editing settings are displayed.

2 Select the plan(s) you want to be visible in the design window or deselect the plan(s) you want to hide.

Show Topography LinesThere may be times when you will want to work on the Landscape Plan, but you may want to hide the topography lines. This is a one-click procedure. Topography lines are displayed when the Landscape plan tab is enabled, but you have the option to display or hide the topography lines.

To control topography lines visibility

■ Click 2D menu > Show Topography Lines. If there is a checkmark next to this menu selection, it is active. If there is not a checkmark next to this menu selection, it is inactive.

Zooming In and Out in 2DYou can get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. By dragging over the drawing, the view enlarges or decreases dynamically. You can also set the zoom factor to obtain exact zoom precision. Once you’ve finished viewing your plan close-up, you can return to the previous, full view with one mouse click.

To zoom in

1 On the main toolbar, click the Zoom Tool.

2 Click on the design window and drag up to zoom in; drag down to zoom out.

(alternatively) Zoom in and out easily with the wheel on your mouse.

Note: The location of the cursor will be centered on the design window.

To set the zoom factor

1 Click 2D menu > Set Zoom. The Set Plan View Zoom dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a new zoom factor, then click OK.

To reset the 2D plan view

■ Click 2D menu > Reset Plan View (or press CTRL+E). Your plan is reset to the original, default view.

Panning Across the 2D DrawingYou can move the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view, by panning. Panning also makes it easy to slowly view areas of your drawing piece-by-piece.

To pan in any direction

1 On the main toolbar, click the Pan Tool. The pointer changes to reflect Pan mode.

2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag in the direction you want to view. The view changes, dynamically, as you move the mouse.

42 Archit
ect 3D User’s Guide

Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size

(optional) With some mice you can hold down the wheel on your mouse and move in it the direction you want to pan.

Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window SizeYou can quickly position your entire design within your window, without using the Pan Tool or Zoom Tool.

To fit your entire design within your window

■ Click 2D menu > Fit to Window (or press CTRL+F).

Working with 3D ViewsArchitect 3D lets you view your design in photo-realistic 3D. You can select the exterior and interior wall colors, add realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D View Window, you can view your design from a variety of angles.

Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush!

With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on.

All 3D View window options are easily accessible from the right-click context menu, the View toolset in the main toolbar, and from the 3D menu.

2D Plan View 3D View Window

Split 2D/3D View Full 3D View



To refresh your 3D view

■ Click 2D menu > Refresh (or Press F5).

To display plan view

■ Click the Plan View icon on the main toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > 2D Plan View.

(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Plan View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To display the 3D View Window

■ Click the 3D View WIndow icon from the collapsible view toolset.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > 3D View WIndow.

(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D View Window from the context menu that is displayed.

To display a split 2D/3D view

■ Click the Split 2D/3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > Split 2D/3D View.

(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Split Plan/3D View from the context menu that is displayed.

To display full 3D view

■ Click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > 3D Full View.

(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the context menu that is displayed.

To display elevation view

■ Click the Elevation View icon from the collapsible view toolset.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > Elevation View.

(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Elevation View from the context menu that is displayed.

44 Archit

Using the 3D Cutaway Slider

There are predefined views available in the toolbar. Choose one of the views to quickly see your design from that direction, or click the Rotate Elevation View Angle Tool and drag in the view window to rotate around the design.

You can add doors, windows, and accessories while in Elevation View by selecting one of the tools and then clicking on a wall to place. For more info on editing door, window, and accessory properties see “Floor Plan Tab”, on page 115.

While in Elevation View, you can also edit roofs, decks, and 3D objects that exist in your design.

Using the 3D Cutaway SliderWith Architect 3D’s 3D Cutaway Slider you peel away layers of your floor plan, with ease. You can slice away layer after layer of your design from any of the four sides or from the top, making it easy to see room arrangements, furniture placement, and more. If you find you want more viewing room in the 3D View window, you can hide the 3D Cutaway Slider at any time.

The following cutaway directions are available. Click the arrows to change the cutaway direction.

Cutaway from the back of your plan

Cutaway from the front of your plan

Cutaway from the left edge of your plan

Cutaway from the right edge of your plan

Cutaway from the sky

Note: In these images we are cutting away from the sky down through the design.

To view a plan using the 3D Cutaway Slider

1 Open a 3D or elevation view and set the view that you would like to cut away.

2 Click the Cutaway Slider arrows to specify the direction from which you want to cutaway.

3 In the 3D View window, click and drag the 3D Cutaway Slider up and down to see a cutaway view of your design.



To hide the 3D Cutaway Slider

■ Click 3D menu > 3D Cutaway Slider Visible. When a checkmark is visible, the 3D Cutaway Slider is visible.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and deselect the Show 3D Cutaway Slider checkbox and then click OK.

Setting the Walk-Through Viewpoint AngleArchitect 3D has four pre-set viewpoint angles and, from those angles, moving to the needed viewpoint is easy. Below is example of the Right View. By clicking the other three directions, you can view your floor plan from the other edges of your lot.

To set a viewpoint angle

1 Click the Full 3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation and choose Front View, Back View, Right View, or Left View.

4

Selecting Features in 3D

Selecting Features in 3DWith Architect 3D’s 3D Selection Tool, you can click features on the 3D View window and they are automatically selected on your 2D plan. This makes fine-tuning your design much easier. For example, you can easily select windows that may be stacked on top of each other in the 2D design view.

In the image below, we’ve selected the table in the 3D View window.

Note: You can select features on the active floor and active plan only. If the feature you click does not become active, make sure it is on the active floor and plan.

To use the 3D selection tool

1 Open a 3D window and click the Select Objects in 3D Tool.

2 In the 3D View window, click a feature to select it. The feature is selected in the design window and its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.




Chapter 5

Drawing in 2DArchitect 3D provides many options for looking at your design onscreen. You can display several windows, each containing a different view of your plan. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view or using only Punch! 3D View.

When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction.

3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design.

2D Drawing MethodsThere are some common 2D drawing methods that you’ll use repeatedly while creating your design in Punch! Below are detailed steps for each of the drawing methods. Practice these methods before you begin, or refer back to this information as you draw. If a tool requires a different drawing method, it is explained where the tool is described.

Keyboard Shortcut Quick ReferenceThere are a couple of helpful keyboard shortcuts to be aware of as you draw. These can be helpful with precisely drawing segments.

For more information on snapping and laser alignment, see “AutoSnap and Alignment Options”, on page 53.

Click Once to PlaceThis method is used for items that do not attach to a walls, like columns, floor and ceiling receptacles, fixture lights, furnaces, and other items that are positioned freely in a design.

To draw using Click Once to Place

■ Position your cursor where you want the selection to be placed and click your left mouse button. The selection is placed at the location you click.


Key Description

CTRL Lock segment angle while dragging

SHIFT Disable snap points and laser alignment while dragging


Chapter Drawing in 2D5

Click-and-DragThis method is used for items like walls, roofs, pre-defined shapes (rectangle, circle/oval, line, arc, multigon), and other shapes that are based on a user-defined size. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display, see “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

To draw using Click-and-Drag

■ Position the cursor at the start point for the shape, then hold down the left mouse button and drag from the start point to the desired length. A rubber band line is displayed as you drag. Release to place.

Define 2D ShapeThis method is used for manually drawn shapes like floors, decks, railings, and more. Below is an example of the Draw Method drop-down menu for the Floor Tool (available on the Floor plan tab). Each Draw Method describes how the shape is drawn.

To draw using Define 2D Shape

1 When a tool that uses Define 2D Shape is active, the Draw Method drop-down menu becomes available on the Properties tab.

2 Click the Draw Method drop-down menu and choose the shape and method you want for the active tool.

3 Draw the shape based on the method you chose. For detailed steps to draw shapes, see the following sections:

■ “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, on page 233■ “Drawing Circles and Ovals”, on page 234■ “Drawing Lines”, on page 234■ “Drawing Polygons”, on page 235


2D Editing Methods

■ “Drawing Arcs”, on page 235■ “Drawing Circular Arcs”, on page 236■ “Drawing Multigons”, on page 237■ “Drawing Curves”, on page 237

Drag Along WallThis method is used for wall attachments such as windows, doors, receptacles, and more. As wall attachments, objects remain attached to the wall even if the wall is moved.

To draw using Drag Along Wall

■ Click-and-drag along a wall, release to place on the side where you want it.

2D Editing MethodsThere are some common editing methods that you’ll use repeatedly while creating your design in Punch! Below are detailed steps for each of the editing methods. Practice these methods before you begin, or refer back to this information as you draw. If a tool requires a different drawing method, it is explained where the tool is described.

For additional editing techniques, see the chapter titled “Edit Your Design”, which begins on page 255.

Selecting Points and 2D ShapesYou can select an individual point or segment on a shape or the entire shape.

To select points

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2 Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select one point or segment.

To select a 2D shape

■ Click the Selection Tool and then double-click a point or segment in a 2D shape to select the entire shape.

Reshaping and Resizing 2D ObjectsObjects created using the Click and Drag or Define 2D Shape drawing method can be reshaped or resized by dragging a point or segment. For information on how to lock segment angles or release snaps and alignment constraints, see “Keyboard Shortcut Quick Reference”, on page 49.

To reshape and resize 2D objects

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the point or segment you want to edit.

2 Drag the selection to reshape or resize the object. Release to place.

Elevating ObjectsYou can adjust the elevation of an individual object or a group of objects to a specific value or to match the elevation of a nearby object. You can also elevate all of the objects on an entire floor. For more information, see “Elevating Objects”, which begins on page 258.

Component DescriptionComponents that are added to your design from one of the plan tab have a default description you can change. The description text is used in the Description column in Estimator. In the example below, the Sink Description is displayed for editing.



Updates to the description text only affect the component in your plan; changes do not affect the original item in the content library. To edit the component description information in the library, copy the item to the User Library and then edit its details. For more information, see “Organizing Library Content”, which begins on page 69.

You can also edit the object information for custom workshop objects. For more information, see “Editing 3D Objects”, which begins on page 75.

To edit component description

1 Click the Selection Tool and then right-click the object and choose Description from the context menu.

2 Edit the text as needed and click OK.

Using the GridWith Architect 3D you can set specific grid properties that aid in drawing your home plan. You can set points, based on the reference grid, which is useful when you want to make sure certain points are specified precisely.

Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects and snapping objects to the grid. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is on.

You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing, grid style, and hiding or displaying.

To display the grid

■ Click 2D menu > Grid Visible. The grid is displayed on the design window.

(alternatively) Right-click the design window and click Grid Visible on the context menu that is displayed.

To align objects/features with an area of the grid

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object or feature you want to align.

2 Click Edit menu > Align to Grid, then click the area of the grid where you want your selection aligned.


AutoSnap and Alignment Options

To enable or disable Snap to Grid

When snap to grid is enabled, you can use the grid lines (and minor grid lines) as a reference to move selections based on those lines. Selections move based on the Snap Grid settings, which you can control by editing the grid settings (see “To configure grid settings”, on page 53).

■ Click 2D menu > Snap to Grid. The feature is enabled when a checkmark is visible and disabled when a checkmark is not visible.

(alternatively) Right-click the design window and click Snap to Grid on the context menu.

To configure grid settings

1 Click 2D menu > Grid Properties. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Grid Settings.

(alternatively) Right-click the design window and click Grid Properties on the context menu that is displayed (or press CTRL+G).

2 Edit the grid settings and then click OK.

■ Grid Visible checkbox controls whether the grid is visible (selected) or not (deselected). When the grid is visible, you can turn on or off the minor grid lines.

■ Grid Style specifies whether the grid uses lines or dots.

Note: Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric).

■ Grid Dots/Lines Spacing defines the horizontal and vertical measurements for the grid. This is the distance between each grid line/dot.

Note: Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs.

■ Snap Grid defines the horizontal and vertical measurements for the minor grid lines. Items you draw or drag-and-drop into the design window snap to the measurements you’ve defined here.

Note: Snap settings can be set as low as 0.0625 (1/16 inch) English, 0.01 meter (1 cm) Metric, and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 meter (Metric).

AutoSnap and Alignment OptionsSnap points are automatically enabled as you design. Snap points are designated points or “hot spots” where your cursor can lock-in, for help with accurate placement. Laser alignment is also available for easily aligning segments as you draw. Laser alignment and auto snaps can be enabled or disabled on Properties tab while nothing is selected in your design. Even more snaps settings are available in the Preferences window.



Auto SnapsBy default, when Auto Snaps are enabled the midpoint and end points are displayed when your cursor reaches these points. You can control these, and other “hot spots” or points, to which your cursor snaps on the Snap Options dialog box. Below, the midpoint snap point is displayed as the cursor is moved along a wall segment.

To control automatic snaps

■ Click in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, select the Auto Snap checkbox to enable all snaps, or deselect to disabled all snaps.

To control individual snap points, click the Snap Options button and select the snap option(s) you want to enable, or deselect the snaps you want to disable and then click OK.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > Snap Settings.

Intersections displays the intersection of two lines.

Segment Center displays the center point along a segment, as you drag.

On segment displays when your cursor is actively on a segment, as you drag.


Selection Filter

Object Center displays the center of an object as you drag to place within its bounds. A useful example would be centering a lamp on a table.

Angle Constraint locks a point to an adjacent segment’s angle. When selected, this also constrains a line angle to 1-degree increments as you draw.

Detection Radius Snap detection radius controls the size of the snap point detection area. To configure the detection radius, drag the slider to decrease or increase the detection radius.

Laser AlignmentIn addition to snap points, you can control the laser alignment, which is displayed when your cursor is in alignment with an existing point. In the example below, the cursor is positioned at the bottom of the drawing, where two end pointend points align. When the cursor is positioned at one of the end points and laser alignment is enabled, the alignment is displayed.

Laser alignment enabled Laser alignment disabled

To control laser alignment

■ Click in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, select the Laser Alignment checkbox to enable alignment, or deselect to disable alignment.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > Snap Settings.

Selection FilterThere will be times when you will place items on top of each other. To make it easier to select each layer, use the Selection Filter. For example, to select a transom window, placed over a door, you can select “Windows” in the Selection Filter Options dialog box, and then when you hold down CTRL and click where the window and door are placed you will only select the window.



To filter selections

1 Click 2D menu > Selection Filter Options (or press SHIFT+CTRL+S).

2 Select the feature(s) you want to be able to select and then click OK to close the window.

When you hold down CTRL, you will only be able to select those features.

Text FontUse text to add information to your drawing. For example, you might add text to annotate rooms, specify a home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan. Architect 3D gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your plan drawing, using different formatting techniques for each text instance. Text you place in your drawing is displayed on all 2D printed output. The text tools are available on the Text & Dimension toolbar.

Multi-Line TextUsing the Multi-Line Text Tool you can add multiple lines of text to your design for annotations. When adding text, you can edit the font properties by clicking the Font button, or edit the font after text is placed. For more information, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, which begins on page 58.


Text Font

To add multi-line text

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Multi-Line Text Tool and then click in the design window to define where the text will start. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the annotation in the text box. Press the ENTER key to move to the next line.

3 Click OK to add the text to your design.

Rotated Text Using the Rotated Text Tool you can add a single line of text at an angle for precise annotations. When adding text, you can edit the font properties by clicking the Font button, or edit the font after text is placed. For details on font settings, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, on page 58.

To add rotated text

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Rotated Text Tool and then click the area where you want to place text on the drawing page. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the annotation in the text box. Rotated text is a single-line of text.

3 Select the Text Angle you want or select Custom and type a custom angle in the text field.

4 Click OK to add the text to your design.



Edit Text and Text PropertiesOnce you’ve added text in your drawing you can edit the content, font properties, and alignment. When text is selected, the Text properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

■ The Edit button opens the Edit Text window, where you can edit the existing text and font properties.

■ Click the Font button to edit the Font, Font Style, and Size.

■ Align allows you to set the text justification for Left, Center, or Right (only available for multi-line text). Alignment is within the bounding text box.

Align Left Align Center Align Right


Dimensioning

DimensioningArchitect 3D automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy to precisely place walls, doors, and other items in your plan drawing. The powerful Dimension Wall Spacing Tool will be especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved. You’ll find this tool extremely useful when measuring between the main house and the walls of other buildings, like a garden shed or playhouse. In some instances, you might want to print your plan drawing without dimension annotation. You have the option of turning off automatic dimensioning, if you don’t want it displayed on the drawing page or as you draw.

All Dimensioning tools can be found on the Text & Dimension toolbar on the left side of the application window. When the application window is resized to the point where all of the text and dimension tools cannot be displayed, the toolbar collapses. When collapsed, click the pop-up menu to see all of the tools.

To control automatic dimension display

■ Click in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, select the Display dimension checkbox to enable all dimensions, or deselect to disable all dimensions.

(alternatively) Click 2D menu > Automatic Dimensioning to enabled or disable dimensions.

When dimensions are enabled, you can select the Display callouts checkbox to enable window and door callouts, or deselect to disable.

To control the display of room dimensions

1 Click the center of the room you want to edit. The room is highlighted in yellow and the room properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 Under Label, deselect the Dimensions checkbox to hide the room dimensions.

To show the room dimensions, select the Dimensions checkbox.

To control the display of the room area

1 Click the center of the room you want to edit. The room is highlighted in yellow and its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 Under Label, deselect the Area checkbox to hide the room area.

To show the room area, select the Area checkbox.

To add a room name label

1 Click the center of the room you want to edit. The room is highlighted in yellow and the room properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 Under Label, select the Name checkbox and type to room name you want in the text box, then press ENTER. The name is added to the room label in the drawing.

To hide the room name label, deselect the Name checkbox.

To control measurement unit indicators

1 Click 2D menu > Dimensioning & Fonts. The Design Options open to the Dimensioning and Fonts settings.

2 Click to select the Display measurement unit indicators checkbox to enable unit indicators in the design window, or deselect to disable.

3 Click OK.

Dimension Wall SpacingThis tool quickly places a dimension between two walls. The dimension must start along a wall, but does not have to end at another wall. When you release, the dimension automatically extends to the nearest wall surface.

Architect 3D User’s
Guide 59


To place a wall spacing dimension

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the dimension from one wall to another.

Zero-Offset DimensionThis creates dimensions from any point, surface, or object, even at angles.

To place a zero-offset dimension

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Zero-Offset Dimension Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag from one object to another.

Offset DimensionOffset dimensions are placed with the Offset Dimension Tool. This determines the horizontal or vertical distance between two points.

To place a offset dimension

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Offset Dimension Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the dimension from the start point of the measurement to the end point of the measurement. Release to set the dimension.


Dimensioning

3 Move the mouse in the direction you want the offset dimension to be placed and click to place the dimension.

Length DimensionThis allows you to measure the distance of a single segment by selecting the two end points, the dimension is positioned offset from the segment.

To place a length dimension

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Length Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the dimension from the start point of the measurement to the end point of the measurement. Release to set the dimension.

3 Move the mouse in the direction you want the offset dimension to be placed and click to place the dimension.

Diameter DimensionThis allows you to measure the diameter of a circle by dragging along the circle’s perimeter, automatically detects the opposite edge and displays the dimension in the middle of the circle.

Note: This dimension applies to circles only; you cannot measure the diameter of an oval.

To place a diameter dimension

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Diameter Dimension Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag along the edge of the circle. The dimension automatically snaps to the opposite edge of the circle.

3 Release to set the dimension.

Leader DimensionThis allows you to annotate your workspace by positioning a single arrow and leader line between two objects, for example, when associating text with a 2D object. You can also automatically add a room’s area and name by pointing into an enclosed room. When you place a leader dimension on a component or object, the description is automatically detected for the annotation. You can edit this as needed.

Note: To change the leader type, see “Leader Dimension Properties”, on page 62.



Once placed, you can edit the label text, including font properties and alignment, as well as change the leader type and arrowhead style. For more information, see “Leader Dimension Properties”, which begins on page 62.

To place a leader dimension

1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Leader Dimension Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the position for the arrowhead and the first segment of the dimension.

3 Release the mouse button and drag in the direction you want the second segment to be placed.

4 Click to place the dimension. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed.

5 Type the text you want to be displayed with the leader and then click OK. The text that is displayed is based on the leader type that is selected.

Leader Dimension PropertiesLeader dimensions can be customized by editing their text and alignment. You can also choose between a text label or a marker label, and customize the arrowhead style. To edit leader dimension properties, use the Selection Tool to select the dimension in the design window. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

■ Edit button opens the Edit Text dialog box for the selected text where you can edit the text and font style. For more information, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, which begins on page 58.

■ Find Label button automatically detects the component description or object information for an item in your drawing and updates the leader label text to match. To accurately find the label, the leader dimension arrowhead must be position on the item in the design window.

For information on editing component descriptions, see “Component Description”, on page 51.

■ Alignment options allow you to set the text justification for Left, Center, Right, or Auto.

■ Type specifies whether the leader dimension uses a marker or label.

■ Marker displays an incremental number, with the leader text visible when you hover over it with your mouse. This saves space when there is a lot of text to be displayed.

■ Label displays the leader text in the design window.

Marker Label

A list of leader markers can be printed. For more information, see “Printing Floor Plans”, which begins on page 56.


Dimension and Font Default Settings

■ Font button allows you to edit the Font, Font Style, and Size of the marker or leader text. For more information, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, which begins on page 58.

■ Dimension Style drop-down menu allows you to choose the end point style for the leader dimension.

Dimension and Font Default SettingsThere are a number of ways you can control and configure the dimensions and fonts that are displayed in your design.

The Dimensioning and Font properties are controlled in the Design Options dialog box. These are the default settings, so changes to the settings are applied to subsequent text or dimensions that are added to your design.

To access dimensioning and font properties

■ Click an empty space in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, click the Dimensioning and Font Options button.

(alternatively) Click 2D menu > Dimensioning & Fonts.

Automatic Dimensions DisplayThe Automatic Dimensions control the display of dimensions in your drawing. You can enable or disable different combinations of dimensions depending on your needs. You can also quickly enable or disable automatic dimensions from the Properties tab.



■ Automatic Dimension Visible checkbox controls the display of the available dimensions. When selected, dimensions are visible and you can control the display of the available dimensions; when deselected all dimensions are disabled.

■ Tiered exterior perimeter checkbox controls the display of wall dimensions that include more than one wall segment. When enabled, both the exterior wall segment dimensions and the total wall measurement are displayed. When disabled, only the individual wall segment dimensions are displayed.

Tiered exterior perimeter disabled

Tiered exterior perimeter enabled

■ Wall segments controls the display of dimensions along wall segments. To control dimensions on individual walls, see “Wall Properties”, on page 119.

■ Window and door callouts controls the display of dimensions for windows and doors in the design. Select the checkbox to enable; deselect to disable.

(alternatively) You can also control callouts display by selecting or deselecting the Display callouts checkbox on the Properties tab while nothing is selected in the design window or click 2D Menu > Window and Door Callouts.

■ Draw Cursor Tracking Dimensions controls the display of dimension lines from the cursor when a tool is selected. Select the checkbox to enable; deselect to disable.

Cursor Tracking Off Cursor Tracking On

Note: You can also control cursor dimensions display by right-click in the design window and choosing Cursor Dimensions or clicking 2D menu > Cursor Dimensions (dimensions are enabled when a checkmark is visible).

■ Wall Attachment Dimension drop-down menu allows you to choose the position of wall attachment dimensions.

6

Dimension and Font Default Settings

■ Position from edges measures the distance between each edge of the attachment (its width) and the distance from each edge to the nearest wall.

■ Position from centers measures the distance from the center of the attachment to the nearest wall on either side.

Position from edges

Position from centers

■ Dimension Text Placement drop-down menu specifies how you want dimension text positioned.

■ Above dimension line positions dimension text above the dimension line. ■ On dimension line positions dimensions text along the dimension line.

Above dimension line

On dimension line

Automatic Fonts and Arrowhead StylesThe Automatic Fonts and Arrowhead Styles settings control the look and feel of the automatic dimensions in your drawing. When automatic dimensions are enabled, these settings are applied.

■ Automatic dimensioning Font button opens the Font dialog box. These settings control the font used for automatic dimensions. For more details on font settings, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, on page 58.

■ Automatic dimensioning arrowhead style drop-down menu provides access to the available end point styles.



■ Automatic room label Font button opens the Font dialog box. These settings control the font used for room labels, when the Label Name is enabled. For more details on font settings, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, on page 58.

Default Fonts and Arrowhead StylesThe Default Fonts and Arrowhead Styles settings control the look and feel of the dimensions and text you add in your drawing using the text and dimensioning tools.

■ Text object default Font button opens the Font dialog box. These settings control the font used for text added using the text tools. For more details on font settings, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, on page 58.

■ Leader dimension default Font button opens the Font dialog box. These settings control the font used for text associated with leader dimensions. For more details on font settings, see “Edit Text and Text Properties”, on page 58.

■ Default leader arrowhead style drop-down menu provides access to the available end point styles for leader dimensions. The default is applied to all leader dimensions.

The Virtual RulerThe Virtual Ruler works like a real-world tape measure and is a handy feature for measuring items in your home plan that are not automatically dimensioned.

When active, it is displayed in the middle of the window, where you can move it into any position necessary to make a needed measurement. To move the Virtual Ruler, click and drag from the center. To resize, click and drag on one of the ends. You are not constrained to vertical or horizontal; the Virtual Ruler can be stretched in any direction necessary.

To measure using the Virtual Ruler

1 Click 2D menu > Show Virtual Ruler. The Virtual Ruler is displayed on the design window.

(alternatively) Right-click the design window and choose Center Virtual Ruler.

2 Click-and-drag an end in the direction you want to measure. The measurement is displayed in the center of the Virtual Ruler.

(optional) Click-and-drag the Virtual Ruler from its center to move it to a new location on the design window.

Tip: Zoom in on the area you are measuring so you have a close-up view of the ruler.

To hide the Virtual Ruler

■ Click 2D menu > Show Virtual Ruler to uncheck the option.


Screen Colors

(alternatively) Right-click the Virtual Ruler and click Hide Virtual Ruler on the context menu.

Screen ColorsYou can assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans, inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of your crosshair. These color settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D menu.

To change a design color

1 Click 2D menu > Screen Colors. The Preferences dialog box is opened to the Design Colors settings.

2 Click the thumbnail of the color you want to change. The Color dialog box is displayed.

3 Click a color from the Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix.

Note: The Color|Solid preview box displays the chosen color.

(optional) On the right side of the dialog box, move the arrow next to the color bar to define the luminosity or type values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity variables text boxes or RGB text boxes.

4 Click OK and then click OK in the Preferences window.



To reset all colors

■ Click 2D menu > Screen Colors and click the Reset Colors button. All colors will be reset to the default values. Click OK to close the window.


Chapter 6

Adding 3D FeaturesArchitect 3D lets you view your home in a fully-rendered 3D view. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of woods to make your home design completely unique. View all your customizations in the 3D View Window.

By adding color, trim, and materials, you can make decorative changes to the 3D presentation of your home design as quickly as you think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of colors, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a paintbrush!

Organizing Library ContentThe Categories drop-down menu for each library includes three content libraries and a favorites list.

Stock Library The Stock Library includes content that is delivered with the initial installation of the software. This content cannot be edited directly, however you can copy these items to the User Library for editing, and/or add them to the Favorites list.

User LibraryThe User Library is populated when you copy items from another library to the User Library, either from within the application or in Windows Explorer. The User Library is also populated with objects and components you save using the PowerTools, for example Door Designer. When items are copied from a Stock Library, you can edit the object.



Chapter Adding 3D Features6

User Library content must be organized by category, so when you copy an item to the User library, you must choose a category or create a new category. You can choose to have one category for all your User Library content or create multiple categories, and sub-categories, to organize your content.

There are two methods for creating a category:

■ When you right-click an item in the application and choose Copy To User Library, the Copy To Library window is displayed. Any categories that you’ve already created in this library are listed in this window, and you can choose one of them if you want to copy the item to one of the categories.

To create a new category, click the New button and choose to either create a new top-level category or select one of the existing categories to create a sub-category below it.

■ Using Windows Explorer you can create and delete folders to manage categories in the User Library folder. The User Library folder location in Windows Explorer is: C:\Users\<USER>\My Documents\Punch! Software\User Library. Once a category exists, you can then copy content into the folder and it will be available in the application.

When copying an object from another version of Punch! software, there are three files that need to be included: .pob file, .pod file, and .ppv file. If any of these is missing, the object will not copy successfully.

Note: When you add content to the User Library category folders, the content files must exist in a folder where no subfolders exist. For example, you can create a category named “Patio Pavers” and then add the content files to that category, but you cannot add files to that category and also create more folders for “light patio pavers” and “dark patio pavers.”

To create a new category when copying an item

1 Right-click an item in the Preview bar and choose Copy To User Library. The Copy to Library window is displayed.

2 Click the New button then choose New Category Here to create a new top-level category, or choose an existing category to create a sub-category, and then click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.

3 Type a name for the category and then click OK.


Organizing Library Content

4 Select the library where you want to copy the item and then click the Copy button.

To create a new category in Windows Explorer

1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder location: C:\Users\<user>\Documents\Punch! Software\User Library.

2 Double-click the folder for the library where you want to add a category.

3 Click the New Folder button and type the category name and then press ENTER.

You can create sub-categories inside the new category folder to further organize content.

To delete category

1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder location: C:\Users\<user>\Documents\Punch! Software\User Library.

2 Delete the category or sub-category you want to remove.

Downloaded content libraryOccasionally, new library content becomes available and can be installed via content pack. This is considered downloaded content. Downloaded content is automatically added to its own folder within the User Library folder, which you can access by clicking the Downloaded content tab on the Categories drop-down menu.

To download content packs

1 Browse to the Content Packs page on the Punch! Software website and download the content pack you want. Most content packs must be purchased.

2 Navigate to the folder location where the content pack EXE was downloaded and double-click the file to start to content installation. The Welcome window is displayed.

3 Click Next and then click Finish to complete the installation. The content pack is automatically added to the “DLC” folder in the User Library for the relevant category.

Favorites List The Favorites list gives you the flexibility to compile items that you like, or plan to use later, to your Favorites as you browse through content categories. You can also populate your Favorites list with all of the items you may want to add to a particular room or area of your design and then add them all at once without having to search the Preview bar for


http://www.punchsoftware.com/c-37-punch-content-packs.aspx


the item you want. When you tag an item as a Favorite, a star appears so you can see that it is a Favorite, and the item is added to your Favorites list.

The contents in the Favorites list is relative to the library where they exist. For example, if you add some paint colors to the Favorites list, you won’t see those in the Favorites list while you’re in the Furnishings library; when you’re in the Furnishings library, only items added to the Favorites list from Furnishings are visible. As you add items to your Favorites list, they are organized using the same category/sub-category structure that exists in the Categories drop-down menu.

To add or remove Favorites

■ Click the star in the bottom-right corner of an item thumbnail to add it to the Favorites list.

To remove an item from the Favorites list, click the star again to deselect it.

(alternatively) You can also right-click an item to add or remove it from the Favorites list.

To access the Favorites library

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose the library you want from the Libraries drop-down menu.

2 Click the Content drop-down menu and click the Favorites tab. The items that have been added to the Favorites library are displayed in the Preview bar.

To hide the library, click the Favorites tab again.

Using the ProjecTapeArchitect 3D’s ProjecTape helps you position plants, furniture, retaining walls, and more, exactly where you need them, the first time! The ProjecTape displays the dimensions from its center point to each of the four nearest objects or surfaces, allowing you to measure from multiple surfaces at once and specify the exact position you are looking for. Once placed, you can reposition the ProjecTape manually or by specifying values.

In the example below, the ProjecTape is used to position the corner of a nightstand a specific distance from two walls.

To position the ProjecTape

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the ProjecTape Tool.


Using the ProjecTape

2 Move the cursor around the design window to see the distance to each of the nearest surfaces or objects. When the center of the ProjecTape is positioned where you want it, click to place it in your design.

Once placed, drag the center point to move the ProjecTape to a new position or use your arrow keys to nudge it incrementally in a specific direction.

Note: When you adjust one end point, the other points are affected.

To reposition the ProjecTape by a specified distance

■ Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the center point of the ProjecTape. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

When the ProjecTape is selected, you can reposition it by rotating a specified amount or incrementally. You can also reposition the ProjecTape by defining the distance the center point should be from each of its end points.

■ Rotation Angle value determines the angle of the ProjecTape, which rotates from 0 to 359 degrees, in a counter-clockwise direction. Type a value in the Rotation Angle field and press the ENTER key, or click the Rotate buttons to rotate the ProjecTape in increments of 1-degree in the desired direction.

■ Detections setting specifies whether dimensions are measured from Wall Surfaces or Wall Centers.

Wall Surfaces Wall Centers

■ Set Distance From allows you to specify the distance from a selected point to the ProjecTape center point. Each point on the Properties tab corresponds to a color-coded end point in the design. For example, the Yellow point is selected so the distance that is entered is applied to the length between the center point and the yellow point.



■ Dimension Text controls the visibility of the ProjecTape dimensions. When selected, dimensions are displayed. When deselected, dimensions are hidden.

To turn off the ProjecTape

■ Click to select the center point of the ProjecTape and press the DELETE key to remove the ProjecTape from your design.

3D Objects LibrariesWith Architect 3D, you can add details to the 2D drawing and 3D view presentation of your design using a variety of objects. The 3D objects are available in the Furnishings library.

Furnishings includes many categories of objects for you to add to your design. When a category is selected its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar. You can then drag-and-drop an object into your design. There are also a number of library options for organizing content as you design. You can add objects from any of the available content libraries or favorites list. For more information on the different content libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69. In addition to the content in the available libraries, you can import a Custom Workshop object or 3DS file that you have saved and then use that file in your design.

Objects can be dropped into the design window or dropped into a 3D view window. When dropped into a 3D view, the object elevation is based on the location of your cursor. If dropped onto a floor or ceiling surface, the object is automatically placed at the surface elevation.

Objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing in 3D mode; in the design window objects appear as 2D symbols.

The Furnishings library is accessible at any time and objects can be placed on any plan tab. Once placed in your design, 3D objects can be customized using 3D Custom Workshop.

To add 3D furnishing objects to your design

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Furnishings from the Libraries drop-down menu.

2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the Library tab and category you want to view. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.

Some of the categories are organized into sub-categories. Click to expand a category to see its contents.

3 Scroll through the available objects in the Preview Bar and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto the design window or 3D view window.

Select the object you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window to position it as needed.


Editing 3D Objects

To import a 3D Custom Workshop object

1 Click File menu > Import > Punch! Custom Workshop Object. The Import Punch! 3D Object dialog box is displayed.


Note: You can import .POB files only.

3 Click Open. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design.

4 Double-click the object to open it in 3D Custom Workshop.

To import a 3DS file

1 Click File menu > Import > 3DS File. The Import 3DS Design dialog box is displayed.


3 Click Open. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design. The Status Bar displays the progress, as the file is converted.

Editing 3D ObjectsOnce you’ve placed 3D objects in your drawing, it’s easy to move, delete, copy, and rotate objects, usually involving just one or two mouse clicks. In the example below, a chair is selected in the 3D view and its properties are displayed on the Properties tab, including its rotation angle, sizing, and rendering options. You can also edit objects using 3D Custom Workshop. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which begins on page 429.

To resize an object

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and then click to select an object. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 Type the Width, Height, and Depth, in feet and inches or percentages, to customize them. Press ENTER to accept each new value.

(optional) Type an angle, if you want to rotate the object. Press ENTER to accept each new value.

To rename objects


2 Right-click an object and choose Object Information from the context menu. The Custom Workshop Object Information dialog box is displayed.



3 Type a new name in the Object Name text box then click OK.

Note: This is the name that is listed in the spreadsheet, created by Punch! Estimator.

2D Symbols LibraryA library of 2D symbols is available. These are visual representations you can add to your design that do not appear in the 3D view.

2D Symbols includes many categories of symbols for you to add to you design. When a category is selected its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar. You can then drag-and-drop a symbol into your design.

You can also add symbols from the User Library, Download Content, Favorites list. For more information on the different content libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

It is important to keep in mind that the objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing in 3D mode. In the plan drawing, objects appear as 2D symbols, while textures such as color, wallpaper, wainscoting, and other materials, do not appear in 2D at all.

Once placed in your design, you can edit 2D symbols using the Symbol Editor. For more information, see “Symbol Editor”, which begins on page 417.

To add 2D symbols

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose 2D Symbols from the Libraries drop-down menu.



76 Archit

Wall Accessories Library

3 Scroll through the available symbols and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto your design window.

Select the symbol you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window to position it as needed.

Wall Accessories LibraryThe Wall Accessories category is very large and includes artwork as well as drapes, blinds, curtains, and other window and door accessories, which should be used in conjunction with the Wall Accessory tool (available on the Floor plan tab).

The elements in the Wall Accessories library are applied to an existing accessory in the 3D view using drag-and-drop. Artwork, which is available from the Wall Accessories category, is applied to a wall in the 3D view using drag-and-drop.

For information on adding accessories to your drawing, see “Adding Accessories”, on page 138.

To add wall accessories using drag-and-drop

1 Open a 3D view window and then click the Libraries tab and choose Wall Accessories from the Libraries drop-down menu.



3 Scroll through the available wall accessories and drag-and-drop the one you want to place; onto an accessory in the 3D view window.

If SmartWand is enabled, choose how you want the accessory applied. For more information, see “Using the SmartWand”, which begins on page 94.



Plants LibrariesThousands of plants are included with Architect 3D, which makes designing your landscape easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the ones that grow best in your region.

In addition to the content in the available libraries, you can import a plant image and a corresponding plant information file to add your own plant(s) to the library.

Plants can be dropped into the design window or dropped into a 3D view window. When dropped into a 3D view, the plant elevation is based on the location of your cursor. If dropped onto a floor or ceiling surface, the object is automatically placed at the surface elevation.

Tip: Hover your cursor over the preview of the plant its name is displayed in the Status Bar.


Plants Libraries

Note: You can see all of the plants in your drawing by showing the Plant Inventory Bar. For more information, see “Plant Inventory Bar”, which begins on page 81.

Below are some references that may be helpful as you design:

■Elevating Objects■Viewing Hardiness Zones■Growing the Landscape■Adding a Visual Array■Filling a Shape with Plants

To add plants

1 Click the Landscape plan tab and then click the Libraries tab and choose Plants from the Libraries drop-down menu.



3 Scroll through the available options and drag-and-drop the plant you want to place onto your design window or onto your 3D view window.



To view plant description, requirements, and growth information

■ On the design window, right-click the plant and choose Plant Details on the context menu. The Plant Details window is displayed, showing the available information for that plant.

To edit plant description, requirements, and growth information

1 Copy the plant to the User Library. For information on working with the different libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

1 Navigate to the plant preview in the User Library Preview bar, then right-click the plant and choose Edit Details. The Plant Details dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the details you want to change and then click OK.

To import a plant

1 Click File menu > Import > Plant to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Find the file you want to import and then click to select it. A preview is displayed.

3 Click Open. The Plant Import Wizard welcome page is displayed.

(optional) Click Import to import an information file (.pti file) for this plant.

4 Click Next. The Description page is displayed.

5 Type characteristics in the corresponding fields to describe the plant you are importing and then click Next. The Requirements page is displayed.

80 Architect 3
D User’s Guide

Plant Inventory Bar

6 Specify the plant’s requirements, such as sunlight, water, and soil type, and then click Next. The Miscellaneous page is displayed.

7 Specify the planting zone and growth rate, and then click Next. The Finish page is displayed.

Note: For more information on regional and temperature requirements, see “Viewing Hardiness Zones”, on page 82.

8 Choose the Plant Category where you want to import the plant or click the New button to create a new category or sub-category.

Note: Some categories have sub-categories. Simply expand the main category to see the sub-categories.

(optional) Type a new name in the Save File As field.

9 Click Finish. The plant is imported based on the details you’ve provided and is displayed in the preview bar automatically.

The plant details can be edited in the Plant Details dialog box. For more information, see “To view plant description, requirements, and growth information”, which begins on page 80.

Plant Inventory BarArchitect 3D keeps track of which plants you have used in your landscape. The Plant Inventory Bar shows all plants that are on the visible plan and on the active floor. From this bar, you can easily find and/or replace all occurrences of each plant in your design.

When the Plant Inventory Bar is visible, you can select all occurrences of a plant in your design, delete plants from your design, and replace plants in your design by dragging a different plant onto an existing plant in the Plant Bar.

To access the plant inventory bar

■ Click Design menu > Show Plant Bar. The Plant Inventory Bar is displayed across the bottom of the design window.

To select all occurrences of a plant

■ On the Plant Inventory Bar, double-click a plant. All occurrences of that plant are selected in the plan.

To delete a plant

■ On the Plant Inventory Bar, right-click a plant and choose Delete Plants. All occurrences of that plant are deleted from the design.

To replace all occurrences of a plant

■ On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to use; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the plant you want to replace on the Plant Inventory Bar. All occurrences of that plant are updated in the design.



Viewing Hardiness ZonesArchitect 3D includes USDA Hardiness Zone maps for the contiguous 48 states, Alaska and Hawaii, Canada, Europe, and Australia. All of the maps are available from the Plants

The zones in the hardiness zone map correspond to the zones listed in the plant details for each plant, so you can easily find the ideal plants for your location. All plants included in Architect 3D can be sorted using this information.

For information on sorting plants see “Finding Plants”, which begins on page 82.

For steps to access plant details see “To view plant description, requirements, and growth information”, which begins on page 80.

To view a hardiness zone map

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Plants from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Plants categories become available.

2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the menu, click the Options button. The Hardiness Zones are displayed on the menu.

3 Click the Hardiness Zone map you want to view.

To hide the hardiness zone map

■ Click anywhere on the zone map.

Finding PlantsArchitect 3D includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. PlantFinder is a powerful sorting engine that lets you see only the plants that fit your particular criteria. You can also find plants that are already in your design or by searching for a plant name.

Sorting PlantsBy selecting the plant characteristics you want and deselecting the ones you don’t want, you can filter the plants that are displayed in the Preview Bar for a selected plant category. Only the plants matching all the selected options are displayed in the Preview Bar.

Tip: To narrow your search, check fewer boxes.


Finding Plants

To sort plants


2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the menu, click the Options button.

3 Choose PlantFinder from the Options menu. The PlantFinder dialog box is displayed.

4 Deselect the criteria that does not meet your needs or select the criteria you do need.

(optional) Click the View All buttons to select all options in a category.

5 Click OK. Only the plants matching all the variables selected are displayed in the Preview Bar when viewing a plant category.

Locating a Plant in your DesignWith so many plant options, you may lose track of where you found a plant that you’ve added to your design. There is an easy way to track down a plant from your design window or from a 3D view window.

To locate a plant in the design window

■ In the design window, right-click the plant you want to locate and choose Locate Plant on the context menu. The plant category is displayed on the preview Bar and the plant is selected.



To locate a plant in the 3D view window

■ In the 3D view window, click the Find Applied Tool and CTRL+click the plant. The plant category is displayed on the preview Bar and the plant is selected.

To find a plant by name


2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the menu, type the botanical or common name of the plant in the text field and click the Search button. Plants matching the criteria you specified are displayed in the Preview Bar.

To view all plants

■ Click the Plants library drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the menu, click the Options button and choose View All Plants.


Growing the Landscape

Growing the LandscapeWith Architect 3D you can watch your landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can watch your landscape change over 20 years.

There are two ways to grow the plants in your landscape:

■ Grow to a specific age The Plant Growth Projection age is available on the General page in the Design Options window and allows you to enter the age (in years) that you want your landscape.

■ Grow incrementally by year The Plant Growth Meter is available on the Landscape plan toolbar and allows you to grow your landscape incrementally, one click at a time.

Note: To change the planting age for individual plants, see “To customize the planting age”, on page 85.

To grow your landscape to a specific age

1 Click Design menu > Plant Growth Projection. The Design Options dialog box opens to the General design settings.

2 Under the Plant Growth Projection section, type the maximum growing age for plants in the Grow To text field and click OK. Plants grow to the age you’ve specified.

To grow your landscape incrementally

1 Open a 3D view window and position it to easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch mature.

2 Click the Landscape Tab. The Plant Growth Meter is displayed to the right of the plan tools.

3 Clicking the smaller tree to the left of the Plant Growth Meter makes the plants appear younger, while clicking the larger tree, on the right, makes them appear older.

The age is displayed in the Status Bar as you click the Plant Growth Meter.

To customize the planting age

1 Click to select the plant you want to customize. The plant’s properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 In the Age Planted text box, type the age of the plant at the time of planting and press ENTER.

Note: Planting age can only be adjusted after a plant is placed.

Exporting a Landscape QuoteYou can export your landscape design to the Punch! Landscape Quote app for iPhone.

■ Plant list is built automatically from your design project



■ Quantities are automatically added for plants

■ Mulch bed list is created automatically

■ Area is imported for each mulch bed

For more information visit the Punch! Software website: http://www.punchsoftware.com/c-31-iphone-ipad-apps.aspx.

To export to Landscape Quote

1 Click File menu > Export > Landscape Quote.

2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Architect 3D automatically adds the extension, then click OK.

3 Email that file to your iPhone and then on your iPhone, press the attachment icon and select Open in “LandscapeQ”.

4 Once in Landscape Quote, just fill in the prices of the items you want to budget.

Applying TrimsIt is easy to add base trim, crown molding, or library paneling for an elegant appearance or use wainscoting if you want to apply two different materials on one wall. You can also add case molding around doors and windows and even apply trim to the top of cabinets for a completely unique look. All of these customizations are made in the 3D view window.

Trim is applied to directly to the surfaces in the 3D view using drag-and-drop. You can change a trim style by applying a new style right on top of an existing style and even remove trim after it has been applied.

There are three trim styles available from the Trim library:

■ Base Trim

■ Crown Trim

■ Library Paneling

The Base Trim Library and Crown Trim Library include categories of trim, including window and door casing styles. The Library Paneling library includes various heights of paneling to apply to your design.

If SmartWand is enabled, you can choose to apply to the individual surface or to all similar surfaces. For more information, see “Using the SmartWand”, which begins on page 94.

To apply paint and materials to trim, see “Applying Paint and Color”, which begins on page 87 or see “Applying Building Materials”, which begins on page 91.

To apply base trim and crown trim

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Trim from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Trim Type libraries become available.

2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose Base Trim Library or Crown Trim Library. The trim style categories are displayed.


http://www.punchsoftware.com/c-31-iphone-ipad-apps.aspx

Applying Paint and Color


4 Scroll through the available trim options and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto a surface in the 3D view window.

To apply library paneling


2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose Library Paneling. Its contents appear in the Preview Bar.

3 Scroll through the available trim options and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto a surface in the 3D view window.

To remove wall trim


2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose the trim type that you want to remove. The trim styles are displayed in the Preview Bar.

3 Drag-and-drop the Remove Trim style onto the wall from which you want to remove trim.

Applying Paint and Color With Architect 3D, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks. Walls are just one example of what can be colorized; you can also apply color to furniture, window trim, doors, and other surfaces. All of these customizations are made on the 3D view window.

There are three types of Paint Colors available:

■ Custom Colors

■ Color Ramp

■ Paint Library

Custom Colors Custom colors are themed color groups, each containing colors that can be customized using the Color dialog box. You can start with one of the basic colors available, then change the RGB composition (red, blue, and green values), or double-click a color in the color spectrum window to “mix” your own color.



In addition to customizing colors from the Preview Bar, you can add custom colors to your library. If you see a color you like, maybe a shade of green in the grass, or a fabric on a couch that is not currently available as a color, you can add that color to your library. For more information on adding custom colors, see “Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View”, on page 90.

To define a custom color

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Paint Colors from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Paint Colors Type libraries become available.

2 Choose Custom Colors from the Paint Colors Type drop-down menu. The Categories drop-down menu becomes available.

3 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the category you want. Its contents appear in the Preview Bar.

4 In the Preview Bar, right-click the color you want to customize and click Choose Color (or double-click the color preview). The Color dialog box is displayed.

5 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors, or click in the color spectrum block to select a color.

(optional) Adjust the current Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity, or Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color.

6 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar.

To apply the color, drag-and-drop the color onto a surface in the 3D view window.

Color Ramp The Color Ramp offers a spectrum of colors with twenty-five shades for each color option. To see the colors, drag the slider along the spectrum. The Preview Bar displays the shades that are available for each color.

To apply color from the color ramp


2 Choose Color Ramp from the Paint Colors Type drop-down menu. The Color Ramp options become available. Twenty-five shades of the selected color are displayed in the Preview Bar.

3 Drag the slider, below the color spectrum, to change the color family.

4 Scroll through the available shades in the Preview Bar to view the variations of that color and then drag-and-drop the color you want onto a surface in the 3D view window.

8

Applying Paint and Color

Paint Library The Paint Library includes interior and exterior groups of colors.

To make designing easier, you can create custom Decorator Palettes. For more information, see “Using the Decorator Palette”, which begins on page 291.


There are a couple of ways to search for paint colors, including using keywords and using the Paint Chooser.

■ Keyword Search is available on the Categories drop-down menu. Type the color you are looking for in the text box and click the Search button. All of the applicable colors are displayed in the Preview bar.

■ Paint Chooser displays the active category all in one window with small thumbnails of the colors and a large preview of the selection. You can change the active category by clicking the drop-down menu in the top-left corner of the window and choosing a different category. To view the category, you must click OK on the drop-down menu.

To apply paint


2 Choose Paint Library from the Paint Colors Type library drop-down menu. The Categories drop-down menu becomes available.





4 Scroll through the available paint colors and drag-and-drop the paint color you want onto a surface in the 3D view window.

Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D ViewAs you experiment with different colors and materials during the design process, you may want to identify a previously-used material. This is easy with Architect 3D’s Find Applied Tool. You can also identify a color you like in your design and add it to the Custom Colors library.

Note: When adding a custom color, the color replaces the first color in the Gray Tones category. You can change the custom colors at any time. For more information on editing these colors, see “Custom Colors”, on page 87.

Note: You can also use the Find Applied Tool to locate plants in the 3D View. For more information, see “Locating a Plant in your Design”, which begins on page 83.

The material identified in the example below is the placemat on the table.

To use the find applied tool

1 Open a 3D view window and click the Find Applied Tool.

2 In the 3D view window, click the color or material that you want to identify. That color or material is displayed in the Preview Bar.

To create a new color

1 Open a 3D View window and click the Find Applied Tool.

2 Press SHIFT and click the color you want to add. A dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Yes to save the color to your Custom Colors library.

90
Architect 3D User’s Guide

Applying Building Materials

Applying Building MaterialsWith Architect 3D, customizing the materials of your home is a simple drag-and-drop procedure. Available materials include backgrounds, brick, stucco, gravel, roofing, and many more. You can even apply two different materials to a wall, using the Wainscoting feature. For more information, see “Applying Trims”, which begins on page 86.

You can create and import your own custom materials and background images. When importing materials, the User Library is the location where materials are imported. If you do not have a User Library folder created for Materials, you can create a new folder when importing. For more information on working with the libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.


To apply materials

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Materials from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Materials categories become available.



3 Scroll through the available materials and drag-and-drop the material you want to onto the desired surface in the 3D view window.



To import a material

1 Click File menu > Import > Material to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed.


3 Click Open. The Material Importer dialog is displayed.

■ In the Material Preview section you can choose the number of tiles you want the material to have. ■ Seamless Options control the seams on the edges of the material. Horizontal blends images along their

sides; Vertical blends images along the top and bottom; Both blends horizontally and vertically; None does not blend.

■ Blend Options control the distance and intensity of the blended edge. A lower blend option concentrates blending at the edges of the image. A higher blend option concentrates blending across the entire image. You can choose a predefined option or select Custom Blend to specify the distance and intensity.

■ Filename and Description define the name and description of the material. New material descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

■ Size values control the width and height of the material. You can enter specific values for each direction, or select the Stretch checkbox direction to automatically stretch the material in that direction to cover the surface where it is applied.

■ Transparent Black checkbox designates all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent.

■ Library Location specifies where you want to import the material. You can choose an existing User Library category or sub-category, or click the New button to create a new User Library category or sub-category.

92 Architect 3
D User’s Guide

Applying Building Materials

4 Set the material options you want and then choose the Library Location where you want to save your new material, then click OK.

To import a 3D background

1 Click File menu > Import > 3D Background. The Open dialog box is displayed.


■ Library Location specifies where you want to import the background image. You can choose an existing User Library category or sub-category, or click the New button to create a new User Library category or sub-category.

■ Background Filename and Background Description define the name and description of the material. New material descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

■ Rendering Options allow you to choose Keep Aspect Ratio to maintain the image size regardless of the 3D window size, or choose Stretch To Fit 3D View to resize the image depending on the size of the 3D view window.

■ Auto adjust to viewing tilt angle checkbox adjusts the background as the 3D view is tilted. 3 Click OK. The background is visible in the 3D view and is displayed in the Preview Bar, in the library

that was selected. To apply a background, drag-and-drag the material onto the background in the 3D view.



Using the SmartWandYou can easily apply the same material, paint, or trim to multiple surfaces using SmartWand. SmartWand can be applied to walls, ceilings, doors, stairs, cabinets, and other surfaces in the 3D view. We will use “Paint” in this example, but SmartWand is used in the same way regardless of what you are applying.

To apply using SmartWand, drag-and-drop the item you want from the Preview Bar onto a surface in the 3D view window The SmartWand menu lists all of the available options for the surface you’re applying to. Typically, this includes the option to apply to the individual surface only, or other similar surfaces in the room (or structure). Choose the surface or surfaces where you want it applied. The material is applied based on your selection.

For information on applying trim, paint, and materials, see:

■ “Applying Trims”, on page 86.

■ “Applying Paint and Color”, on page 87.

■ “Applying Building Materials”, on page 91.


Working with QuickPalettes

To enable or disable SmartWand

■ Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > Enable SmartWand. SmartWand is enabled when a checkmark is visible and disabled when no checkmark is visible.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Options and under 3D Preferences choose General. You can select the Enable SmartWand checkbox to enable, or deselect to disable. Click OK to close the window.

Working with QuickPalettesAs you draw, default colors and materials are applied to the surfaces in your drawing. With Architect 3D you can control the default colors and materials that are applied using QuickPalettes.

QuickPalettes are a collection of colors and materials that are designated for the surfaces in your drawing. When a QuickPalette is active, all of the surfaces are created using the colors and materials of that QuickPalette. You can also apply one of the QuickPalette designs to update the surfaces in your drawing all at once, allowing you to experiment with different looks and update entire rooms with just a few mouse clicks. After a QuickPalette is applied to an entire room, you can update individual surfaces using the finishes in a QuickPalette by applying them to only a particular surface in the room.

QuickPalettes are controlled in the QuickPalette dialog box, where you can specify the default QuickPalette to be used for subsequent rooms, edit the materials and colors of each QuickPalette, and create new QuickPalettes. For more information, see “Editing QuickPalettes”, which begins on page 96.

Default Palette Applied Lively Teal QuickPalette Applied

To apply a QuickPalette to a room

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose QuickPalettes from the Libraries drop-down menu. The QuickPalettes are displayed in the Preview Bar.

2 Drag-and-drop a QuickPalette onto a surface where you want it applied. If SmartWand is disabled, the QuickPalette is applied.

If SmartWand is enabled, the SmartWand menu is displayed, with the option to apply the QuickPalette to only that surface, or to all of the surfaces in entire room.

3 Click to apply QuickPalette to the surface(s) you want. The design is updated based on the QuickPalette.



Note: If a QuickPalette is applied to an exterior element, each surface is updated individually.

To change the default QuickPalette for drawing

1 Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > QuickPalette to open the QuickPalette dialog box.

2 From the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu, click the palette you want to use for subsequent surfaces in your drawing.

3 Close the QuickPalette dialog box. As you draw, the surfaces are finished based on the active QuickPalette you’ve specified.

Editing QuickPalettesYou can edit QuickPalettes to customize the materials and colors that are used for each surface. You can also create new QuickPalettes, rename existing QuickPalettes, and delete QuickPalettes (you cannot delete the Default QuickPalette). These edits are made in the QuickPalette dialog box.

In the example below, the Automatic Room Flooring material is selected in the QuickPalette dialog box, and the material’s original library is displayed in the Preview Bar.

The red surfaces in the 3D previews show exactly where each material or color is applied. You can edit the material or color associated with each surface by applying a different material or color from the Preview Bar onto the preview in the QuickPalette dialog box.

Note: For more information on finding paint and colors, see “Applying Paint and Color”, on page 87. For more information on finding paint and colors, see “Applying Building Materials”, on page 91.

To see the surface materials and colors for each palette, choose a different palette from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The Current QuickPalette is used to apply colors and materials to subsequent items in your drawing.


Editing QuickPalettes

You can rename a QuickPalette or edit its description by typing new text in the Name and Description text boxes. For even more flexibility, you can create new QuickPalettes by copying an existing QuickPalette and editing the surface materials and colors.

You can even filter your view based on the surface you want to edit using the Display Filter drop-down menu at the bottom of the window.

To access the QuickPalette dialog box

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose QuickPalettes from the Libraries drop-down menu.

2 Click the QuickPalette Library drop-down menu and click Edit QuickPalettes. The QuickPalette dialog box is displayed. To close the dialog box click the X in the top right corner.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > QuickPalette.

To customize a QuickPalette

1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box and then click the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu and choose the QuickPalette you want to edit. The palette is displayed.

2 Click the material or color preview that is associated with the surface you want to change. That color or material is displayed in the Preview Bar.

3 Find the color or material you want to use and drag-and-drop it onto the QuickPalette surface material or color you want to customize. The surface is updated.

4 Close the QuickPalette dialog box.

To create a new QuickPalette

1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box, as previously explained and open the QuickPalette you want to use as a starting point for your new QuickPalette from Current QuickPalette drop-down menu

2 Click the Create Copy button. The Copy QuickPalette dialog box is displayed.

3 Type a name and a description for the custom palette to add details about this palette and then click OK. The new palette becomes active in the QuickPalette dialog box. You can now customize QuickPalette and apply it to your design.

Note: You can change the name and description later while a palette is active in the QuickPalette dialog box.

To rename a QuickPalette

Note: You cannot rename the Default QuickPalette.

1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box and then choose the QuickPalette you want to edit from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed.

2 Type a new name in the Name text box and then close the dialog box.

(optional) Type a description in the Description field to add details about this palette.

To delete a QuickPalette

Note: You cannot delete the Default QuickPalette.

1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box and then choose the QuickPalette you want to edit from the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed.

2 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the dialog box and then click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the palette and then close the dialog box.



Adding a Visual ArrayThe Visual Array Tool makes it easy to add a line of plants or 3D objects. From lining a path with plants, to edging a flowerbed with lights, you can enhance your plan with just a few clicks. In this example we will use plants, but the steps are the same for any other element.

When the Visual Array Tool is active, the Spacing properties become available on the Properties tab. You should specify the distance you want between each item in the array and whether that distance is measure as the gap between the items or measure from the center of each item.

■ Gap Between spacing distance is measured from the ends of each plant or object

■ Center to Center spacing the distance is measured from the centers of each plant or object

You should be familiar with the plant and 3D object libraries and adding plants and 3D objects to your design. For more information, see:

■ “Plants Libraries”, on page 78.

■ “3D Objects Libraries”, on page 74.

To add a line of plants

1 Open the desired Plant or 3D object library and click to select the plant or object you want to add to your design.

2 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Visual Array Tool. The Properties tab is displayed with tool options.

3 Type the distance you want between each plant and choose how you want the spacing measure. Press ENTER to accept each new value.


Building Rooms Using Templates

4 In the design window, click once to set the first point of the array, then drag your cursor in the direction you want. As you drag, the footprint of each object is displayed.

5 When you reach the length you want, click again to end drawing mode. The objects are placed in a line, at the spacing you defined.

Building Rooms Using TemplatesArchitect 3D includes dozens of room templates, which will make designing your home easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the template that suits your needs best.

To place a template

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Templates from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Templates categories drop-down menu becomes available.



3 Scroll through the available templates and drag-and-drop the template you want to onto the design window.

(optional) Click the Selection Tool and then click and drag the template you just placed into position.



Creating New TemplatesWith Architect 3D you can easily create room templates to suit your specific needs. When you create a template it is saved to the User Library. If you do not have a User Library folder created for Templates, you can create a new folder when saving the template. For more information on working with the libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

Note: The 3D Preview option is only available when a 3D view window is open at the time of creating the new template. The 3D view should be so the objects in the template are visible.

To create a template

1 Once your room is designed exactly to your liking, select all walls, doors, and other features that you want to include in your template.

2 Click the Libraries tab and choose Templates from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Templates categories drop-down menu becomes available.

3 Click the Categories drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the menu, click the Options button and choose Create Template. The Save Template to Category dialog box is displayed.

4 Click to choose the Template Category or sub-category. You can choose an existing User Library category or sub-category, or click the New button to create a new User Library category or sub-category.

5 Type a Template Name in the corresponding text box.

(optional) Type a Template Description in the corresponding text box.

(optional) Choose the Preview Style you want to save.

6 Click Save To Library. The template is added to that User Library category and displayed in the Preview Bar.

1

Part 3

From the Ground Up

Chapter 7: QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 8: Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 9: Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 10: Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Chapter 11: Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Chapter 12: Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 13: HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Chapter 14: Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 15: Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 16: Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Chapter 17: Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 7

QuickStart For many people, visualizing their dream home does not start with the outside shape of the building, but with a wish list of individual rooms. Now you can create complex floor plans from the inside out, by laying out your home design room by room. Create entire rooms with one click of the mouse! Build an entire floor plan in just seconds with Punch! QuickStart.

Launching QuickStartBy default, QuickStart launches automatically upon starting the application. You change the interface preferences so that the application opens directly to the design window instead of QuickStart, if you prefer.

To control QuickStart display

1 Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface.

2 Under Startup, select the Start in QuickStart checkbox to start in QuickStart.

To bypass QuickStart and open in the design window, deselect the Start in QuickStart checkbox.


Chapter QuickStart7

3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.

Show Welcome Screen at StartupYou can toggle the initial QuickStart Help Window on and off, to suit your needs. The Welcome screen offers options for starting a new project or opening an existing projects. You can also quickly access recent projects you’ve worked on with one simple click. Additionally, the Welcome screen provides access to training material, sample plans, and special offers for Punch! users.

For more information on project settings, see “Project Settings”, which begins on page 105.

To hide the Welcome screen at Startup

■ To hide the Welcome window when you launch Architect 3D, click to select the Don’t show again checkbox box on the Welcome window.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and deselect Show Welcome Screen under the Startup section, and then click OK.

(alternatively) On the Help menu click to uncheck Show Welcome Screen.

To show Welcome screen at Startup

■ Click Help menu > Show Welcome Screen. When enabled, a checkmark is visible.

1

Project Settings

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and select Show Welcome Screen under the Startup section, and then click OK.

Project SettingsWhen beginning a project, you can start designing immediately using the default project settings, or specify particular settings to be used throughout your design, such as the number of floors or ceiling heights.

If the Welcome screen is configured to display upon startup (which is the default setting), then you have access to the New Project Setup dialog box from there (choose New Project (Custom)). If the Welcome screen is not displayed at startup, you can access the New Project Setup dialog box by clicking File menu > New (or press CTRL+N).

The New Project Setup dialog box includes configured properties as well as a diagram to provide a visual representation of these properties.

You have the option to specify the bottom floor as a basement. When this option is selected, the Basement Default Properties become available, and the diagram is updated to include a basement level.


Chapter QuickStart7

To setup a project without a basement

1 From the drop-down menu, click to select the total number of floors you want in your project.

2 In the Default Properties section, type the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness in the corresponding text boxes.

The exterior wall height is the sum of the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness, so it is not editable.

3 In the Ground Floor Default Properties section, type the slab/joist thickness.

4 Click OK.

To setup a project with a basement

1 From the drop-down menu, click to select the total number of floors you want in your project.

2 Select the Basement checkbox. The Basement Default Properties become available.

3 In the Default Properties section, type the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness in the corresponding text boxes.

The exterior wall height is the sum of the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness, so it is not editable.

4 In the Basement Default Properties section, type the ceiling height and slab/joist thickness in the corresponding text boxes.

The exterior wall height is the sum of the ceiling height and joist thickness, so it is not editable.

5 In the Height Above Grade text field, type a value to specify how much of the basement you want to appear above grade.

Note: The Height Above Grade value does not affect the overall wall height, it only specifies how much of the exterior wall height is above grade.

(optional) By default, your project will open to the basement floor. If you want to open to the first floor above the basement, deselect the Switch to basement when finished checkbox.

6 Click OK.


Adding Rooms

Adding RoomsYou can create rooms with a few simple clicks of the mouse. Punch! allows you to use pre-designed room dimensions, customize these dimensions, or create your room from scratch.

The QuickStart Rooms toolbar features a variety of color-coded room types that can be customized to your wishes. Simply select your room type, place your room on the workspace, and change your room’s dimensions as needed. When you’re finished placing rooms, simply click the Continue button to update your design!

To control which floor you are working on, see “Work on Floor“’, on page 266.

To add pre-configured rooms

1 In the Rooms Bar, click the room type that you want to create and then click on the workspace to place the room.

Continue to place rooms until you’ve created the desired design.

2 Click the Continue button to edit your design on the design window.

To control the visibility of overlapping rooms

■ Right-click the room you want to place in back.

■ Double-click the room you want to place in front.

To resize rooms

1 Click to select the room you want to resize.

2 Drag a corner point to resize the room.

Viewing a QuickStart Design in 3DAs you design in QuickStart, you can see a 3D view of your design before you begin continue with your drawing in the design window.

Note: For more information, see “Moving Around in 3D”, which begins on page 271.


Chapter QuickStart7

To see a 3D view in QuickStart

1 Click the 3D Preview button in the top-right corner of the design window. A 3D View is displayed.

2 Use the navigations tools, available in the 3D View toolbar, to navigate around the drawing.

Setting QuickStart Render OptionsWith the QuickStart rendering options, you can control the auto-roofing behavior to determine whether or not a roof is generated with your design. Additionally, you can show or hide both the roof and room ceilings while viewing a 3D preview.

For information on editing an auto-roof, see “Auto-Roof Properties“’, on page 182.

■ Generate automatic roofing when finished in QuickStart controls whether or not a roof is automatically generated for your design. When selected, a hip roof is automatically generated when you click the Continue button to open the design in the design window. When deselected, your design is created without a roof.

■ Room Ceilings is selected controls the display of ceilings over rooms in your design. When selected, the room ceilings are displayed in the 3D view. When deselected, ceilings are not displayed in the 3D view.

■ Show Auto Roofing becomes available when Generate automatic roof... is selected. When selected, the auto-roof is displayed in the 3D view. When deselected, the auto roof is not displayed.


Accessing the Sample Plans

To configure render options

1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Configure the settings you want and then click OK.

Accessing the Sample PlansSample plans are a set of pre-designed home plans, not created by an architect. They can be used as-is or can be edited to your liking. Each of the available sample plans include 2D and 3D previews, as well as room dimensions.

By default, all home styles are displayed. You can narrow the options by choosing the home style you want from the Style drop-down menu.


Chapter QuickStart7

To open a sample plan

1 Click File > Open Sample Plan.

(alternatively) Click Sample Plans on the Welcome window.

2 Click through the style options and choose the one you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as the plan’s dimensions.

(optional) Click the 3D Preview radio button to see the home in 3D.

3 When you find the plan you want, click Open Sample Plan. The plan is displayed in the design window.


Chapter 8

Foundation Plan TabJust like building in the real world, a good place to start is with solid foundation. The Foundation Plan Tab includes tools to help you add the foundation details to your plan. You will learn to add stiffener beams, draw piers, and define post tension. Most of the components added from the Foundation Plan tab are only visible in the 2D view.

Adding Stiffener BeamsStiffener beams are used to support the foundation; typically they run from one end of the foundation to the other. You can control the length, width, and dimension of each beam.


■ Stiffener Beam Properties■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Nudging a Selection & Moving a Selection & Rotating a Selection

To add a stiffener beam

1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Stiffener Beam Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the component.

Stiffener Beam PropertiesStiffener Beams are defined by their width and depth. Each of these properties can be increased up to 4'-2". Since beams are only represented in the 2D view, you won’t see changes to the depth reflected in the design window. You can edit these values on the Properties tab while the tool is selected before you draw or by selecting a stiffener beam in your drawing.

Note: When editing values in a text box, be sure to press ENTER to accept changes.



Chapter Foundation Plan Tab8

■ Width defines the distance across the beam. Width runs perpendicular to length.

■ Depth defines the distance from the top to the bottom of the stiffener beam. When viewing the stiffener beam in 2D, you are looking at a top view. If you are looking at the stiffener beam from the side, the depth run from top to bottom.

■ Auto-Dimension Turn on or off the auto-dimensions display by selecting or deselecting the checkbox.

Below is a representation showing the depth, which is not visible in the 2D view.

Adding Foundation PiersFoundation Piers support the foundation. They are concrete pads that add strength under a support column. Even after you place piers, you can customize them. Foundation piers are visible in the 3D view when using the Framing render mode.


■ Foundation Piers Properties■ Elevating Objects■ Nudging a Selection & Moving a Selection & Rotating a Selection

To add a foundation pier

1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Foundation Pier Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design.

Width

Length

Depth

Length

Width


Foundation Piers Properties

Foundation Piers PropertiesFoundation Piers are defined by their diameter and depth. You can edit these values on the Properties tab while the tool is selected before you draw or by selecting a stiffener beam in your drawing.

Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text field.

Adding Post-Tension StrandsPost-tension strands are used to prevent cracking in a concrete slab foundation. They extend from one edge of the foundation to the other and are bolted into the frame and set in concrete.

Arrow indicates the direction in which the strands are stressed.


■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Nudging a Selection & Moving a Selection & Rotating a Selection


1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Post-Tension Strand Tool.


Drawing the Foundation SlopeFoundation Slope is typically specified in garages or basement areas where there is a drain. It specifies which direction the floor area slopes.


■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Nudging a Selection & Moving a Selection & Rotating a Selection


1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Foundation Slope Tool.



Chapter Foundation Plan Tab8


Chapter 9

Floor Plan TabBy beginning with QuickStart, walls of each room are automatically generated. Customize your floor plan by adding doors, windows, stairs, and other components to begin your plan design. Architect 3D makes creating the final home plan of your dreams, exactly as you want it, simple.

You can define your wall thickness, before placing, and create custom-sized walls in a snap. Further customize your design by adding windows, doors, stairs, cabinets, and so on.

Drawing WallsQuickStart makes it easy to begin your design process, but you can add or delete walls at any time. You can either draw “freeform” or to specific dimensions, based on your needs and your design. Wall segments are automatically joined when you draw, and are placed at right angles, while curved walls and bay walls include angular segments.

You can draw the followings types of walls:

■ Straight Wall

■ Curved Wall

■ Bay Wall


■ Wall Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Changing Segment Length■ Customizing Wall Framing Properties■ Breaking a Wall

Straight WallThere are two ways to draw straight wall segments: freeform or custom length.

The Wall Tool creates a straight, freeform wall segment. The angle and length are determined by the start and end points of the wall you draw.

The Wall (Custom Length) Tool creates a straight wall segment based on a custom defined length that you specify. The angle is determined by the start and end points of the wall you draw, and the length is based on the values you specify in the Custom Wall Length dialog box.



Chapter Floor Plan Tab9

To draw freeform straight walls

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Wall Tool from the Walls toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the wall segments to the desired length and angle.

To draw custom length walls

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Wall (Custom Length) Tool from the Walls toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the wall segment to the desired angle. The Custom Wall Length dialog box is displayed when you release the mouse button.

3 Type the Length you want in the text box and click OK.

Curved WallThe Curved Wall Tool creates a curved wall based on a diameter and angle you define. The default length for each segment in the curve is 3'-6", but you can change this on the Properties tab, in the Curved Seg. Length text box, before you draw.

In the example to the right, a curved wall has been added in the kitchen. The curved segment length used to create this curved wall was 1'-0".


Drawing Walls

To draw a curved wall

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Curved Wall Tool from the Curved wall toolset.

2 On the design window, press the mouse button and drag to define the wall length. A rubber band line appears and follows the pointer. This line signifies the diameter of your curved wall.

3 Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct length and then drag the mouse clockwise, or counter-clockwise, until the wall is the shape or angle you want.

Note: Press SHIFT to reverse the arc direction and flip the curved side.

4 Click to place the wall.



Bay WallThe Bay Wall Tool creates an angular or perpendicular bay section along an existing wall. You can choose between an angular or perpendicular style before you draw using the Bay Style button on the Properties tab. Once placed, the bay style cannot be changed.

Note: As wall attachments, the width of the bay wall must be equal to or less than the length of the wall segment you’re attaching to.

To draw a bay wall

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Bay Wall Tool from the Curved wall toolset.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Bay Style button and choose the style you want.

3 Use the Drag Along Wall draw method to place an angular or perpendicular bay section along an existing wall.


Wall Properties

Wall PropertiesOnce you have drawn walls for your design, you have the option to customize many features. From wall thickness, floor height, and stud spacing to automatic flooring options, you have alternatives for almost every feature.

Note: Always press the ENTER to accept new values in a text box.

■ Wall Style button allows you to choose from a variety of wall styles, including irregular shapes, gable style, and many more. Wall styles are available to accommodate different types of roofs.

■ Wall Height corresponds to the blue height line in the wall style icon. Editing this value adjusts the corresponding wall segment.

■ Additional Segment Heights and Pitches are available depending on the wall style. For walls that use multiple height and pitch settings, edit the values that correspond to the segment in the wall style icon.

■ Thickness defines the width of the lumber used for framing the wall. The higher the thickness, the wider the stud boards.

■ Stud Spacing defines the distance between each stud board in the wall framing.

■ Curved Segment Length (applies to curved walls only) defines the length of each segment in the curved wall. Edits to this value must occur before the wall is drawn.



■ Auto-Dimensions checkbox controls the display of dimensions on individual wall segments. Select the checkbox to enable; deselect to disable. When enabled, you can choose to measure walls from their surfaces or centers.

Note: If automatic dimensioning is off for the entire application, this setting does not enable dimensions. For more information, see “Dimensioning”, which begins on page 59.

■ Callouts checkbox controls the display of dimensions for windows and doors on the selected wall segment. Select the checkbox to enable; deselect to disable.

■ Flip Dims button controls which side of the wall the dimensions are displayed.

Changing Segment LengthStraight line segments such as walls, fences, floors, and more can resized easily to adjust one of the ends of the segment or both ends. Not only can you change the length of a segment, but you can also move an adjoining segment with the segment.

The Change Segment Length dialog box include a red point and a green point that correspond to end points on the selected segment. The point you choose is the side that is resized. You can also choose to resize from center.

Note: You may need to manually adjust end points to fine tune their position.

■ Resize segment from Center- segment is resized to the specified length by adjusting the segment from its center.

■ Resize segment from Point (red)- segment is resized to the specified length by adjusting the red point.


Automatic Flooring

■ Resize segment from Point (green)- segment is resized to the specified length by adjusting the green point.

When the Linked checkbox is selected, the adjoining walls remain perpendicular and are “linked” to the resized segment. In the example below, the top segment is resized to 8'-0" and the Linked checkbox is selected, so the adjoined segments move with it.

To change the wall segment length

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool.

2 Click to select a line segment. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the end point from which you want to resize the segment, or choose Center to resize the segment from its center.

(optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall to be resized, but do not want the adjoining wall to remain perpendicular to it.

4 Type the new length in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen and then click Change. The wall segment is resized.

For example, when Ft-In units are enabled, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

Automatic FlooringBy default, enclosed walls are drawn with a 1/2" auto-floor. You can turn the auto-floor on or off on the Properties tab, as well adjust its depth.

After removing the auto-floor, you can manually draw a floor. For more information, see “Adding and Removing Flooring”, which begins on page 136.



Auto-Floor On Auto-Floor Off

To control the auto-floor in a room

1 Click inside an enclosed room to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. (Press the SHIFT key as you click to select more than one room.)

2 On the Properties tab, click to select the Show Floor checkbox to turn on the auto-floor.

Deselect the Show Floor checkbox to turn off the auto-floor.

To change an auto-floor depth

1 Click inside an enclosed room to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. (Press the SHIFT key as you click to select more than one room.)

2 On the Properties tab, click to select the Show Floor checkbox to turn on the auto-floor and then type the depth you want in the corresponding text box, then press the ENTER key. The auto-floor is updated.

Automatic CeilingBy default, enclosed walls are drawn with an auto-ceiling. You can turn the auto-ceiling on or off on the Properties tab.

After removing the auto-ceiling, you can use the Floor Tool to create a manually drawn ceiling. For more information, see “Automatic Flooring”, which begins on page 121.

Auto-Ceiling On Auto-Ceiling Off


Placing a Room Addition

To remove the ceiling over a room

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click inside an enclosed room. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. (Press the SHIFT key as you click to select more than one room.)

2 Click to deselect the Show Ceiling checkbox. The ceiling is removed from the selected room.

To replace the ceiling over a room, reselect the Show Ceiling checkbox.

Placing a Room AdditionUsing the Room Addition Tool, you can add space to your design with just two mouse clicks. Quickly add space then edit the room along with the rest of your design, or customize the room addition settings first, and then place a complete room that is ready for finishing touches. Room additions are wall attachments, so they must be placed along an existing wall.

Room Addition SettingsBefore placing a room addition, you can customize the settings or edit the addition components like you would other components in your drawing.

Walls tab

■ Room Shape Choose between rectangular or chamfered corner walls.

■ Room Sizing The text boxes correspond to the letters in the diagram. When the Use Adjacent Wall Height checkbox is selected, the room addition walls inherit the height of the wall where it is attached. To specify a different room addition wall height, deselect the checkbox.

Windows and Doors tab

■ Window Style Choose which style windows are placed on the walls (none, full-size, 3/4, or fill the walls with windows).

■ Door Style Choose which style exterior door is included, if any.

■ Exterior Door Choose the location of the exterior door. The radio buttons correspond to the letters in the diagram. You can also choose to include an interior opening by selecting the Add Interior Opening checkbox. This creates a cased opening leading to the addition.



Roofing tab

■ Roof Style Choose the roof style for the addition (none, flat, hip).

■ Roof Options The following options are available:

■ The Clip Roof at Wall checkbox allows you to stop the roof where the room addition attaches to the wall. This is useful when the anchoring wall is part of a multi-floor design where the roof is not at the same level as the addition’s roof. When this option is deselected, the addition’s roof extends into the roof like a hip connector.

■ Select the Use auto roofing settings if available checkbox to use the automatic roof settings that have been set. For information on auto-roofs, see “Auto-Roof Properties”, on page 182.

■ Type the Soffit Depth, Gable Soffit, and Pitch you want in the corresponding text boxes. Below are some references that may be helpful as you design:

■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Door Properties■ Window Properties■ Roof Properties

To place a room addition

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Room Addition Tool.

(optional) On the Properties tab, click the Options button and edit the walls, windows, door, or roof settings, and then click OK to close the dialog box.

2 Using the Drag Along Wall drawing method, drag along a wall and release on the side of the wall where you want the addition placed.

Breaking a WallWith Architect 3D, it’s easy it easy to fine tune your rooms, adding an inset, for example.

Breaking walls is useful for removing a wall section or creating separate surfaces for applying different colors and materials. When a wall includes a break, you can select the segments separately to delete, reshape, or resize the wall segments. When a color, material, or trim is applied to a segment, it is applied to only one segment.

In the example to the right, a wall break was used to break a single wall segment and then resize one of the new segments to create a half way between two room.


■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Wall Properties■ Applying Trims


Adding Doors and Openings

■ Applying Paint and Color

To insert a wall break

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Wall Break Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to place the break and create two wall segments.

Adding Doors and OpeningsAll doors and cased openings are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors, and windows. There are three types of openings and nine door styles available, as well as two additional style libraries, and they are all placed in the same way.

You can add cased openings with or without curvature, interior and exterior doors, as well as glass doors and sliding doors. Additionally, there’s a stylized panel doors library and a custom door library, which includes double doors and more custom options.

Door styles are described in “Door Properties”, on page 127. All of the door styles behave the same way expect double doors.

Double Doors are composed of a left and right side, which should be added to your design so that the left and right sides adjoin seamlessly. Below you can see the left and right door in 2D and 3D.

Left Door

Right Door



The Double Doors library displays the left and right doors in the Preview Bar.


■ Door Properties■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color■ Applying Trims■ Component Description

To add a door

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Door Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the door and release to place.

3 Drag to a side of the wall to define the door swing direction and then click to place the door.

To add a double door

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Door Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Door Style button and choose the Custom Doors style.

3 From the Library drop-down menu, choose Double Doors. The left and right side doors are displayed in the Preview Bar.

4 Choose a left or right side door and then use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the door and release to place.

5 Drag to either side of the wall to define the door swing direction and then click to place the door.

6 Click the Door Tool again to reset the style.

7 Choose the other side of the door from the Preview Bar and then use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the door and release to place.

8 Drag to either side of the wall to define the door swing direction and then click to place the door.


Door Properties

Door PropertiesDoors are defined by their width, height, elevation, and trim size. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Door Style drop-down menu provides access to a variety of door styles.

Note: When choosing a door style for subsequent doors, be sure none of the doors in your design are selected. Otherwise the new style and properties are applied to the selection.

■ Width defines the distance from one side of the door opening to the other. You can change the width by typing a value or by dragging an end point on the door to the width you want.

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of the door opening to the top.

■ Elevate defines the distance between the auto floor elevation and the bottom of the door.

■ Trim Size defines the width of the trim around the door. This is not included in the overall height.



■ Hardware styles

■ Click the + button to choose between Door Knobs or Handles and Bars hardware styles

■ Click the Door Hardware button to access the hardware library. When a style is selected, it is automatically added to the door.

■ Vert. Offset defines the vertical position of the hardware relative to the bottom of the door.

■ Horiz. Offset defines the horizontal position of the hardware relative to the hinges.

■ Swing defines the angle the door is opened. This is set after the door is placed (0 closes the door, negative angles are acceptable).

■ Flip Door button flips the door hinge and door swing to the opposite side.

Adding WindowsLike doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in Architect 3D. They are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors, and other windows. There are a number of window styles available in Architect 3D as well as a custom library, and they are all placed in the same manner.

You can combine windows side-by-side or stacked to create almost any configuration or place custom style windows. Window styles are described in “Window Properties”, on page 129. Choose the window style before or after you place the window.


■ Window Properties■ Elevating Objects■ Applying Paint and Color■ Applying Trims

Height

Trim

Width

Horiz. Offset

Vert. Offset

Swing

128
Ar chitect 3D User’s Guide

Window Properties

To add a window

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Window Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on wall where you want it and release to place.

Window PropertiesOnce windows have been placed, it is easy to resize them. You can do this by specifying exact dimensions, or by dragging one end, until you have the required size. You can also control the height, elevation and trim size. Some of the window styles offer pitch and the ability to flip them vertically or horizontally to create beautiful groupings to suit any room design


■ Window Style drop-down menu provides access to a variety of window styles.

Note: When choosing a window style for subsequent windows, be sure none of the windows in your design are selected. Otherwise the new style and properties are applied to the selection.

■ Width defines the width of the window opening. You can change the width by typing a value or by dragging an end point on the window to the width you want.



■ Height defines the height of the window opening.

■ Elevate defines the distance from the floor that the window is positioned.

■ Trim Size defines the width of the trim around the window. This is not included in the overall height.

■ Pitch defines the slope of window styles that include angles. The higher the pitch the more severe the slope.

■ Grill Style defines the number of horizontal and vertical grills exist for double hung and casement windows.

■ Flip buttons allows you to change the orientation of non-symmetrical windows.

Placing a StaircaseAs you create more than one floor in your design, you’ll want to draw a staircase. Straight staircases and curved staircases are drawn using the ceiling height, unless you specify a different height on the Properties tab before drawing the staircase. The center line defines the direction and path of the staircase, while the staircase height value defines the distance to the top of the staircase.

To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see “Adding and Removing Flooring”, which begins on page 136. After you’ve drawn your staircase, you can apply different colors and materials to the steps, railing spindles, posts, and handrails.

You can draw the followings types of staircases:

■ Straight Stairway

■ Curved Stairway


■ Staircase Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Customizing Staircase Framing Properties■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

Pitch

Height*

Width

Elevate

Trim

Grill Style

* Two windows are used in this example. The height of the bottom window only is called out; the top window has a separate height.

1

Placing a Staircase

Straight StairwayYou can draw a staircase along a straight line or add multiple points to create an L-shaped or U-shaped staircase with landings. You can add as many points as you’d like to customize the shape of the staircase, however the overall height is controlled by the height property value. The number of steps in the staircase depends on the overall height of the staircase as well as the step height and depth.

Note: After a staircase if drawn you can reverse the direction by right-clicking the center line and choosing Reverse Staircase Direction.

To draw a straight stairway

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Straight Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click again to set the next point.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the stairway and then right click to place.

Curved StairwayCurved staircases are a single segment that curve in the direction you draw. The number of steps depends on the overall height of the staircase as well as the step height and depth.


To draw a curved stairway

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Curved Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.

2 Click to set the start point and drag to set the curve in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click and again to set the end point and place the staircase.

Note: Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the staircase to a perfect arc.



Staircase PropertiesOnce you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Architect 3D you have control over stairway height, width, riser, and tread dimensions, handrail height and placement, and whether the stairs are open or enclosed.


■ Staircase Height defines the distance from the base of the staircase to the top step.

■ Staircase Width defines the distance from one side of the staircase to the other side.

■ Skirt Walls checkbox controls the display of the walls alongside the staircase. When selected, the walls are enabled; when deselected they are disabled.

Skirt Walls On Skirt Walls Off■ Step Height defines the height of the step risers.

■ Step Depth defines the depth of the stair treads.

■ Open checkbox controls if step risers are included. When selected, risers are excluded; when deselected they are included.


Staircase Properties

Open Step Closed Step

■ Handrails Height defines the distance from the bottom of the handrail to the top.

■ Left and Right checkboxes control the display of the left and right handrails. When selected, the handrail is enabled; when deselected it is disabled.

■ Closed Stringers checkbox controls whether the stringer is closed along the side of the staircase or open. When selected, the full stringer is closed along the side of the staircase; when deselected the stringer is cut open with each step.

Open Stringer Closed Stringer■ Large Base checkbox controls the size of the base of the stringer. When selected, a large base is enabled; when

deselected it is disabled.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the stair dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.



Adding RailingsUsing the Straight Railing or Curved Railing tool, you can add railings to create a barrier around floor openings or other edges where unequal elevations exist. You can add railings around floor cutouts, at the top of a staircase, around raised floor sections, or any other place in your design.

The shape and configuration of railings can be customized, and you can apply different materials to the rail, post, and balusters. You can specify the railing height and baluster spacing before or after drawing on the Properties tab. As you draw a railing, each point you click as you draw creates a post.


■ Railing Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

To draw a railing

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Railing Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Draw Method drop-down menu and choose the shape you want.

3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a railing.

Staircase Height

Staircase Width

Step Height

Step Depth

Handrail Height

Closed Stringers


Railing Properties

This example shows a railing drawn using the Open Polygon shape

Railing PropertiesRailings are defined by their height, baluster, and post settings. After a railing has been added to your design, you can edit its properties by selecting the railing and clicking the Properties tab. Below are the available railing properties.

Note: Always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text box.

■ Handrail Height defines the distance from the bottom of the handrail to the top

■ Baluster Spacing defines the distance between each baluster, or spindle.

■ Include Post checkbox controls if posts are included at each point you clicked when drawing the rail. When selected, posts are included; when deselected they are excluded. You can add or remove individual posts using the Add Point and Remove Point Tools. For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.

■ Post Height defines the height of the posts. You can select individual posts and edit their height, or double-click the rail to select all posts and then edit the height so they match.

■ Curve options control curvature. For more information, see “Changing Curve Tension”, which begins on page 238.


Handrail Height

Baluster SpacingPost Height



Adding and Removing FlooringYou can manually draw a floor section that exists independent of an existing floor or surface. This enables you to customize the shape, thickness, and surface material to create a unique floor section.

You can also remove flooring by defining a cutout area. This works for floors drawing using the Floor Tool as well as auto-floors created within enclosures.

The following options are available:

■ Floor Tool

■ Floor Cutout Tool


■ Floor Properties■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Component Description■ Applying Building Materials

Floor ToolYou can use floor sections in place of an auto-floor, for raised areas in a room, to create ceilings for patios or porches, or for other situations that call for an adjustable surface.

To draw flooring

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Tool from the Floor toolset.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a floor section.

This example shows a floor drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape


Floor Properties

Floor Cutout ToolYou can easily design lofts, creative staircase openings, create an opening where one does not currently exist.

To draw a floor cutout

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Cutout Tool on the Floor toolset.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a floor cutout section.

This example shows a floor cutout drawn using the Square From Center shape

Floor PropertiesOnce a floor or cutout section has been added to your drawing, you can access flooring properties on the Properties tab:


■ Flooring Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the floor section to the top.

Thickness 1" Thickness 4"■ Curve options control curvature. For more information, see “Changing Curve Tension”, which begins on page

238.




■ Calculate Area button automatically calculates the square footage of the floor section. The area is displayed on the Properties tab.

Adding AccessoriesYou can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds, and more to any window or door. Accessories are designed to “track the walls”, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls.

There are a number of libraries available with different styles of accessories. When the tool is active, you can choose the style you want and then place the accessory, or you can drag-and-drop a different style onto the accessory in the 3D view. For more information on the Wall Accessories library, see “Wall Accessories Library”, on page 77.

Once placed, you can automatically resize the accessory to match a window size.


■ Wall Accessory Properties■ Nudging a Selection■ Component Description■ Applying Building Materials■ Wall Accessories Library

To add accessories

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Accessories Tool.

2 Select the accessory you want to place and then use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to place the accessory.

Wall Accessory PropertiesWall Accessories width, height, elevation, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can also adjust their translucency to create a sheer effect. After an accessory has been added to your design, you can edit its properties in the Properties tab by selecting the accessory. Below are the available properties.



Adding Cabinets

■ Accessory Width defines the overall distance from one side of the accessory to the other side.

■ Top Elevation defines the elevation of the top of the accessory. Accessories are positioned vertically based on their elevation, so when you edit this value it affects the overall elevation of the accessory.

■ Bottom Elevation defines the elevation of the bottom of the accessory. Accessories are positioned vertically based on their elevation, so when you edit this value it affects the overall elevation of the accessory.

■ Accessory Height defines the overall distance from the top of the accessory to the bottom.

■ Wall Offset defines the distance between the wall and the accessory.

■ Translucency slider controls the opacity of the accessory. For a more sheer look, increase the transparency.

■ AutoSize resizes an accessory to match the dimensions of a particular window or door. To autosize an accessory, click to select it, click the AutoSize button, and then select the window. The accessory is automatically fit to the dimensions of that window.

Adding CabinetsCabinets can be added to your design with just a few mouse clicks. In addition to placing pre-designed cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a cabinet of your own from scratch. There are many cabinet styles available and each cabinet’s dimensions are customizable.

When the tool is active you can choose the cabinet style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the cabinet style after it has been placed in your drawing Cabinet styles are described in Cabinet Properties.


■ Cabinet Properties■ Applying Paint and Color■ Applying Building Materials

Width

Top Elevation

Height

Wall Offset Bottom Elevation



To add cabinets

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Cabinet Tool.

(optional) On the Properties tab, click the Cabinet Style button and choose the style of cabinet you want.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

To add an island

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Cabinet Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the island. T

Cabinet PropertiesYou can easily edit a cabinet after you’ve placed it in your drawing. From resizing base doors to adding additional drawers, each aspect of a cabinet is customizable. To access the different faces and components of a cabinet, click the cabinet Component button on the Properties tab, as described below.

Cabinet StylesThe available properties depend on the active cabinet style. You can choose the cabinet style before you place a cabinet or after by selecting the cabinet in your design.


Cabinet Properties

Cabinet ComponentsThe Component button lists the components on the active cabinet style that are available for editing. When you choose one of the components, its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. The cabinet components that are available for editing depending on the active cabinet style. For example, the Full Cabinet style includes Top Cabinet and Top Door components, while the Base Cabinet style does not. Each of the available Component properties are described below.


Top Cabinet

■ Height defines the height of the overall height of the top cabinet component.

Note: The width of the top cabinet is controlled by the base cabinet.

■ Depth defines the distance from the front of the cabinet to the wall.

■ Elevation defines the distance between the counter top and the base of the top cabinet.

■ Shelves Width defines how wide the shelves are. The overall width of the top cabinet is determined by the base cabinet, so when the shelves width is adjusted, it affects the width of the top cabinet space.

■ Count defines the number of shelves that exist.

■ Stack Right add Stack Left checkboxes control if the shelves are included and stacked on one or both sides of the top cabinet. When selected, shelves are included; when deselected they are excluded.

Top Door/Base Door/Drawers

Note: The size of components is limited to the available space on the cabinet surface. If you enter a value that is larger than the available space, the maximum size is used by default. After updating a size, you may have to adjust the component position.

■ Width defines the distance from one side of an individual door or drawer to the other side.

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of an individual door or drawer to the top.

■ Elevation defines the distance between the bottom of cabinet and the base of the component.

■ Side Offset defines the distance that the component is positioned from the side of the cabinet.

■ Count defines the number of doors or drawers.

■ Stack Doors/Stack Drawers checkbox controls whether base cabinet doors and drawers are position side-by-side or stacked one on top of the other. When selected, the components are stack on top of each other; when deselected they are positioned side-by-side (available for Base Door and Drawers only).

■ Mirror Hardware checkbox controls the position of the door hardware. When selected, all of the hardware is positioned at the same location on each door; when deselected the hardware is positioned in the top corner of the inside edge.

■ Inset checkbox controls the display of the door or drawer. When selected, the component is inset as an opening; when deselected the door or drawer is displayed. (available for Base Door and Drawers only).



■ Facing Style button provides style options for the door and drawer faces.

■ Hardware Library button provides access to the Cabinet Knobs and Pulls libraries.

■ Hardware Style button opens the hardware library styles. When a style is selected it is automatically applied to the hardware.

■ Hardware Positioning allows you to click an arrow to move the hardware in that direction.

Base Cabinet

■ Width defines the overall distance from one side of the cabinet to the other side.

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of the base cabinet to the top of the base cabinet.

■ Depth defines the distance from the front of the cabinet to the wall.

■ Toe Kick defines the height of the toe kick, measured up from the bottom of the cabinet.

■ Style Height defines the distance between the top and bottom edges of the doors and drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjusted, the size and position of the doors and drawers is affected.

■ Style Width defines the distance between the side edges of the doors and drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjusted, the size and position of the doors and drawers is affected.

■ Desk Opening checkbox controls whether or not the cabinet includes an opening in the center. When selected, an opening is added, and you can adjust the Width in the corresponding text box. When deselected, an opening is not included.

■ Flip Corner Position button flips the corner where the angled outward facing cabinet is positioned to the opposite corner (applies to corner style cabinets only).


Adding Columns

Counter Top

■ Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the counter top to the top.

■ Overhang Front defines the distance the front edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

■ Overhang Back defines the distance the back edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet (applies to island cabinets only).

■ Overhang Left defines the distance the left edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

■ Overhang Right defines the distance the right edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

Backsplash

■ Backsplash Height defines the distance backsplash extends up from the cabinet.

■ Backsplash Depth defines the distance from the front of the backsplash to the wall.

■ Left, Right, and Back Visible checkboxes control the visibility of the backsplash on that corresponding side. When selected, a backsplash is visible on that edge; when deselected it is not visible.

Adding ColumnsColumns can be added to your design for structural or decorative purposes.

Column are made up of three components, and you can customize the size and style of each. When placed in your drawing, the nearest ceiling height is detected and the column is drawn to that height.


■ Column Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Elevating Objects■ Component Description■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

To add a column

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Column Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the column in your design.



Column PropertiesColumns are defined by their width, height, and the properties of their three components: Cap, Shaft, and Base. You can easily edit a column after you’ve placed it in your drawing.


■ Total Width defines the overall width of the entire column, including the base, shaft, and cap components.

■ Total Height defines the overall height of the entire column, including the base, shaft, and cap components. You can enter the height manually or, if there is a surface to which you want the column to extend, such as a ceiling or elevated floor section, you can choose that surface from the list of detected surfaces.

■ Cap Properties includes the Width, Height, and Style for the column cap.

■ Shaft Properties includes the Width and Style for the column shaft.

■ Base Properties includes the Width, Height, and Style for the column base.


Editing Floor Properties

Editing Floor PropertiesAs you create your design, you may want to give a floor a unique name, change the ceiling height for an entire floor, or reorganize floors as you add more levels. You can edit a floor’s properties and maintain control over various floor levels at once or individually. The Edit Current Floor dialog box provides access to the floor properties, each corresponding to an area in the displayed diagram, so you can see what you are editing.

Note: When editing a floor you must be working on that floor. For information on moving between floors, see “Work on Floor”, on page 266.

Floor PropertiesThe Floor Properties control the overall wall height for the current floor, including the following settings that you can edit:



■ Name type a unique name for the floor. This is displayed in the Working Floor drop-down menu.

■ Ceiling Height type the height you want in the Ceiling Height text box. Notice, the ceiling height affects the Exterior Wall Height value, which is the overall height of the wall.

■ Slab/Joist Thickness type the slab or joist thickness you want in the corresponding text box. Notice, the value affects the Exterior Wall Height value, which is the overall height of the wall.

■ Apply to existing structures checkbox applies the new ceiling height to the existing structures on this floor; deselecting this option applies the new ceiling height to subsequent structures only.

Floor ElevationThe Floor Base Elevation settings control the elevation of the floors. You can also control how existing elements are affected by elevation adjustments in the Automatic Elevation Adjustments section.

■ Floor is above drop-down menu specifies the current floor’s vertical position in relation to other floors. To adjust a floor’s Base Elevation, the Floor is above setting must be None.

■ Base Elevation defines the elevation of the floor base. A negative value results in below grade.

■ Automatic Elevation Adjustments options specify whether or not you want the elevation adjustments to affect existing walls and interior elements, and exterior elements on the current floor and the floors above. When selected, the option is enabled.

Note: It is recommended that existing walls and interior elements are elevated automatically so they maintain the same elevation as the floor they are on.

To edit floor properties

1 Move to the floor you want to edit and then choose Edit Current Floor from the Working Floor drop-down menu. The Edit Current Floor dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the floor properties as needed and then click OK.


Adding and Deleting Floors

Adding and Deleting FloorsYou can add up to 20 floor levels to your design, depending on your software program. Each floor can be associated with the elevation and ceiling height of the floor below it, or independent of the floor below it. When floor levels are stacked on top of each other, making their height and elevations relative ensures that each level is positioned at the correct elevation so walls and other elements are easily and accurately placed.

Adding FloorsThe New Floor dialog box includes options for setting the floor height, elevation, and how elevation adjustments affect existing floors on upper levels.

■ New Floor Name type a unique name for the floor. This is displayed in the Working Floor drop-down menu.

Note: A default floor name is automatically populated in the field, but each floor name must be unique so only one floor can use the default name.

■ Ceiling Height type the height you want in the Ceiling Height text box. Notice, the ceiling height affects the Exterior Wall Height value, which is the overall height of the wall.

■ Slab/Joist Thickness type the slab or joist thickness you want in the corresponding text box. Notice, the value affects the Exterior Wall Height value, which is the overall height of the wall.

■ Floor is above drop-down menu specifies the new floor’s vertical position in relation to other floors.

■ To add a new top floor choose the current top level floor.■ To insert between floors, choose the floor you want the new level to be above.

Note: When inserting a new floor, the Controls elevations for floors above new floor checkbox becomes active. When selected, the floors above the new floor are elevated based on the exterior wall height of the new floor. When deselected, the floors above the new floor are not repositioned.

■ To add a new bottom floor choose None.Note: When None is selected, the Base Elevation text box becomes active. Type the elevation you want for the base floor.

■ Automatic Elevation Adjustments options specify whether or not you want the elevation adjustments to affect existing walls and interior elements, and exterior elements on the current floor and the floors above. When selected, the option is enabled. This option is only available when the Controls elevations for floors above new floor checkbox is selected.

Note: It is recommended that existing walls and interior elements are elevated automatically so they maintain the same elevation as the floor they are on.



■ Copy perimeter walls to new floor from drop-down menu allows you to cope the perimeter walls from an existing floor level and draw them on your new floor level.

To add or insert a new top floor

1 Click the Working Floor drop-down menu and choose Add/Insert Floor. The New Floor dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a descriptive name in the New Floor Name text box.

3 Type the floor’s ceiling height and slab/joist thickness in the corresponding text boxes.

4 In the Floor Base Elevation section, click the Floor is above drop-down menu and choose the position you want for the new floor.

Set the elevation options as needed, depending on the position of the new floor level.

(optional) If you want to copy the exterior walls from an existing floor to your new top floor, click the Copy perimeter walls to new floor from drop-down menu and choose from which floor the walls should be copied.

5 Click Add to add the new floor level.

6 Click Add to insert the new floor.

Deleting FloorsYou can delete any of your existing floors, however at least one floor must remain. When you delete a floor, all of the floor’s contents are deleted with it.

To delete a floor

1 Click the Working Floor drop-down menu and choose the floor you want to delete.

2 Click the Working Floor drop-down menu again and then click Delete Current Floor.

A confirmation window is displayed.

3 Click Yes to delete the floor. The floor and all of its contents are removed from your design.


Chapter 10

Electrical Plan TabAdding electrical components to your home design is a simple matter of selecting the component you want to place and clicking on your drawing plan. You can even turn the lights on and off!

Architect 3D provides handy placement features, such as associative dimensioning and wall tracking. Using associative dimensioning, you can place components a specific distance from a neighboring wall or other electrical component. Automatic wall tracking makes sure you place components, such as outlets and switches, without error.

Placing ReceptaclesArchitect 3D makes it simple to add electrical components to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the components you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place components a specific distance from a neighboring electrical component or wall segment.

You’ll notice that when placing certain outlets and switches, the component is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. Floor and ceiling outlets are not tracked to walls.

While a receptacle tool is active, or a receptacle is selected in your drawing, you can choose a receptacle style on the Properties tab. From the drop-down menu, choose a Custom or Standard library and then select the style you want on the Preview Bar. The receptacle in your drawing is updated, and you can see the style in the 3D view. The Wall Receptacle library is shown here, however the Floor Receptacle and Ceiling Receptacle libraries are organized similarly.

Note: As you hover over each preview, its description is displayed.

You can further customize receptacles and switches using the following editing methods:

■ 2D Editing Methods■ Elevating Objects■ Component Description■ Applying Paint and Color■ Working with 3D Views



Chapter Electrical Plan Tab10

Wall ReceptacleWall receptacles are tracked along walls. Dimensions are displayed as you drag the receptacle along the wall, indicating the distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

You can choose the style you want on the Properties tab when the Receptacle tool is active or a receptacle is selected in your drawing.

To place a wall receptacle

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Wall Receptacle Tool from the Receptacle toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the receptacle on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Floor ReceptacleFloor receptacles are placed on the floor surface. Dimensions are displayed as you move the cursor around the design window, indicating the distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

If an auto-floor is detected, the receptacle is placed at an elevation that considers the auto-floor depth. If changes are made to the auto-floor depth after a floor receptacle is placed, the receptacle’s elevation also needs to be adjusted.


To place a floor receptacle

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Floor Receptacle Tool from the Receptacle toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the receptacle in your design.


Placing Receptacles

Ceiling ReceptacleCeiling receptacles are placed on the ceiling surface. Dimensions are displayed as you move the cursor around the design window, indicating the distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

Ceiling receptacles are placed at the auto-ceiling elevation. If the ceiling for a room is disabled, it is placed at 0 by default. You can then adjust the receptacle elevation as needed.


To place a ceiling receptacle

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Receptacle Tool from the Receptacle toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the receptacle in your design.



Wall SwitchSwitches are tracked along walls. Dimensions are displayed as you drag the switch along the wall, indicating the distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

You can choose the style you want on the Properties tab when the Switch Tool is active or a switch is selected in your drawing.

To place a switch

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Switch Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the switch on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Switch Connector ToolIt’s easy to add switch connectors to your home design. Using the Switch Connector Tool, just click and drag to define the connection. Once placed you can move a switch connector by dragging the entire segment or one of the end points. Connectors are only visible in the 2D view.

To place a switch connector

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Switch Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to draw from a switch or electrical component to another electrical component and release to place the connector.

Note: Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain to a perfect arc.


Adding Lighting

Adding LightingYou can add interior and exterior lighting to your design with just a couple of mouse clicks. Each light has its own properties so you can control settings individually. The following lighting options are available:

■ Fixture Lights

■ Flood Lights


■ Light Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Elevating Objects■ Adding Lighting and Shadows■ Working with 3D Views

Fixture LightsAdding fixture lighting to your design is very similar to adding other electrical components; however, they do not track directly to walls or automatically display dimensioning.

Architect 3D provides many light styles to choose from, including recessed canned lights, heat/vent lights, directional lights, even landscape lights. In addition, you can control the type and intensity of illumination that each fixture generates.

Before placing a light fixture in your drawing, choose a Light Style on the Properties tab. Once the light is place, its style cannot be changed.

To add a fixture lighting

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Fixture Light Tool.

2 Choose the light style on the Properties tab.



3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the light in your design.

Flood LightsFlood lights are added just like outlets and switches; they attach to and track along walls and their lighting, which can be turned off and on, is displayed in 3D View. You can change the flood light’s elevation or position after it has been placed.

To add a flood light

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Flood Light Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the light on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Light PropertiesLights are defined by their beam and glow. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab. Changes to light settings are visible in the 3D view.

Note: When editing settings, always click the Apply button to accept changes.


Light Properties

■ Beam checkbox controls the visibility of the beam dispersed by the light fixture. When selected, the beam displayed in the 3D view; when deselected the beam is not visible.

Beam On Beam Off■ Ambient checkbox controls the visibility of ambient light in the room. When

selected, ambient light is displayed in the 3D view; when deselected ambient light is not visible.

Ambient On Ambient Off■ Dimmer slider controls the brightness of the beam. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or

increase the brightness.

■ Radius slider controls the size of the beam. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the radius size.

Radius 5 Radius 30■ Falloff slider controls the how diffused the edges of the beam are displayed. Drag the slider or click the left and

right arrows to decrease or increase the amount of diffusion. The lower the falloff the sharper the edges; the higher the falloff the more diffused the edges.



Falloff 0 Falloff 4■ Glow checkbox controls the glow at the light source. When selected, the glow is visible at the light source; when

deselected the glow is not visible. When the glow is enabled, you can edit the following settings:

■ Glow Dimmer slider controls the brightness of the glow. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the brightness.

■ Glow Size slider controls the size of the glow. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the glow size.

■ PhotoRender settings are applied when rendering your 3D view using Photo Realistic Rendering mode. To see the Photo Render settings you must render the view.

■ Casts Shadows checkbox controls whether shadows are rendered. When selected, objects cast shadows; when deselected shadows are excluded.

■ Color preview controls the color of the light that is generated. Click the preview to open to Color window, where you can choose the color you want.

Adding a Ceiling FanPlacing ceiling fans is as simple as one mouse click. Once you place a ceiling fan, you can move it by dragging or by specifying exact coordinates.

The available ceiling fan styles are displayed on the Properties Bar when the Ceiling Fan Tool is active or when a ceiling fan is selected in your drawing. You can change the ceiling fan style by selecting the style you want in the Preview Bar.


Placing Phone and Cable Outlets


■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Component Description■Applying Paint and Color

To add a ceiling fan

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Fan Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the ceiling fan in your design.

.

Placing Phone and Cable OutletsPlacing phone and cable jacks is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. You’ll notice that when placing jacks, the component is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. The phone or cable jack is displayed with dimensions as you drag to position it along the wall, which indicate the distance from the center of the jack to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

The following jacks are available in the Outlet toolset.




■ 2D Editing Methods■ Elevating Objects■ Applying Paint and Color

To place a phone or cable outlet

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the jack you want from the Outlet toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the jack on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Adding Smoke DetectorsSmoke detectors can be placed either along a wall or on a ceiling.

The smoke detector is displayed with dimensions, as you drag along a wall or move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other electrical component.



To place a smoke detector on a wall

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Smoke Detector Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the smoke detector on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.


Adding Thermostats

To place a smoke detector on a ceiling

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Smoke Detector Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the smoke detector in your design.

Adding ThermostatsPlacing thermostats is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. You’ll notice that, when placing, the component is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.



To place a thermostat

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Thermostat Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the thermostat on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.



Adding Home Theater ComponentsCreating and customizing your home theater couldn’t be easier. There is an entire set of tools available to add audio and video components to your design, with just a couple of mouse clicks. These components have default elevations and orientations. For example, the Video Projector Tool attaches the video projector to the ceiling. You can reposition any of the home theater components using basic editing techniques.

The home theater components are displayed with dimensions, as you drag along a wall or move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other components in the design.

The toolset shown to the right displays the available components in the Home Theater toolset.


■ Rotating a Selection■ Elevating Objects

To add a flat screen television

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Flat Screen Television Tool from the Home Theater toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the television is placed on the floor.

To add a video projector

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Video Projector Tool from the Home Theater toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the television is placed on the floor. By default, the video projector is attached to the ceiling, based on the default ceiling height.


Adding Home Theater Components

To add a satellite dish

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Satellite Dish Tool from the Home Theater toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the satellite dish is placed at ground level.

To add a satellite receiver

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Satellite Receiver Tool from the Home Theater toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the receiver is placed on the floor.

To add wall speakers

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Wall Speaker Tool from the Home Theater toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the wall speaker on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.



To add ceiling speakers

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Speaker Tool from the Home Theater toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. The ceiling speaker is placed based on the auto ceiling elevation.

To add floor speakers

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Floor Speaker Tool from the Home Theater toolset.



Adding Home Security Components

Adding Home Security ComponentsHome security components are available to suit all levels of security, from light and heat detection to cameras and control panels. These components have default elevations and orientations. For example, the Dome Camera Tool attaches a camera to the ceiling. You can reposition any of the home security components using basic editing techniques.

The home security components are displayed with dimensions, as you drag along a wall or move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other components in the design.

The toolset shown to the right displays the available components in the Home Security toolset.


■ Rotating a Selection■ Elevating Objects

To add a security camera to a wall

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Camera Tool from the Home Security toolset.


To add a dome camera to a ceiling

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Dome Camera Tool from the Home Security toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the dome camera is attached to the ceiling, based on the auto ceiling elevation.



To add a security contact

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Contact Tool from the Home Security toolset.


To add a motion detector

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Motion Detector Tool from the Home Security toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place. The motion detector is placed at a default elevation near the ceiling.

To add a wall-mounted glass break detector

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Wall Mount Glass Break Detector Tool from the Home Security toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place. The glass break detector is placed at a default elevation on the wall.


Adding Home Security Components

To add a ceiling-mounted glass break detector

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Mount Glass Break Detector Tool from the Home Security toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the glass break detector is attached to the ceiling, based on the auto ceiling elevation.

To add a photo beam

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Photo Beam Tool from the Home Security toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. In the example below, the photo beam has been rotated to fit into a corner.

To add a security keypad

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Keypad Tool from the Home Security toolset.


To add a security control panel

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Control Panel Tool from the Home Security toolset.




To add a heat detector

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Heat Detector Tool from the Home Security toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By default, the heat detector is attached to the ceiling, based on the auto ceiling elevation.

To add a wall-mounted access keypad

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Access Keypad Wall Mount Tool from the Home Security toolset.


To add a pedestal-mounted access keypad

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Access Keypad Pedestal Mount Tool from the Home Security toolset.



Adding Home Automation Components

Adding Home Automation ComponentsAutomated components can help to make your home simpler and more efficient. There are a number of automation components available in Punch! from network routers to intercoms, and more. These components have default elevations and orientations. For example, the Backup Generator is placed on the ground, however the Backup Generator Panel attaches to a wall at a default elevation. You can reposition any of the home automation components using basic editing techniques.

The home automation components are displayed with dimensions, as you drag along a wall or move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other components in the design.

The toolset shown to the right displays the available components in the Home Automation toolset.


■ Rotating a Selection■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options

To place a home automation touch-panel

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Home Automation Touch-Panel Tool from the Automation toolset.


To place a network router

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Network Router Tool from the Automation toolset.




To place a photocell

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the PhotoCell Tool from the Automation toolset.


To place a backup generator

1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Backup Generator Tool from the Automation toolset.


To place a backup generator panel

1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Backup Generator Panel Tool from the Automation toolset.



Adding Home Automation Components

To place a circuit panel

1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Circuit Panel Tool from the Automation toolset.


To place a conduit

1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Conduit Tool from the Automation toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the component. Conduit is visual representation that is displayed in 2D, but not in 3D.

To place a freeze detector

1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Freeze Detector Tool from the Automation toolset.


To place an intercom

1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Intercom Tool from the Automation toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place. The intercom is placed at a default elevation on the wall.



To place a battery power supply

1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Battery Power Supply Tool from the Automation toolset.



Chapter 11

Plumbing Plan TabOnce you’ve completed your floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. Architect 3D features a suite of plumbing fixtures from basic toilets to spa tubs. Other important considerations are gas bibs and floor drain placement, also included in Architect 3D. Most plumbing objects are designed to “track the walls”, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments to offer flawless design. Tubs and showers are automatically annotated and dimensions appear, as you add plumbing, to ensure accurate placement. Each plumbing component is simple to include in your drawing, with the flexibility to modify it at any time.

Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas BibWhen you place an outdoor hose bib or a gas bib, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or the end of a wall segment. You’ll notice that when placing hose bibs, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. As you drag to position the bib, dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.

The following tools are available from the Bib toolset.


■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects

To place a hose bib

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Hose Bib Tool from the Bib toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the bib on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.



Chapter Plumbing Plan Tab11

To place a gas bib

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Gas Bib Tool from the Bib toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the bib on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Adding Floor DrainsOnce you’ve completed your plumbing plan, the final step is to add floor drains to your design. Adding floor drains is as simple as a mouse click.


■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection■ Nudging a Selection

To add a floor drain

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Floor Drain Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the floor drain in your design.


Placing Toilets

Placing ToiletsArchitect 3D makes it simple to add plumbing to your home plan. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or wall segment. You’ll notice that, when placing toilets, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the toilet has been placed by selecting the toilet in your drawing and choosing a different style.


■ Toilet Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color

To place a toilet

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Toilet Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the toilet on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Toilet PropertiesToilets are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the object has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.

Note: When editing values in a text box, be sure to press ENTER to accept changes.



■ Length defines the distance from one side of the toilet to the other side.

■ Width defines the distance from the back of the toilet to the front.

■ Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the toilet.

■ Description button opens the Description dialog box. For more information on editing descriptions, see “Component Description”, on page 51.

■ Flip button allows you to flip the side where the hardware is positioned.

■ Styles library includes the available toilets and bidets styles. You can choose the style before or after you place the toilet.

Placing SinksAs with toilets, sinks are automatically tracked to wall segments, as you place them, as well as automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls and plumbing fixtures. As you drag along a wall, the dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the sink to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.

When the tool is active you can choose a bathroom or kitchen sink style from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the sink has been placed by selecting the sink in your drawing and choosing a different style.


■ Sink Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color

To place a sink

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Sink Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the sink on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Length

Width

Offset


Sink Properties

Sink PropertiesSinks are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Length defines the distance from one side of the sink to the other side.

■ Width defines the distance from the back of the sink to the front.

■ Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the sink.



■ Styles library includes the available sink styles. You can choose the style before or after you place the sink. There are two sink libraries to choose from:

Length

Width

Offset



Placing Bath Tubs In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking as you place a tub, Architect 3D automatically adds annotation to your design when the tub is placed. This makes reading home plans simple. If you don’t find the exact sized tub you are looking for, simply place a tub that is similar in size, then adjust the tub or spa properties to the exact size you want for your home design. As you drag along a wall, the dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the sink to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.

When the tool is active you can choose a bath tub style from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the bath tub has been placed by selecting the tub in your drawing and choosing a different style.


■ Bath Tub Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color

To place a bath tub

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Bath Tub Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the bath tub on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Bath Tub PropertiesBath Tubs are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.



Placing a Shower

■ Length defines the distance from one side of the tub to the other side.

■ Width defines the distance from the back of the tub (edge against the wall) to the front.

■ Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the tub.


■ Flip allows you to flip the side where the hardware is positioned.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of the tub dimensions. When selected, tub dimensions are displayed.

■ Styles library includes the available bathtub styles. You can choose the style before or after you place the tub.

Placing a ShowerShowers are placed in the same manner as bath tubs. In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a shower, Architect 3D automatically adds annotation to your design, once the shower is placed. If you don’t find the exact sized shower you are looking for, simply place a shower that is similar in size, then adjust the shower properties to the exact size you want for your home design. As you drag along a wall, the dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the shower to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.

When the tool is active you can choose a shower style from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the shower has been placed by selecting the shower in your drawing and choosing a different style.


■ Shower Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color

To place a shower

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Shower Tool.


Length

Width

Offset



Shower PropertiesShowers are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.

Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text box.

■ Length defines the distance from one side of the shower to the other side.

■ Width defines the distance from the back of the shower to the front.

■ Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the shower.


■ Flip allows you to flip the side where the hardware is positioned.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of the shower dimensions. When selected, shower dimensions are displayed.

■ Styles library includes the available shower styles. You can choose the style before or after you place the shower.


Placing the Water Heater

Placing the Water HeaterAdding a water heater to your home plan is as simple as a mouse click.

Dimensions are displayed as you move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the distance from the center of the object to the nearest wall or other component.


■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color

To place a water heater

1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Water Heater Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the water heater in your design.




Chapter 12

Roofing Plan TabOne of the features that will set your design apart from all others will be its roofline. Using the roofing tools available in Architect 3D, you can design intricate roofs with ease. From basic rooflines, like hipped or gable, to less common ones, like saltbox, gambrel, or a roof over a bay window, you will be able to create any roof to match the style of your home plan.

Automatically Adding a RoofYou can add a hip roof or a gable roof to an enclosure with just two mouse clicks. If a gable wall style is detected, the roof panels are created, matching the wall pitch.

The roof’s properties are controlled by the Automatic Roof Options, where you can specify the roof pitch, soffit depth, generation preferences, and framing options.

After an auto-roof is generated, edit the roof panels as you would a typical, manually drawn roof, and the panels can be updated when you make changes to the perimeter walls. To control auto-roof settings, see “Auto-Roof Properties”, on page 182.

To remove the roof, delete the roof panels in the design window.

To automatically add a hip roof

1 Move the cursor over the outer walls of your design until you see a light blue highlighted perimeter. Click the perimeter. After selection, it becomes yellow and the Perimeter properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 On the Properties tab, click Generate Roof. A hip roof is generated based on the current automatic roof options.


Chapter Roofing Plan Tab12

Auto-Roof PropertiesAutomatic roofs are built instantaneously, however can control the settings that are used and update the roof if you need to adjust it. Auto-roof properties are controlled in the Automatic Roof Options window.

■ Roof Pitch Select either Ratio or Angle to specify how you want to set the roof pitch and then type the pitch you want in the corresponding text box.

■ Soffit Depth Type the depth you want in the Soffit Depth text box.

■ Roof Perimeter

■ When the Automatically generates panels when changed checkbox is selected, the roof panels are created automatically, and updated automatically if the perimeter walls are moved or resized. When deselected, you must click the Build Roof button on the Properties tab to generate the panels manually.

■ When the Clips automatic roofs on other floors checkbox is selected, roof panels are removed from the interior of other levels so a roof is not built inside.

■ Framing Options control the underlying roof framing. To see the roof framing you must use the Framing render style in the 3D view. For more information, see “Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles”, which begins on page 275.

■ Rafter Size defines the width of the rather boards.■ Rafter Spacing defines the distances between each rafter board. ■ Rafter Material specifies the rafter building material.

Note: For truss roof framing, you should create a roof using one of the roof shape tools or freehand roof tools.

To edit automatic roof options


2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button.

3 Edit the options as needed and then click OK.

Adding a Predefined Roof ShapeThere are several styles of roofs available in Architect 3D. Automatic dimensioning makes it easy to achieve exact placement.

When the tool is active you can edit the properties on the Properties tab. You can also edit the properties after the roof has been placed by selecting the roof in your drawing.

Be sure you are working on the floor where you want to add the roof (for example, to draw a roof over a one-story structure you should be on the first floor).

The following components are available in the Roof Shapes toolset.


Using the Freehand Roof Tools


■Roof Properties■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Wall Properties (for matching the gable ends of these roof style)■Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color■Customizing Roof Framing Properties

To draw a predefined roof shape

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the tool you want from the Roof Shape toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to draw the roof to the shape and size you want.

Note: The arrows show which way the roof section descends. The elevation of the roof is displayed in the design window.

Using the Freehand Roof ToolsArchitect 3D includes freehand roof tools that provide versatility and power, when drawing complex roofing plans. Using the three-point and four-point freehand tools, roof sections are attached to walls, making it easy to draw them the necessary size the first time. After drawing roof sections, all parts of it can be customized, for example, pitch, placement, or shape. With the three- and four-point freehand tools you can specify a width for soffit.

You can resize and reshape the roof by dragging end points. You can also drag the arrow in the center of the roof section to rotate it and change the direction of the roof slope, or right-click an edge and choose Set Slope to Edge to specify which edge of the roof slopes to the top of the wall.

The following freehand roofs are available:

■ Freehand Roof

■ Four-Point Freehand Roof (in the Freehand Roof toolset)

■ Three-Point Freehand Roof (in the Freehand Roof toolset)


■ Roof Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options



■ Elevating Objects■ Wall Properties (for matching the gable ends of these roof style)■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color■ Customizing Roof Framing Properties

Freehand RoofThe Freehand Roof Tool allows you to create a roof section using a 2D shape draw method. You can set the pitch and the point to which the elevation is measured on the Properties tab before or after you add the roof. The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match other roof sections.

To draw a freehand roof

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Freehand Roof Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a freehand roof section.

Freehand roof drawn using the Closed Polygon draw method



Using the Freehand Roof Tools

Four-Point Freehand RoofThe Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool creates a rectangular roof section attached to a wall. The roof is drawn to cover the entire wall segment. You can define the pitch and the soffit settings on the Properties tab before you add the roof, and then edit the pitch and elevation after the roof has been placed.

As you draw the roof, a rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Also, dimensions are displayed as you draw.

To draw a four-point freehand roof

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool from the Freehand Roof toolset.

2 Position your cursor on a wall in the design window then click and drag away from the wall section. Release the mouse button to place.

Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match other roof sections.

Three-Point Freehand RoofThe Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool creates a triangular roof section attached to a wall. The base of the roof is drawn to cover the entire wall segment. You can define the pitch and the soffit settings on the Properties tab before you add the roof, and then, if necessary, edit the pitch and elevation after the roof has been placed.

As you draw the roof, a rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Also, dimensions are displayed as you draw.

To draw a three-point freehand roof

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool from the Freehand Roof toolset.

2 Position your cursor on a wall in the design window then click and drag away from the wall section. Release the mouse button.



Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match other roof sections.

Adding a DormerDormers can add space to your interior and a unique look to your exterior. You can quickly add a dormer to a roof panel in your design with the Dormer Tool.


■ Roof Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Wall Properties■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and

Color

Dormer ComponentsDormers are composed of multiple components, including roof panels, a dormer cutout to remove the existing roof section where the dormer is added, a window, and dormer styled walls. You can edit each of these components individually after the dormer is placed.

Roof panels

Dormer cutout

Dormer wall

Window

186 Arch
itect 3D Us er’s Guide

Adding a Dormer

Dormer PropertiesWhen you add a dormer, it is placed based on the properties that are defined on the Properties tab. You can edit these properties before you add the dormer, however to edit the dormer properties after it is placed, you must edit the individual components that make up the dormer.

Note: Press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.

■ Dormer Style lets you choose the type of dormer you want to add to your roof.

Note: You cannot change the dormer style after the dormer has been added to your design.

■ Sizing defines the overall width and height of the dormer.

■ Base Pitch defines the slope of the dormer walls. The wall pitch ultimately affects the depth of the dormer from the roof; a higher the pitch value results in a more shallow dormer, while a lower pitch value creates a dormer that extends further from the roof. If the Base Pitch does not match the existing roof’s pitch, you may need to adjust the dormer to position it correctly.

When the Use Detected Pitch checkbox is selected, the Base Pitch value is ignored and the dormer walls are created to match the pitch of the existing roof panel.

■ Gable/Hip Pitch defines the slope of the roof panels for gable and hip style dormers. The higher the pitch, the steeper the roof slope. For example, 10:12 means the roof rises 10” for every 12” of the roof.

■ Shed Pitch defines the slope of the roof panel for a shed style dormer. The higher the pitch, the steeper the roof slope.

■ Display Pitch Angles checkbox controls how the pitch values are displayed. When selected, the pitch values change to show the pitch angle in the text boxes rather than inches.

■ Include Windows checkbox control whether windows are included with the dormer. When selected, windows are included. You can edit windows in a dormer just like any other window in your design.



To add a dormer

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Dormer Tool.

2 Choose the Dormer Style on the Properties tab and edit the Sizing and Pitch settings as needed.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the dormer on a roof panel in your design.

Creating a Dormer CutoutA cutout tool is available for removing part of a roof panel. This way you can manually draw cutouts using the available draw method shapes. Dormer cutouts must be drawn on an existing roof panel in your design, and the entire shape must exist on the same roof panel.


■ Changing Curve Tension■ Roof Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection

Width

Height Base Pitch

Gable/Hip Pitch

18

Roof Properties

To add a dormer cutout

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Dormer Cutout Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw the cutout section on a roof panel.

This example shows a dormer cutout drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape

Roof PropertiesOnce drawn, roof sections can be altered to suit your design. From resizing to rotating the slope to changing its pitch, Architect 3D makes it simple to create even the most complex roofline. Roofs are defined by their pitch, elevation, size, and their slope direction. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.

Note: Press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.

■ Pitch affects how steep a roof appears. For example, 10:12 means the roof rises 10” for every 12” of the roof. To create a flat roof, select Custom and type 0.0 in the text box.

■ Elevation specifies whether the roof elevation is measured from the ground to the base of the roof section or from the ground to the peak of the roof section.

Elevation measured to Base Elevation measured to Peak■ Pitch Angle allows you to specify an angle for the pitch.


■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, roof dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

■ Slope Direction is controlled on the roof in the design window. Drag the arrow, or right-click an edge and choose Set Slope to Edge.

Note: Rotation is constrained to 15-degree increments.



Adding a SkylightSkylights are windows cut into the roof. They add a touch of elegance, in addition to letting in more natural light. When the tool is active you can choose the Skylight style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the skylight style before or after it has been placed in your drawing. Skylights must be placed on an existing roof panel in your design.


■ Skylight Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color

To add a skylight

1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Skylight Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the skylight in your design.

Skylight PropertiesSkylights are defined by their width, height, and trim size. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.

■ Skylight Style drop-down menu provides access to a variety of skylight styles.

The Custom Skylight style includes a number of additional categories to choose from.


Drawing a Gambrel Roof

■ Width defines the distance from one side of the skylight to the other.

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of the skylight to the top.

■ Trim defines the width of the trim around the skylight. This is not included in the overall height or width.

Drawing a Gambrel RoofThe Gambrel roof, or barn roof, is a popular style because it increases the usable space in the loft/attic area. A gambrel roof is composed of two pitches. The lower sections are created using the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool, while the upper pitch will be drawn using the Gable Roof Tool.


■ Four-Point Freehand Roof■ Roof Properties■ Breaking a Wall■ Drawing Walls

To draw a gambrel roof

1 Use the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool to draw a roof section on one of the walls.

2 Draw a matching four-point freehand roof on the opposing wall using the same roof pitch.

(alternatively) Use copy and paste to create a copy of the existing roof section and change the roof direction so the panel are the exact same dimensions.



At this point there will be a gap between the two roof sections; this gap will be filled with the Gable Roof section.

Note: Note the elevation that is specified in red as the upper elevation of the roof section.

3 Use the Gable Roof Tool to draw a gable roof between the two freehand roof panels. The roof pitch should not be as steep as the lower roof sections.

4 Elevate the gable roof to the top elevation of the freehand roof panels.

Note: The previous example specified 12:12 and 4:12 pitches, but any combination of pitches will work for this roof.

192 Arch
itect 3D User’s Guide

Chapter 13

HVAC Plan TabCorrectly adding HVAC ducts and units is an important part of the home design process. Architect 3D makes it easy to flawlessly design your HVAC system, making sure all rooms receive adequate ventilation.

Once you place HVAC, with a few mouse clicks, it’s easy to adjust or move components. You can even move components by a specific distance, based on Cartesian or Polar coordinates, or rotate items, as needed.

Placing Air DuctsArchitect 3D features several sized air ducts to ensure the perfect HVAC plan. To place air ducts, simply click and drag. Air ducts are drawn horizontally and vertically, just as standard HVAC ducts are actually placed in a new home. You can move air ducts by dragging, by a specific distance, or rotate them to fit your home design.

If you don’t find the perfectly-sized air duct for your home plan, you can edit the width and depth on the Properties tab before or after you draw the air duct. Air ducts are visible in the 2D view only.


■ Air Duct Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection

To place an air duct

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Air Duct Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the air duct.

Air Duct PropertiesAir ducts are defined by their width and depth. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.



Chapter HVAC Plan Tab13

Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text box.

■ Width defines the distance from one side of the air duct to the other (length is the distance from end point to end point).

■ Depth defines the distance from the bottom of the air duct to the top (this dimension is not represented in 2D).

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the air duct dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

Placing Vents and RegistersPlacing vents and registers involves one mouse click. Once you’ve placed vents, you can move them by dragging or defining specific coordinates. You can even rotate vents at custom angles to fit your design. Architect 3D provides several vents to choose from, including floor and ceiling vents.

You can choose the register style on the Properties tab before or after your place it in your design.

To following options are available from the Register/Return toolset:

■ Floor Register

■ Wall Register/Vent

■ Ceiling Register/Vent


■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Rotating a Selection■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

Floor RegisterFloor registers are placed at the auto-floor elevation, if the auto-floor is enabled. Otherwise, the register is placed at the base elevation for the current floor. If you’ve created a floor manually (using the Floor Tool) you should adjust the register elevation to match that of the floor.

When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the register has been placed by selecting the register in your drawing and choosing a different style.


Placing Vents and Registers

To place a floor register

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Floor Register Tool from the Register/Return toolset.


Wall Register/VentWall registers and vents are placed on a wall at a default elevation. As you drag along a wall, the dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the register/vent to the nearest wall end or wall attachment.

When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the register/vent has been placed by selecting the component in your drawing and choosing a different style.

There are two libraries available: Return Vents and Supply Registers. When a library is selected, its contents are displayed in the Preview bar.



To place a wall register/vent

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Wall Register/Return Tool from the Register/Return toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the register/return on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.

Ceiling Register/VentCeiling registers are placed at the auto ceiling elevation. If you’ve created a ceiling manually (using the Floor Tool) you may need to adjust the register/vent elevation to match that of the ceiling.

When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the register/vent has been placed by selecting the component in your drawing and choosing a different style.

There are two libraries available: Return Vents and Supply Registers. When a library is selected, its contents are displayed in the Preview bar.


Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and Pumps

To place a ceiling register/vent

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Register/Return Tool from the Register/Return toolset.


Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and PumpsAdding heating and air conditioning units only involves one mouse click. Once placed, you can move units by specific distances, drag to move them, and even rotate them to fit your home design.


■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Rotating a Selection■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Component Description■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building

Materials

To add a furnace

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Furnace Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the furnace in your design.

To add an air conditioner

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Air Conditioner Tool from the Heating & Cooling toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the furnace in your design.



To add a heat pump

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Heat Pump Tool from the Heating & Cooling toolset

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the heat pump in your design.

Placing Heaters and RadiatorsAs you place heaters and radiators in your home plan, the component is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. Dimension lines automatically appear, as you drag and after it is placed, making it easy to place heaters a specific distance from a neighboring HVAC component or wall segment.

When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the heater or radiator has been placed by selecting the component in your drawing and choosing a different style.

■ Heater and Radiator Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Component Description■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building

Materials

To place a heater

1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Heater/Radiator Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the heater on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.


Heater and Radiator Properties

Heater and Radiator PropertiesOnce placed, heaters and radiators are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.

Note: When editing values, be sure to press ENTER to accept new values in a text box.

■ Length defines the span of the heater or radiator along the wall.

■ Width defines the distance from the back of the heater or radiator to the front.

■ Offset defines the distance between the wall and the heater or radiator. To position it right up against the wall, set the value to 0.

■ Description button opens the Description dialog box. For more information on editing descriptions, see “Component Description”, on page 51. The description is used in Estimator.


■ Styles library provides a variety of heaters and radiators to choose from. You can choose the style before or after you place the component.

Length

Width

Offset




Chapter 14

Deck Plan TabIf you are looking for a way to add more living space to your existing home, but don’t want to build an addition, you might consider adding a deck. Architect 3D contains an extensive toolset for designing outdoor living areas.

You will learn how to design multi-story and multi-level decks, including options for handrails, skirt trim, and steps.

Adding a DeckAdding a deck is a great way to add living space to your home. With Architect 3D, you can build freeform deck sections on the fly, with or without railings, or use wall trace tools to create a deck along an existing wall. All sections can be altered if you change your mind in the middle of the design process. The two Trace Wall Deck tools make designing a deck against an intricate set of exterior walls simple. At any time during the designing process, you can view your work in 3D.

When a deck tool is active you can edit the deck properties on the Properties tab. You can also change the properties after the deck has been placed by selecting the deck to access its properties. Some deck properties are only available after the deck has been added, for example stairs.


■ Deck Properties■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Customizing Deck Framing Properties■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color



Chapter Deck Plan Tab14

Freeform DeckUsing the Freeform Deck tools you can create a deck with a railing or a deck without a railing. The default drawing shape is a polygon. To create a deck using a different shape, choose the shape you want on the Properties tab before you draw the deck.

To add a freeform deck shape

1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click one of the Deck tools from the Freeform Deck toolset.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a freeform deck.

This example shows a deck drawn using the Closed Polygon shape

Wall Trace DeckUsing the Wall Trace Deck tools you can automatically create a deck that traces an existing wall in your design. For rectangular deck shapes that conform to the existing perimeter, use the Wall Trace Tool. The start point for the deck defines the center of the deck.

Note: Only the edges of the deck that are away from the house perimeter will have railings.

To add a wall trace deck

1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Deck Wall Trace Tool from the Wall Trace Deck toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the deck to the shape and size you want. The edge along the walls automatically conforms to match the shape.


Adding a Deck

Custom Deck Wall Trace ToolFor more complex perimeters, use the Custom Wall Trace Tool to trace the exterior and define points so your deck matches the unique shape you want perfectly. This deck must start along a wall, but then the shape is defined by the points you place as you draw.

To add a custom wall trace deck

1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Custom Deck Wall Trace Tool from the Wall Trace Deck toolset.

2 Click and drag along a wall to define the direction you want the deck to be drawn. A rubber band arrow is displayed and follows the pointer. Release the mouse button.

3 Click another point along a wall to define the last point of the deck along the wall.

4 Continue to click points to define the shape of the deck and right-click to finish. The deck automatically conforms to the wall.



Deck PropertiesDecks are defined by their height, skirting, and handrails. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Deck Height defines the distance from the base of the deck to the top surface. By editing the height of a deck you can create elaborate designs using multi-level decks.

■ Skirting checkbox controls if skirting is enabled around the sides of the deck. When selected, skirting is enabled. You can choose to include skirt trim on only certain sides, and also customize the skirting by applying colors or materials.

■ Calculate Area button calculates the area of the deck.

■ Include Handrails checkbox controls if handrails are included on the selected edge. When selected, handrails are enabled. You can include or remove handrails from one side of the deck or multiple sides.

■ Handrails Height defines the distance from the bottom of the handrail to the top.

■ Baluster Spacing defines the distance between each baluster or spindle.

■ Include Post checkbox controls if posts are included at each point you clicked when drawing the rail. When selected, posts are included; when deselected they are excluded. You can add or remove individual posts using the Add Point and Remove Point Tools. For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.

■ Post Height defines the height of the posts. You can select individual posts and edit their height, or double-click the rail to select all posts and then edit the height so they match.

■ Steps you can add steps to any side of your deck by selecting the deck edge and clicking the Insert New button. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position.

■ Open checkbox controls if step risers are included. When selected, risers are excluded; when deselected they are included.


■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the deck dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

Editing Deck Step PropertiesUsing Architect 3D, you can add steps to any side of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position.

Note: Steps are added to a deck by clicking the Insert New button when a deck edge is selected.



Adding Custom Deck Railings

■ Step Width defines the distance from one side of the steps to the other side.

■ Total Height defines the distance from the base of the steps to the top step. This is especially useful when designing multi-level decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground, just the next deck level.

■ Left and Right checkboxes control the display of the left and right handrails. When selected, the handrail is enabled; when deselected it is disabled.

Adding Custom Deck RailingsCustomizing railings is easy with Architect 3D; you can simply add railings to any side of your deck.

The shape and configuration of railings can be customized, and you can apply different materials to the rail, post, and balusters. You can specify the railing height and baluster spacing before or after drawing on the Properties tab. As you draw a railing, each point you click as you draw creates a post.


■ Railing Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

To draw a deck railing

1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Deck Railing Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a deck railing.

This example shows a railing drawn using the Open Polygon shape

Railing Properties Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. Using Architect 3D, you gain total control over railing handrail height, baluster spacing, and railing posts.

For more information on editing railing, see “Railing Properties”, on page 135.

Placing a Custom StaircaseIn addition to the Insert Steps feature, Architect 3D gives you the option of easily drawing custom staircases. Straight staircases and curved staircases are drawn using the ceiling height, unless you specify a different height on the Properties tab before drawing the staircase.

The center line defines the direction and shape of the staircase, while the staircase height value defines the distance to the top of the staircase.



To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see “Creating a Deck Cutout”, which begins on page 207. After you’ve drawn your staircase, you can apply different colors and materials to the steps, railing spindles, posts, and handrails.

You can draw the followings types of staircases:

■ Straight Stairway

■ Curved Stairway


■ Staircase Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Customizing Staircase Framing Properties■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

Straight StairwayYou can draw a staircase along a straight line or add multiple points to create an L-shaped or U-shaped staircase with landings. Either way, the number of steps depends on the overall height of the staircase.


To draw a straight stairway

1 On the Deck Plan toolbar, click the Straight Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the staircase, in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click and again to set the next point

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape and then right click to place.


Staircase Properties

Curved StairwayCurved staircases are a single segment that curve in the direction you draw. The number of steps depends on the overall height of the staircase.


To draw a curved stairway

1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.

2 Click to set the start point and drag to set the curve in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click and again to set the end point and place the staircase.

Note: Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the staircase to a perfect arc.

Staircase PropertiesOnce you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Architect 3D, you have total control over stairway width, riser, and tread dimensions, as well as handrail height and placement. For more information on editing stairs, see “Staircase Properties”, on page 132.

Creating a Deck CutoutYou can easily create a space in your deck to insert a pool or hot tub by using the Deck Cutout Tool.


■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects



To draw a deck cutout railing

1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Deck Cutout Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a deck cutout section.

This example shows a deck cutout drawn using the Rectangle From Center shape


Chapter 15

Landscape Plan TabFrom adding a flower bed near your front door to designing an elaborate pool area, Architect 3D contains an extensive toolset to help you design your outdoor living areas.

You will learn to add a pond, pathways, and fencing to your home plan. In addition, you can create flower beds that you can landscape, using flowers, shrubs, and trees, accessible from the Plant library.

Note: For information on adding plants to your design, see “Plants Libraries”, on page 78.

Defining the Property LineIf you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area, you may want to define the property lines. The property line only appears in the 2D design window.

If you know the exact coordinates you can enter them using the Survey Coordinates window and define your property line based on the data you input (you can also edit a manually drawn property line and adjust the points based on coordinates). There are three coordinate modes available when adding a property line based on coordinates.


■Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■Changing Curve Tension■Dimensioning



Chapter Landscape Plan Tab15

To add a property line manually

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click Property Line Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a property line.

This example shows a railing drawn using the Closed Polygon shape

To add a property line by specifying coordinates

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, double-click Property Line Tool.

2 Choose the Coordinate Mode and click the Add button. The options differ depending on the reference meridian.

Azimuth Bearing Relative3 Specify the survey coordinates and click OK.

4 Click OK to draw the property line.


Adding a Fill Region

Adding a Fill RegionFrom simple, rectangular garden entryways and flower beds to elaborate planting areas, Architect 3D makes designing them easy. You can also show mulch around trees or shrubs, or to add a pond or stream to your landscaping. Ground fill regions have a default mulch material applied, which can be updated by applying a different material to the region in the 3D view window. As you draw fills, a rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Also, dimensions are displayed as you draw.

After you draw a ground fill region, you can change the material that is applied to the fill, or you can fill the region with plants, or even add edging around the border. When filling with plants, you should make sure to give them enough space to account for their growth potential.

Above in an example of a ground fill region filled with plants and edging added


■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Changing Curve Tension■ Dimensioning■ Component Description■ Applying Building Materials

To add a ground fill region

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Ground Fill Region Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a fill region.



This example shows a ground fill region drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape

To fill a ground fill region with plants

1 Draw a ground fill region (see “To add a ground fill region”, on page 211).

2 Choose the plant you want to add in the fill region (for information on accessing plants, see “Plants Libraries”, on page 78).

3 Right-click an edge of the ground fill region and choose Plant Fill. The Plant Fill dialog box is displayed.

4 Choose the settings you want and then click OK.

To add edging around a ground fill region

1 Draw a ground fill region (see “To add a ground fill region”, on page 211).

2 Right-click an edge of the ground fill region and choose Create Edging Border.

To edit the edging, see “Edging Properties”, on page 220.


Drawing a Patio

Drawing a PatioEasily customize your outdoor living space by adding a patio. You can edit the patio thickness on the Properties tab before or after you draw the patio. Patios are drawn with a default material, which you can change by applying a different material.


■ Patio Properties■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Component Description■ Changing Curve Tension■ Dimensioning■ Applying Building Materials

To add a patio

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Patio Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a patio.

Patio PropertiesPatios are defined by their thickness. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Patio Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the patio section to the top.

Thickness 2" Thickness 6"■ Curve options control curvature. For more information, see “Changing Curve

Tension”, which begins on page 238.




■ Calc. Area button automatically calculate the square footage of the patio section. The area is displayed on the Properties tab.

Adding Outdoor CabinetsOutdoor Cabinets can be added to your design with just a few mouse clicks. In addition to placing pre-designed cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a cabinet of your own from scratch.

When the tool is active you can choose the cabinet style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the cabinet style after it has been placed in your drawing.

Cabinets are added with default properties, but you can customize almost every aspect of a cabinet to make it your own.


■ Outdoor Cabinet Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Rotating a Selection■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

To add an outdoor cabinet

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Outdoor Cabinet Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the outdoor cabinet in your design.

Outdoor Cabinet PropertiesYou can easily edit a cabinet after you’ve placed it in your drawing. From resizing base doors to adding additional drawers, each aspect of a cabinet is customizable. To access the different faces and components of a cabinet, click the cabinet Component button on the Properties tab.

Cabinet StylesThe available properties depend on the cabinet style. You can change the cabinet style at any time as you design.


Outdoor Cabinet Properties

Cabinet ComponentsThe Component button lists the components on the active cabinet style that are available for editing. When you choose one of the components, its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. The cabinet components that are available for editing depending on the active cabinet style. For example, the Base Cabinet style includes Base Cabinet and Base Door components, while the Gas Grill styles do not include door components. Each of the available Component properties are described below.




Base Cabinet

■ Width defines the overall distance from one side of the cabinet to the other side.

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of the base cabinet to the top of the base cabinet.

■ Depth defines the distance from the front side of the cabinet to the back.

■ Toe Kick defines the height of the toe kick, measured up from the bottom of the cabinet.

■ Style Height defines the distance between the top and bottom edges of the doors and drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjust, the size and positioned of the doors and drawers is affected.

■ Style Width defines the distance between the side edges of the doors and drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjust, the size and positioned of the doors and drawers is affected.

■ Desk Opening checkbox controls the whether or not the cabinet includes an opening in the center. When selected, an opening is added, and you can adjust the Width in the corresponding text box. When deselected, an opening is not included.

■ Flip Corner Position button flips the corner where the angled outward facing cabinet is positioned to the opposite corner (applies to corner style cabinets only).

Height

Depth

Toe Kick

Width

Style Height

Style Width


Outdoor Cabinet Properties

Base Door/Drawers

■ Width defines the distance from one side of an individual door or drawer to the other side.

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of an individual door or drawer to the top.

■ Elevation defines the distance between the bottom of cabinet and the base of the component.

■ Side Offset defines the distance that the component is positioned from the side of the cabinet.

■ Count defines the number of doors or drawers.

■ Stack Doors/Stack Drawers checkbox controls whether base cabinet doors and drawers are position side-by-side or stacked one on top of the other. When selected, the components are stack on top of each other; when deselected they are positioned side-by-side.

■ Mirror Hardware checkbox controls the position of the door hardware. When selected, all of the hardware is positioned at the same location on each door; when deselected the hardware is positioned in the top corner of the inside edge.

■ Inset checkbox controls the display of the door or drawer. When selected, the component is inset as an opening; when deselected the door or drawer is displayed. (available for Base Door and Drawers only).

■ Facing Style button provides style options for the door and drawer faces.

■ Hardware Library button provides access to the Cabinet Knobs and Pulls libraries.

■ Hardware Style button opens the hardware library styles. When a style is selected it is automatically applied to the hardware.

■ Hardware Positioning allows you to click an arrow to move the hardware in that direction.



Counter Top

■ Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the counter top to the top.

■ Overhang Front defines the distance the front edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

■ Overhang Back defines the distance the back edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

■ Overhang Left defines the distance the left edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

■ Overhang Right defines the distance the right edge of the counter top extends out from the cabinet.

Bar Top

■ Backsplash Height defines the distance backsplash extends up from the cabinet.

■ Backsplash Depth defines the distance from the front of the backsplash to the back of the cabinet.

■ Left, Right, and Back Visible checkboxes control the visibility of the backsplash on that corresponding side. When selected, a backsplash is visible on that edge; when deselected it is not visible.

■ Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the bar top to the top.

■ Back Depth defines the distance the bar top extends away from the back of the cabinet.

■ Left Depth defines the distance the bar top extends away from the left backsplash (Left backsplash must be enabled).

■ Right Depth defines the distance the bar top extends away from the right backsplash (Right backsplash must be enabled).

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and DrivewaysIn Architect 3D, you can design sidewalks, pathways, and driveways using the same tool. Once a pathway is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material to suit your needs.

By default, the pathway is drawn using a curved style. You can change this, as well as the width, on the Properties tab before or after you draw.

Pathways are drawn with a default material, which you can change by applying a different material.


■ Pathway/Driveway Properties■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Component Description■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color


Pathway/Driveway Properties

To add a pathway

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Pathway/Driveway Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the pathway or driveway.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the pathway or driveway and then right-click to place.

In this example the width is 4'-0" and the Style is Straight.

Pathway/Driveway PropertiesPathways and driveways are defined by their width and whether they are curved or straight. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Pathway Width defines the distance from one side of the pathway to the other side.

■ Pathway Style specifies a curved or straight pathway.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the pathway dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

■ Calc. Area button automatically calculate the square footage of the pathway. The area is displayed on the Properties tab.



Adding EdgingArchitect 3D makes it easy to place edging around flower beds or along walkways. Once drawn, you can apply colors or materials to the edging so it blends with your home plan’s color scheme.

Edging is drawn with a default material, which you can change by applying a different material. You can also edit the edging properties on the Properties tab before or after you draw.


■ Edging Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and

Color

To add edging

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Edging Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw edging.

Edging PropertiesEdging is defined by its width, depth, height, spacing, and the style. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.



Edging Properties

■ Edging Width defines the distance from one side of a piece of edging material to the other side of a piece of edging.

■ Edging Depth defines the distance from the front of the edging to the back.

■ Flip Face allows you to flip the front and back edges of the edging.

■ Edging Height defines the distance from the base of the edging to the top.

■ Vary Heights when selected the edging is displayed with ragged, varied heights along the entire segment. When deselected, the edging is the same height along the entire segment.

Vary Heights Disabled Vary Heights Enabled■ Edging Spacing defines the distance between each piece of edging material.

Spacing 0 Spacing 3”"■ Curve options control curvature. For more information, see “Changing Curve

Tension”, which begins on page 238.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the edging dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

■ Styles library includes the available edging and border styles. You can choose the style before or after you place the edging.

Width

Depth

HeightSpacing



Drawing Fences and GatesWith Architect 3D, you can draw fences and gates with ease. Once a fence or gate is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material or paint color.

The following options are available from the Fence toolset:

■ Fence

■ Fence Gate


■ Fence and Gate Properties■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Rotating a Selection■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building

Materials

FenceFences are drawn to follow your topography. When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the fence has been placed by selecting the fence in your drawing and choosing a different style.

The pre-configured fence styles have set measurements that cannot be changed. To add a fence that you can edit, either before or after you draw, choose the Custom fence option on the Properties tab.

This is an example of a Custom fence with an Iron Ornamental material applied

To add a fence

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Fence Tool from the Fence toolset.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the fence.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the fence and then right click to place.


Fence and Gate Properties

Fence GateUsing the Gate Tool you can add a gate along a fence segment. The gate style always conforms to the fencing material, so if a gate is placed on a privacy fence, the gate will be a privacy fence gate. You can set the gate width on the Properties tab before you add it, or by dragging its end points after you’ve added it in your design.

To add a gate to a fence

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Gate Tool from the Fence toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the gate on the fence and release to place.

Fence and Gate PropertiesThe properties that are available for a fence depend on the fence style. Pre-configured fence styles have set dimensions that cannot be edited. The Custom fence style is defined by the span length and height, post width and height, and the gate height. Gates inherit the fence style.


Fence Styles



Custom Style

■ Span Length defines the length of each section in the run of the fence.

■ Span Height defines the distance from the bottom of the fence section to the top.

■ Post Width defines the distance from one side of the post to the other side.

■ Post Height defines the distance from the bottom of the post to the top.

■ Gate Height defines the distance from the bottom of the gate to the top.

Drawing Retaining WallsArchitect 3D makes it easy to add interest and functionality to your outdoor living areas by adding retaining walls. Retaining walls can be used to create raised planting beds, to line an above-ground swimming pool, to separate two varied height areas in a lot, and more.

When the tool is active you can choose the wall style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the wall style after it has been placed in your drawing.


■ Retaining Wall Properties■ 2D Editing Methods■ Elevating Objects■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Changing Segment Length■ Customizing Wall Framing Properties■ Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials

To add a retaining wall

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Retaining Wall Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the retaining wall.

Span Length

Span Height

Post Width

Post Height

Gate Height


Retaining Wall Properties

Retaining Wall PropertiesRetaining walls are defined by their wall style, thickness, height, and in some cases their slope. For more information on editing walls, see “Wall Properties”, on page 119.

Designing a Sprinkler SystemArchitect 3D will be useful to design a sprinkler system for your yard. All of the irrigation tools are available from the Irrigation toolset on the Landscape plan tab.


■Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Rotating a Selection

Sprinkler HeadBy placing a series of sprinkler heads, with various coverages, you will achieve a complete watering pattern. Sprinklers are visible in the 2D view only.

To add a sprinkler head

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Sprinkler Head Tool from the Irrigation toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to define the radius and then drag to specify the coverage area for the sprinkler. Release to place.



Irrigation Water LineWater lines are used to represent the connections in an irrigation system. These are visible in the 2D view only.

To add an irrigation water line

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Water Line Tool from the Irrigation toolset.


Irrigation Zone Irrigation zone markers provide a 2D representation of the various zones in your irrigation system.

To add an irrigation zone

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Zone Tool from the Irrigation toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place each zone in your design.

2

Designing a Sprinkler System

Irrigation Control Panel You can add an irrigation control panel to a wall in your design. Once placed, you can reposition or adjust the elevation of the control panel.

To add an irrigation control panel

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Control Panel Tool from the Irrigation toolset.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the control panel on the side of a wall where you want it and release to place.



Irrigation Backflow ValveBackflow valves can be an integral part of your irrigation system, and in some case, a legal requirement. You can easily add backflow values to your design, and see them in both the 2D and 3D views.

To add an irrigation backflow valve

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Backflow Valve Tool from the Irrigation toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place each valve in your design.

Rain SensorYou can place rain sensors to help increase the efficiency of your irrigation system and conserve water and energy, when possible. Place rain sensors in a location that is unobstructed by overhangs or branches for an accurate measurement.

To add a rain sensor

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Rain Sensor Tool from the Irrigation toolset.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place each sensor in your design.


Drawing Topography Elements

Drawing Topography ElementsYou can draw contours lines to represent the topography of your lot. Contour lines represent a series of connected points that share the same elevation. You begin by choosing a general shape for your contour, setting the elevation, and then choosing the drawing method. When used together, multiple lines set at varying elevations creates dips or berms in your landscape.

The contour tools are available from the Topography toolset on the Landscape plan tab.

When the tool is active you can set the topography line elevation on the Properties tab. You can also change the elevation of the topography line after it has been placed in your drawing.

There are a number of drawing methods for creating topography. The default shape is a polygon, which you can draw as an enclosed or open shape. For details on draw methods, see “Detail Plan Tab”, on page 233. Below is an example of using topography lines to create a berm, where the inner contour lines are set to higher elevations.

Note: Elevations for topography are not cumulative, each is relative to the working elevation of your drawing.


■ Topography Element Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects



To add topography lines

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Topography Line Tool from the Topography toolset.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw the topography.

This example shows a railing drawn using the Closed Curve Polygon shape

Topography Element PropertiesTopography elements are defined by their shape and elevation. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the element has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Elevation defines the elevation at which the contour line is positioned, relative to the ground.


■ Edit Level Select Object to resize the whole object or Points to edit individual points on the shape.

■ Open & Closed options specify if the shape is open-ended or contained. When closed, the elevation applies to the entire contour creating more of a full shape; when open the contour blends with the lower elevation at the opening creating a more shallow shape.

■ Convert to Build Pad button creates a flat area regardless of topography lines that exist.


Adding Slopes

Adding SlopesMany topographical maps show slopes, rather than complex topography shapes. Once you’ve defined the slope, you can move selected topography lines to create plateaus or otherwise customize your topography design.

You can set the start elevation for the slope and the descent angle before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab


■ Slope Lot Properties■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects

To add a slope to the landscape

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Slope Lot Section Tool from the Topography toolset.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the descent angle and length for the slope.

Slope Lot PropertiesSlope lots are defined by their starting and ending elevations. You can also choose to specify a descent angle.


■ Start Elevation defines the elevation where the top of the slope begins. The slope descends from this elevation.

■ Descent Angle defines the angle of the slope.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the slope dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.



Excavating TopographyFrom underground barns to planting cavities, you can excavate with ease.

By default, excavated areas are created at an elevation of -3'-0", meaning 3'-0" into the ground. The elevation is controlled by the component elevation setting in the Elevation bar.

You can further customize excavations using the following edit methods:

■ Elevating Objects■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ Selecting Points and 2D Shapes■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Rotating a Selection■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Changing Curve Tension

To excavate the topography

1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Excavate Topography Tool from the Topography toolset.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw an excavated area.

Start Elevation

End Elevation

Descent Angle


Chapter 16

Detail Plan TabArchitect 3D provides tools specifically for 2D drawing. Items drawn with these tools will not show up in the 3D View window, unless converted to 3D entities. These tools make it easy to label your plan, from description blocks that are used to label what is being printed on each page to notations about square footage on each floor.

The Detail Plan Tab features several tools for drawing basic shapes like rectangles, arcs, and curves. Methods for drawing these shapes are used throughout Architect 3D.

In addition, using the tools on the Detail Plan Tab, you will be able to easily convert imported DXF/DWG shapes to various “intelligent features” like walls, stairways, flooring, property lines, and much more.

Drawing Rectangles and SquaresWith Architect 3D, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window. If you choose, these shapes can be converted to a variety of features, for instance walls, stairways, pathways, edging, and more. Rectangles can also be used as label boxes for your printed plans or can be converted to walls or flooring.

Before you draw, you can choose how you want to draw the shape from the Draw Method drop-down menu on the Properties tab.


■Editing Detail Shapes■Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■Changing Curve Tension■Dimensioning■Converting Details to Intelligent Elements■Filling a Shape with Plants

To draw rectangles and squares

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the shape.



Chapter Detail Plan Tab16

This example shows a rectangle drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape

Drawing Circles and OvalsYou can draw circles and ovals, which can be converted to curved walls, curved stairways, ground fill regions, and other curved shapes.



■Editing Detail Shapes■Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■Changing Curve Tension■Dimensioning■Converting Details to Intelligent Elements■Filling a Shape with Plants

To draw circles and ovals

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Circle/Oval Tool.


This example shows a circle drawn using the Circle From Center shape

Drawing LinesYou can draw lines that can, in turn, be converted to walls, stairs, ducts, stiffener beams, edging, pathways, and more.



■Editing Detail Shapes■Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■Changing Curve Tension■Dimensioning


Drawing Polygons

■ Converting Details to Intelligent Elements■ Filling a Shape with Plants

To draw lines

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Line Tool.


This example shows a line drawn using the Line From Corner shape

Drawing PolygonsYou can draw open or closed polygons that can be easily converted into elements such walls, roof sections, floors or floor cutouts, or topography, just to name a few.



■Editing Detail Shapes■Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■AutoSnap and Alignment Options■Elevating Objects■Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■Changing Curve Tension

■ Dimensioning■ Converting Details to Intelligent Elements■ Filling a Shape with Plants

To draw polygons

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Polygon Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the length and angle of the polylines.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the polygon and then right-click to place.

This example shows a polygon drawn using the Closed Polygon shape

Drawing ArcsWith Architect 3D you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and more.







To draw arcs

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Arc Tool.


This example shows an arc drawn using the Arc Circle shape

Drawing Circular ArcsWith Architect 3D, you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and more.


■ Editing Detail Shapes■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Changing Curve Tension■ Dimensioning■ Converting Details to Intelligent Elements■ Filling a Shape with Plants

To draw circular arcs

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Circular Arc Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to define the radius and then drag to specify the angle. Release to place.


Drawing Multigons

Drawing MultigonsYou can draw equal-sided decks, floors, even treehouses with the easy-to-use Multigon Tool and the Convert To feature. For more information, see “Converting Details to Intelligent Elements”, which begins on page 241.

Before you draw, choose the number of sides you want for the multigon on the Properties tab. Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values.


■ Editing Detail Shapes■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection■ Changing Curve Tension■ Dimensioning■ Converting Details to Intelligent Elements■ Filling a Shape with Plants

To draw multigons

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Multigon Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, type the number of sides for the shape and then press ENTER.

3 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the size for the multigon.

Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its orientation, hold down CTRL while drawing.

Drawing CurvesYou can draw intricate curved flowerbeds and walls, among many other things, using the Curve Tool and the Convert To feature of Architect 3D.







To draw curves

1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Curve Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the length and angle of the polylines.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to place.

This example shows a curve drawn using the Open Curved Polygon shape

Changing Curve TensionTo further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Straighten feature, it is easy to create angular shapes and, with Curve Tension, you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 10. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 10 causes a slightly-exaggerated curve.

Default Curve Tension (8) Curve Tension at 2

To change curve tension

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 In the Curve section, click the Adjust button. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.

2

Using Different Lines and Fills

3 Type the amount of tension that you want and click OK.

To remove curve tension

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 In the Curve section, click the Straighten button. The curve is changed to a polyline.

Using Different Lines and FillsYou can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the shapes drawn with the tools on the Details Plan tab.

Line weightYou can choose a predefined line weight from the Weight button drop-down menu or specify a value up to 20pt. To edit the line weight, you must select the shape first.

Line Weight 1pt Line Weight 6pt

To change the line weight

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to edit.

2 On the Detail tab, click the Weight button and choose one of the sizes from the drop-down menu.

To specify a custom line weight


2 On the Detail tab, click the Weight button and choose Other from the drop-down menu. The Line Weight dialog box is displayed.

3 Type a value in the Points text box or click the arrows to edit incrementally and then click OK.

Line styleYou can choose a predefined line style from the Line Style button drop-down menu. To edit the line style, you must select the shape first.

Solid Style Dotted Style



To change the line style


2 On the Detail tab, click the Line Style button and choose one of the styles from the drop-down menu.

Fill patternYou can change a shape’s fill pattern to be transparent, a solid color, or a patterned fill. To edit a shape’s fill style, you must select the shape first. The fills, from left to right, include:

■ Transparent

■ Filled

■ Solid Filled

■ Patterns

To change the shape fill


2 On the Detail tab, click the fill pattern button you want.

Controlling Layers of Detail ShapesYou can control which layer a shape is on by moving it to the front or moving it back behind other shapes.

To control shape layers

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Bring to Front button or the Send to Back to move the selection’s position.


Converting Details to Intelligent Elements

Converting Details to Intelligent ElementsWith Architect 3D, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window, or you can convert them to intelligent elements. For example, you can convert a line to a fence, a rectangle to four exterior walls, a circle to a deck or even a circular stairway, and so on. There is virtually no limit to what you can draw, using this combination.

To convert a shape

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Convert To button and choose one of the options to convert the selection.

Editing Detail ShapesObject-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. When Object-Level is enabled, the entire object is selected; this is ideal for resize the entire object. When Points-Level is enabled, each control point on the object is selected; this is ideal for precision editing such as reshaping.

To fine-tune your design further, use the Insert Point or Delete Point tools. These tools are available anytime, but are especially useful when editing shapes.

To choose the edit level

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an object. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 Under Edit Level, choose Object or Points.

3 Click-and-drag a point to resize or reshape the selection.

Object Points

To fillet (round) a corner

Use the Fillet Corner Tool to create a round corner on an otherwise angled corner point. This allows you to manually set the curvature of a selected point.



1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to fillet.

2 On the Properties tab, select the Points radio button in the Edit Level section.

3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool.

4 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the element to define the curve you want.

5 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

To inversely fillet a corner

You can use the Fillet Corner Tool to create an inverted round corner on an otherwise angled corner point. This allows you to manually set the curvature of a selected point.



3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool.

4 While pressing SHIFT, click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the element to define the curve you want.

5 Release the mouse to end.

To chamfer a corner

Use the Chamfer Corner Tool to create a straight edge where an angled corner point exists.



3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Chamfer Corner Tool.

4 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the element to define the straight segment.

5 Release the mouse to end.

242 Arch

Filling a Shape with Plants

To add additional points

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Add Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2 Click to add a new point to a shape you have created.

To remove a point

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Remove Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2 Click to remove a point from a shape you have created.

Filling a Shape with PlantsYou can fill a 2D shape with plants, or place a row of plants using a line or curve. In the example below, a curve has been filled with an Iris using the perimeter option.

To fill a shape with plants

1 Draw the shape you want to fill with plants.

2 Choose the plant you want to add in the shape (for information on accessing plants, see “Plants Libraries”, on page 78).

3 Right-click an edge of the shape and choose Plant Fill. The Plant Fill dialog box is displayed.



4 Choose the settings you want and then click OK.


Chapter 17

Framing Plan TabThe tools contained on Architect 3D’s Framing Plan tab allow you to view and edit the structural elements of your design. You can add beams, joists, and other components, plus you have total control over what size lumber is used for what purpose. The Framing tools let you define exactly where and what is to be used for the framing phase of your design.

Adding Structural ComponentsThe Framing tools let you define exactly where and what kind of lumber or other material is to be used for the framing phase of your design.

Framing BeamFraming beams are placed at a default elevation, which is the ceiling height plus the slab or joist thickness. You can edit the beam properties, including size and material, on the Properties tab before or after you add it to your design.

To see framing components in 3D, enable the Framing rendering style. For more information, see “Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles”, which begins on page 275.


■ Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects■ AutoSnap and Alignment Options■ Elevating Objects■ Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection

To add a framing beam

1 On the Framing plan toolbar, click the Framing Beam Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the beam.



Chapter Framing Plan Tab17

Framing Beam PropertiesFraming beams are defined by their width, depth, and material. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Width defines the distance from one side of the beam to the other.

■ Depth defines the distance from the bottom of the beam to the top.

■ Type specifies the beam material type you want.

■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the deck dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

Floor JoistFloor joists are drawn using a polygon shape. You can edit the joist properties, including size and material, on the Properties tab before or after you add it to your design.




Length

Width

Depth


Joist Properties

To add floor joists

1 On the Framing plan toolbar, click the Flooring Joist Tool.


3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw the floor joist section.

This example shows a floor joist drawn using the Closed Polygon shape

Joist PropertiesArchitect 3D automatically frames each floor, wall, and roof section with specifications that you can easily modify. Joists are defined by their angle, spacing, board width, and the material. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


■ Joist Angle defines the degree at which you want the joist boards placed.

■ Joist Spacing defines the distance between each joist (use feet-and-inches or just inches).

■ Joist Size defines the joist board width.

■ Rim-Joist checkbox specifies whether headers should be included (selected) or excluded (deselected)

Rim Joist Included Rim Joist Excluded

■ Type specifies the joist material type you want.




■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the joist dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

Framing Support ColumnSupport columns are placed at the base elevation of the current floor. You can edit the column properties, including size and material, on the Properties tab before or after you add it to your design.




To add a framing beam

1 On the Framing plan toolbar, click the Framing Support Column Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place a column.

Support Column PropertiesAfter adding a support column, you can change its material and size. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.


Joist Angle

Joist Spacing

Joist Size


Customizing Wall Framing Properties

■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of the column to the top.

■ Width/Diameter defines the distance from one side of the column to the other side.

■ Type specifies the column material type you want.

Customizing Wall Framing PropertiesAs you draw walls in Architect 3D you can specify which walls are insulated, which are load bearing, as well as the framing material used. You can specify these details in the Wall Framing dialog box.

To edit a wall’s framing properties, right-click the wall and choose Framing Properties. The Wall Framing dialog box is displayed. After your edit the settings, click OK to close the dialog box.

■ Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for framing

■ Load Bearing checkbox specifies a wall as load-bearing when selected

■ Insulated checkbox specifies a wall as insulted when selected

Customizing Roof Framing PropertiesRoof sections are automatically framed with specifications set in Architect 3D. You can easily modify all of these settings in the Roof Framing dialog box. You can edit the framing properties for roofs created using the roof shape tools and the freehand roof tools; automatic roofs are controlled by the Automatic Roof Properties. For more information on automatic roof properties, see “Auto-Roof Properties”, on page 182.

■ Framing Type specifies if roof framing uses rafters or trusses. Each has its own properties.

■ Frame Rafters■ Rafter Spacing defines the distance between each

roof rafter. ■ Rafter Size defines the width of the roof rafter.

Width/Diameter

Height



■ Frame Trusses■ Truss Spacing defines the distance between each roof truss.

■ Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for framing.

To edit roof framing properties

1 Enable the Roof plan so the roof panels are visible in the design window.

2 Right-click the roof section and choose Framing Properties. The Roof Framing dialog box is displayed.

3 Edit the settings as needed and then click OK.

Customizing Staircase Framing PropertiesAs you draw staircases in Architect 3D you specify the framing material in the Stair Framing dialog box, which is accessible by right-clicking the staircase center line. The following option is available:

■ Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for framing

To edit staircase framing properties

1 Right-click the staircase center line and choose Framing Properties. The Stair Framing dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the settings and click OK.

Customizing Deck Framing PropertiesDecks are automatically framed with specifications set in Architect 3D. You can easily modify all of these settings.

RafterSpacingRafter

Size

TrussSpacing


Customizing Foundation Framing Material

■ Decking Board settings specify if decking boards are included (selected) on the top of the deck framing or excluded (deselected). When selected, you can define the width and angle of the boards.

Decking Boards Enabled

Decking Boards Disabled

■ Joist settings specify if joists and rim-joists are included (selected) in the deck framing or excluded (deselected). When selected, you can define the size, spacing, and angle of the joists.

Deck Joist Enabled Deck Joist Disabled

■ Post Piers settings define the diameter and depth (below ground) of the piers below each deck post.

■ Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for framing.

To edit deck framing properties

1 Enable the Deck plan so the deck is visible in the design window.

2 Right-click the deck and choose Framing Properties. The Deck Framing dialog box is displayed.


Customizing Foundation Framing MaterialStructures are built with a concrete slab foundation by default. You can customize the foundation framing material to use concrete, steel, or wood. The foundation framing can be customized while working on any plan except the Foundation plan.



■ Frame Floor Joist specifies if floor joists are included (selected) in the foundation framing or excluded (deselected). When selected, you can define the spacing and angle of the joists. (Only available with Wood and Steel). You can manually draw floor joists using the Floor Joist Tool (“Floor Joist”, on page 246).

■ Frame Rim Joist checkbox specifies if headers should be included (selected) or excluded (deselected). (Only available with Wood and Steel).

■ Automatically update foundation framing checkbox controls if changes can be made to the foundation framing properties.

■ Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for the foundation framing.

To edit foundation framing properties


2 Click the Slab Framing button. The Auto-Foundation Framing dialog box is displayed.



Part 3

Drawing and Design Settings

Chapter 18: Edit Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Chapter 19: Control Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 20: Control 3D Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Chapter 18

Edit Your DesignIn addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste, and delete, Architect 3D includes more sophisticated modes of editing your design. You can copy or move entities, walls, and other design elements, to different floors, as well as between plan layers.

You can flip or mirror your entire design, either vertically or horizontally, to make it easy to visualize various layouts. In addition, you can move or rotate your entire floor plan at one time.

More advanced concepts are also covered here, such as rotating individual entities to custom fit them into your design and elevating entities, using the Elevation Bar, to achieve perfect placement. Learn to customize settings like nudge factor, so Architect 3D works best for you.

UndoWith Architect 3D, you can specify up to 50 levels of Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the more levels of undo you specify, the more system resources will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo level at the lowest level possible.

To use undo

■ Click Edit menu > Undo, or press CTRL+Z. The previous action is reversed.

To turn off undo

1 Click Edit menu > Undo Preferences. The Preferences window opens to the Undo Preferences settings.

2 Select the Deactivate Undo checkbox, then click OK.

To undo levels

1 Click Edit menu > Undo Preferences. The Preferences window opens to the Undo Preferences settings.

2 Deselect the Deactivate Undo checkbox.

3 Type the number of undo levels you want to use and then click OK.

To use redo

■ Click Edit menu > Redo, or press CTRL+Y. The previous action is reversed.

Cut, Copy, and PasteCut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into your drawing. By default, when you paste a selection multiple times, each time you paste, the element is offset so each is visible. You can also paste a selection without offset, so each time you paste the selection it will stack on top of the previous one. You can place the Clipboard contents as many times as necessary. Clear removes the selection.


Chapter Edit Your Design18

To cut a selection

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the selection you want to cut.

2 Click Edit menu > Cut (or press CTRL+X). The selection is removed to the Clipboard.

To copy a selection to the clipboard

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the selection you want to copy.

2 Click Edit menu > Copy (or press CTRL+C). The selection is copied to the Clipboard.

To paste a selection from the clipboard


2 Click Edit menu > Paste (or press CTRL+V). The selection is copied from the Clipboard to the design window.

To delete a selection

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the selection you want to delete.

2 Press DELETE on the keyboard.

Nudging a SelectionYou can also precisely move features into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected features a specified distance, which is based on the Snap Grid settings. To learn more about the Snap Grid and to adjust nudge settings, see “Using the Grid”, on page 52.

Note: To nudge using the Snap Grid settings, Snap to Grid must be enabled. On the 2D Menu, confirm there is a checkmark next to Snap to Grid. This means that the Snap Grid is activated. When the “Snap to Grid” is turned off, Nudge moves the entity or feature one pixel at a time, instead of snapping to the grid distance.

To move a selection using the Nudge feature

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool then click to select the entity you want to nudge.

2 Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the entity.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Nudge then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

Moving a SelectionOnce you’ve placed features, you can move them by dragging or by specifying exact Cartesian or polar coordinates that correspond to the reference grid. For more information on the reference grid, see “Using the Grid”, on page 52.

Note: To select more than one entity, hold down SHIFT while clicking.

To move entities by dragging

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool then click to select the entity.

2 Holding down the mouse button, drag the entity to a new location, then release the mouse button.

To move entities by specifying coordinates

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool then click to select entity.

2 Click Edit > Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

256 Arc
hitect 3D User’s Guide

Rotating a Selection

3 Select either Cartesian or Polar, then type new X and Y-Axis coordinates in the appropriate text boxes.

4 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based on the coordinates you specified.

Rotating a SelectionUsing the rotate feature, you can easily spin an entity around any point. This is useful when you want to face an entity in a different direction from which it was drawn. Using the Rotate Tool, you can freely rotate the selection, or you can specify the exact amount of rotation, using the Rotate dialog box. Selections are rotated around their center point.

To freely rotate an entity

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool and click to select the point or double-click to select the element you want to rotate.

2 Click-and-drag the entity in the direction that you want to rotate. The degree of rotation is displayed in the Status Bar as you drag.

3 Release the mouse button to place.

To rotate by specifying an amount

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the feature you want to rotate.

2 Click Edit menu > Rotate, or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

3 Select either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want the selected rotated.

4 Click OK. The entity is rotated.

To rotate an element in 1-degree increments

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the feature you want to rotate.

2 Press and hold SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.

Flip and MirrorThe Flip function takes the original feature and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that Mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical entities, facing one another.

To flip a feature horizontally

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to flip.

2 Click Edit menu > Flip Horizontal.

To flip a feature vertically

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to flip.

2 Click Edit menu > Flip Vertical.

To mirror a feature horizontally

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to mirror.

2 Click Edit menu > Mirror Horizontal.

3 Move the feature into position.



To mirror a feature vertically

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to mirror.

2 Click Edit menu > Mirror Vertical.

3 Move the feature into position.

Aligning ObjectsThere are a number of options for aligning entities in your drawing. The Align Objects option allows you to align multiple selections with an edge or center of one of the objects.

Align to Grid makes it easy to align a feature or group to a point on the Snap Grid. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.

To align objects to another object

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object (or objects) you want to be aligned.

2 Press and hold SHIFT and then click the object with which you want the object aligned.

3 Click Edit menu > Align Objects and then click how you want the objects aligned. The objects are aligned with the last object selected, based on the position you chose.

Elevating ObjectsThere are a number of ways to elevate objects in your drawing, from adjusting individual objects, to groups of objects, to an entire floor’s contents at once. When an entity is elevated to a nearby surface, it must be positioned on the object to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a potted plant to a deck surface, drag the plant so it is positioned within the boundaries of the deck.

With the Elevation Bar, you can move selected items vertically by simply entering the elevation you want. This “on-the-fly” feature makes it a snap to make sure windows, doors, plants, and other elements, are in exactly the position you want. Additionally, the Elevation Bar automatically detects the elevation of nearby objects in the drawing. This allows you to precisely place a planter on top of a deck, for example.

The Set Elevation dialog box is available from the Edit menu when an object is selected. Additionally, the elevations of nearby objects in the drawing are automatically detected. This allows you to precisely place a planter on top of a deck, for example.


Elevating Objects

Note: To specify an amount in inches you may use either 18 or 18". To specify an amount in feet and inches they must be separated by a hyphen, for instance 18'-0", 8'-6", and so on. A single number like 20 will be understood as 20 inches.

To elevate an entity using the Elevation Bar

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the entity you want to elevate (hold down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple entities). The Object Elevation field becomes active in the Elevation Bar.

Note: If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography, deselect the checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely.

2 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches, or just inches, then press ENTER. The selection is elevated based on the values you entered.

OR

Click the Object Elevation drop-down menu and select the surface to which you want the entity elevated. The object is elevated to the selected surface.

To elevate an entity using the Set Elevation dialog box

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the entity you want to elevate (hold down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple entities).

2 Click Edit menu > Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the elevation you want in the corresponding field or select one of the available detected elevations and click OK.

Note: If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography, deselect the checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely.

To make features follow custom topography

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the feature(s) you want to follow the custom topography.

2 In the Elevation Bar, select the Float Above Topography checkbox.

Float Above Topography Disabled Float Above Topography Enabled



To adjust entire floor elevation

1 Navigate to the floor you want to edit. For more information, see “Work on Floor”, which begins on page 266.

2 Click Edit menu > Adjust Entire Floor Elevation. The Adjust Floor Elevation dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the change in elevation you want applied to the current floor in the Elevation Change text box and then click OK (to increase the elevation type a positive number, to decrease the elevation type a negative number).

For example, if your floor is currently 8'-0" and you want to elevate the entire floor and its contents to 10'-0", type “2-0” to increase the floor two feet.

Copy To FloorThere may be times when you want multiple floors to contain duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the entity in its original position and places a duplicate where you define. Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position.

Note: To select more than one entity, press and hold SHIFT, while clicking.

To copy from one floor to another

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the entities you want duplicated.

2 Click Edit menu > Copy to Floor, then select the floor to which you want the selection(s) copied.

To move entities from one floor to another

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the entities you want to move.

2 Click Edit menu > Move to Floor, then select the floor to which you want the selection(s) moved.


Move To Plan

Move To PlanWith Architect 3D, you can move selections to different plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position. This will be useful if you want to move a feature between two stories that you have drawn.

To move features from one plan to another

1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the feature you want moved. To select more than one entity, press SHIFT, while clicking entities.

2 Click Edit menu > Move to Plan, then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear.

(alternatively) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the context menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to selected plan.

Note: Items on a hidden layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be moved along with the other items and features in your drawing.

Move Entire PlanAt any point during the design process, you can move the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look on different parts of your lot.

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches, or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

To move the entire floor plan

1 Click Edit menu > Move Entire Plan. The Move Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.

2 Select either Cartesian or Polar, then type the amount you want the plan moved in the corresponding text boxes.

3 Click OK. The plan is moved based on the coordinates you specified.

Rotate Entire PlanAt any point during the design process, you can rotate the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look facing a different direction on your lot.

To rotate the entire floor plan

1 Click Edit menu > Rotate Entire Plan. The Rotate Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.



2 Select either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box.

3 Click OK. The plan is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.

Flip Entire PlanThe Flip Plan function takes the existing plan orientation and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically.

To flip your drawing plan

■ Click Edit menu > Flip Entire Plan and choose Horizontal or Vertical.


Chapter 19

Control Your DesignArchitect 3D makes it easy to control your working environment. From setting the plan scale and units of measure to defining your ceiling heights on any floor of your design, all these tools are available on the Design Menu.

Architect 3D even lets you import a scanned image into the background of your design. Once scanned and loaded into your design file, you can trace it to create a Architect 3D floor plan. You can even set the scale of the new drawing to the scale of the image. When you are done tracing, you can save the new file without the background bitmap image.

Find or sketch your favorite floor plan design. Using a scanner, digital camera or with the help of a scanning service, scan the plan and save it in one of the most popular formats.

The designer or owner of most home plans holds the copyright to them. Make sure you have permission before you copy a plan.

Setting the Working ElevationBefore you draw, be sure to set your working elevation. All entities are drawn in relation to this elevation. There are two methods for setting the working elevation: the Elevation Bar and the Design menu.

■ While nothing is selected in the design window, type the working elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, in the Elevation Bar then press ENTER. Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the design based on the new working elevation.

■ Click Design menu > Set Working Elevation and type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, in the corresponding field, and then click OK.

Tip: You can also right-click the design window and choose Set Working Elevation, then type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, in the corresponding field and click OK.

Setting the ScaleScale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You can customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as well as print your drawing to scale.

To set the drawing scale

1 Click Design menu > Plan Scale. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Plan Scale settings.

2 Select a new scale setting, then click OK. The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.


Architect 3D
User’s Guide 263

Chapter Control Your Design19

Setting the Units of MeasurementYou can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened.

To access unit measurement settings, click Design menu > Unit of Measure. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Unit of Measure settings.

There are two types of measurement settings available. Be sure to edit the settings based on the plan you want them to apply to:

■ Current Plan Settings these settings apply to the plan you’re currently working on.

■ New Plan Defaults these settings are the defaults that apply when you open a new plan (there is an option to open existing plans using these settings as well).

To use English measurements

1 Click Design menu > Unit of Measure. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Unit of Measure settings.

2 Click the Measurement Units drop-down menu and choose English Units. Edit the Angle Format, Precision, and Readout Format settings as needed and then click OK.

■ Angle Format defines the number of decimal points you want to use.

■ Precision defines the number of decimal points you want to use.

■ Readout Format defines the format you want.


Defining Lot Properties

To use Metric measurements


2 Click the Measurement Units drop-down menu and choose Metric Units. Edit the Angle Format and Readout Format settings as needed and then click OK.

■ Angle Format specifies the number of decimal points you want to use.

■ Readout Format specifies the format you want.

To set defaults for saved drawings


2 In the New Plan Defaults section, edit the settings you want existing drawings to use.

3 Select the Open existing drawings using new plan defaults checkbox and then click OK. The New Plan Default settings are applied to any previously-drawn design when it is opened.

Defining Lot PropertiesThe Lot Properties dialog box allows you to control not only the size of your lot, but how it is rendered in 3D.

To access lot properties, click Design menu > Lot Properties. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Lot Properties settings. After editing the settings, click OK.

■ Lot Size settings define the Width and Depth, in feet or meters. Type values in the corresponding text boxes to define the size of the lot.

Use the drop-down menu to covert the values to either feet or meters. You can also choose the measurement you want before entering the lot size values.



If you’re editing a design that includes topography lines and you want them to resize based on your lot size, select the Scale existing topography lines on resize checkbox. If you want the topography lines to remain the same size, deselect the checkbox.

■ Topography Generation defines the topography generation settings. Type the size of the Patch Resolution you want. A lower value results in a more accurate 3D rendering of your topography, but may also impact performance.

Drag the Generation Quality slider to increase or decrease the topography generation quality. Higher generation quality reduces rendering speed.

Update Topography GridArchitect 3D keeps track of the changes you make to the topography in your design. If you want to update the topography grid, you can do this with one click.

To update topography grid, click Design Menu > Update Topography Grid. Your topography changes are applied.

Work on FloorUse the Working Floor button to switch back and forth between the floors in your home plan. To work on a particular floor, click the Working Floor button in the top-left corner of the design window, then choose the floor you want to work on from the drop-down menu that is displayed. The active working floor has a checkmark next to it.

Tip: You can also click Design menu > Work on Floor then click the floor you want to work on.

For information on adding or editing floors, see “Working with Floors”, on page 38.

Calculate Floor AreaArchitect 3D’s automatically calculates the square footage for each room of your design as you add them. The program also updates the square footage, as you change the walls in your design. You can calculate the square footage for each floor at any time. This feature makes it easy to figure how much carpet you’ll need to cover the first floor, for instance, or simply estimate your overall home size.

To calculate floor square footage, click Design menu > Active Floor Area. The total square footage for the current floor is calculated and displayed in the Status Bar.

Note: The square footage calculation is based on walls' interior area (surface to surface).

Floor Plan Image TraceAfter you have scanned the plan you want to trace and saved it, you are ready to import it into Architect 3D. You can import a floor plan image onto the main floor, and then onto the second or third floor also. To be sure all floors line up correctly, scan all plans at the same size and match the scale identically.

Note: You can import a plan to trace in any of the following file formats; BMP, JPG, PNG, TIF, or PTX.


Floor Plan Image Trace

Import a Floor Plan ImageFloor plan images are imported through the Floor Plan Trace Properties option in the Design Options window. If you know the size of image you want, you can specify the percentage or dimension values. Otherwise you may need to adjust the image based on scale after you’ve imported.

Once you’ve imported the plan image, you can trace the image using the wall tools, add electrical and plumbing components, landscaping, and much more.

■ To trace walls, see “Drawing Walls”, which begins on page 115.

■ To add electrical features, see “Electrical Plan Tab”, which begins on page 149.

■ To place landscape plants, see “To add plants”, which begins on page 79

To import a floor plan image

1 Click Design menu > Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Floor Plan Trace Properties.

2 Click the Set Image button and locate the file you want to import.

3 Select the file and click Open. A preview of the floor plan loads in the Design Options window.

(optional) Edit the Sizing settings using either Percentage or Dimensions.

4 Click OK to load the image in the design window.

Match the Drawing ScaleIf the imported floor plan is not the correct size, you can scale it in Architect 3D. This process involves creating a measurement in Punch! based on a known segment, wall length, or distance in your plan drawing, and then resizing the plan to match the measurement. To do this, you need to know at least one segment length or distance you can base your measurement on. Be sure to use the same scale when preparing to trace an upper floor.

Note: If you need the imported image to be larger, the percent you enter will be greater than 100%. Conversely, if you need the image to be smaller, the percent will be less than 100%.

For information on how to use the Virtual Ruler, see “The Virtual Ruler”, on page 66.

For more information on how to use the Dimension Tools, see “Dimensioning”, on page 59.

To match the drawing scale

1 Import a plan image. For more information, see “Import a Floor Plan Image”, which begins on page 267.

2 Identify a wall section or segment in the plan that has a known length. This is the reference point for your measurement.

3 Use the Virtual Ruler or one of the Dimension Tools to measure the distance of the wall section or segment in the plan.



4 Position the Virtual Ruler or Dimension Tool parallel to the segment and extend it to match the known length on the image.

Note: It is best to measure along a longer wall to minimize the margin of error when scaling.

5 Click Design menu > Floor Plan Trace Properties and click either the Percentage or Dimensions, depending on which method you want to use to resize the image.

6 Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to equal amounts, to change the scale of the entire drawing in proportion and click OK.

Continue to adjust the percentage or dimension values until you have matched the scale.

Show/Hide an Imported Floor Plan There may be times when it is easier to work on your floor plan if the tracing image is not visible. It is easy to toggle the Floor Plan Trace image on and off.

To control the floor plan trace image visibility

■ Click Design menu > Show Floor Plan Trace Image. The image is visible when there is a checkmark next to this menu listing.

OR

■ Click Design menu > Floor Plan Trace Properties and select or deselect the Image Visible checkbox, then click OK.

Design OptionsThe Design Options window provides access to the majority of settings you’ll need outside of the actual drawing tools. You can control options like unit of measure, dimension and text fonts, lighting, and many more design options.


Design Options

To access the design options

■ Click Design menu > Design Options.




Chapter 20

Control 3D OptionsArchitect 3D lets you view your design in a fully-rendered 3D view. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D View window, you can view your design from a variety of angles.

Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush!

With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on.

Architect 3D integrates the exclusive, patented RealModel® technology, making it easy to construct an actual scale model of any home you draw. Once you have completed your home design, details are automatically transferred to RealModel. Instructions on building your home model are printed, with numbered sections and floor plan templates that make assembling it simple. This hands-on model shows you how to improve your design and save on construction costs, before you break ground. This is the perfect tool for presenting your ideas to your builder or architect.

Moving Around in 3DArchitect 3D provides interactive 3D viewing options, including the 3D Walk-Through and Fly-Around views, as well as an over-head aerial view and a room view, to focus on selected rooms in the design. Using interactive viewing, you can vary the viewing level by adjusting the altitude and height. Viewing speed and camera angle can also be adjusted to provide the best viewing capabilities available.

To navigate using walk-through

Using the Walk-Through Tool, you can navigate your design as if you were walking through it. You can navigate the exterior, walk through rooms, and even adjust the viewing elevation to change floors.

1 Open a 3D View window and click the Walk-Through button.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Walk-Through to enable walk-through mode.

2 Position the cursor in the 3D view then click-and-drag in the direction you want to move.

You can adjust the walk-through view in the 2D design window using the Viewpoint icon. The Viewpoint icon represents the position from which you’re viewing the 3D view. Drag the Viewpoint center point to a new location in the design window to update the 3D view, and drag the arrow around the center point to rotate the view. You may need to zoom out in the 2D view to find the Viewpoint icon initially.

To adjust your walk-through elevation

The default walk-through elevation is 5-0. You can adjust the walk-through elevation in two ways:

■ Press the right mouse button down and drag up in the 3D view to raise the viewing elevation; drag down to lower the elevation.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Walk-Through Elevation and type a new elevation measurement, in inches, then click OK.



Chapter Control 3D Options20

To view your design using Fly-Around

Using the Fly-Around Tool, you can navigate your design as if you were flying around it. You can navigate the exterior, walk through rooms, and even adjust the viewing elevation to change floors.

1 Open a 3D View window and click the Fly-Around button.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Fly-Around.

2 Position the cursor in the 3D View window then click-and-drag in the direction you want to move.

To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse

■ Press the right mouse button down to change the viewpoint.

To specify a center of reference in Fly-Around mode

■ Open a 3D View window and, on the design window, click the center of reference icon and drag it to a new position.

Note: The placement of the icon will be the point that the helicopter revolves around.

To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude

1 Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Fly-Around Altitude. The Fly-Around Altitude dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a new elevation measurement, then click OK.

3 Open a 3D View window and navigate, as explained previously.

To see an aerial or bird’s eye view of your design

1 Open a 3D View window and click the Aerial View button

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Aerial View.

2 Position the cursor in the 3D View window then click-and-drag to pan, or press your arrow keys to nudge the aerial view.

To rotate your aerial view, press the right mouse button down and drag your mouse.

To change your aerial view elevation

■ Press and hold your right mouse button to toggle your aerial view elevation.

To see a room view of your design

1 Open a 3D View window so you can see the 2D and 3D views.

2 Click to select the room(s) you want to view. You can use the Selection Tool in the 2D or 3D view.

272 Arch

Moving Around in 3D

Note: You can press SHIFT while clicking to select multiple rooms in 2D.

3 Click the Room View button on the 3D View window. The 2D and 3D views are updated to focus on the selected room(s).

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Room View. The 2D and 3D views are updated to focus on the selected room(s).



4 To navigate, press your left mouse button and drag to pan or press your arrow keys to nudge the aerial view.

With the right mouse button down, drag your cursor to rotate your aerial view.

To adjust the 3D camera angle

1 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Navigation & Render Quality settings.

274 Arch

Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles

2 Under the Navigation section, drag the Camera Angle slider to make the view thinner or wider and then click OK.

To increase or decrease the Fly-Around and Walk-Through speed

1 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Navigation & Render Quality settings.

2 Under the Navigation section, adjust the Speed slider and then click OK.

Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.

Accessing the 3D Rendering StylesWith Architect 3D’s five 3D rendering options you can view your design in a variety of ways.

Framing Rendering style displays your design to show the studs, rafters, and other framing components.

To make framing changes, see “Framing Plan Tab”, which begins on page 245.

Colored Wireframe displays your design on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan is rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls are displayed in the color you have defined for the Floor Plan tab.

Textured Wireframe also displays your design on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan is rendered in the color of the material you have applied to it.



ClearView may reveal potential conflicts hidden by walls, for example, between utilities.

To control the opacity of a ClearView rendering, click Design menu > Options and under 3D Preferences, click General. The settings are displayed in the right pane. Drag the Clearview Opacity slider to adjust its appearance.

Shaded Textured Rendering must be enabled for these styles to be available.

276 Arch

Adjusting Rendering Quality

To view a 3D rendering style

1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > 3D Rendering and then open a 3D View window.

2 In 3D View window, click the Render Style button, then choose the rendering style you want.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Style and choose the style you want.

Adjusting Rendering QualityArchitect 3D technology includes anti-aliased, photo-realism. With this technology, you can view your plan with incredible detail, whether you are in ClearView, viewing materials, viewing framing, or using another render style.

To render a 3D preview

■ Open a 3D View window and click the Render Preview button in the 3D View window.

To render a plan in 3D final quality

■ Open a 3D View window and click 3D Menu > 3D Rendering > Render Final Quality.

To set 3D render quality

■ Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Final Quality Options and choose one of the options.

Note: You can stop the rendering process at any time by pressing ESC.



■ Low results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output.■ High results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output.■ Ultra High results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output.■ Excellent results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.

Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering StylesThere are six Photo-realistic rendering styles available. To access the Photo-Realistic rendering styles, be sure Photo-Realistic Rendering mode is activated.

Shaded Textured the shaded style renders the drawing according to the materials that are currently applied.

Hatch the hatch style produces an effect similar to a shaded pencil drawing. The image is made up of a series of pencil “strokes” all in a similar orientation. All of the strokes are to provide shading- no lines are drawn.

Mosaic the mosaic style has the effect of rendering as though the design were constructed as a mosaic of small colored tiles.



Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering Styles

Oil Painting the oil painting style creates an effect reminiscent of some impressionist painters, with individual blobs of paint of a single color applied across the canvas (which could be brush or palette-knife strokes). The overall image only resolves itself if you view from far enough away.

Contour creates the effect where strokes and swirls of color reflect and represent the orientation of the underlying geometry. The effect may also resemble using colored pencils to shade the image (with the direction of the pencil strokes matching the underlying geometry at all times).

Stipple the stipple style renders as a series of irregular dots, or stipples. The effect is similar to how photographs are reproduced in newsprint, only more pronounced.



To view a 3D photo-realistic rendering style

1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > Photo-Realistic Rendering and then open a 3D View window.

2 In 3D View window, click the Render Style button, then choose the rendering style you want.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Rendering Style and choose the style you want.

Adjusting Photo-Realistic Rendering QualityThe photo-realistic styles that are available can be applied using one of the two render options: preview or final. Rendering in photo-realistic quality also applies any effects you may have selected for your design.

To render a Photo-Realistic preview

■ Open a 3D View window and click the Render Preview button. This option renders a lower-quality, faster preview of the design.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Render Preview.

To render in Photo-Realistic final quality

■ Open a 3D View window and then click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Render Final.


Setting Rendering Options

Setting Rendering OptionsWith Architect 3D you can customize the render quality of many of the customized features you use. By setting these features to a lower render quality, you can speed up the rendering time.

To set the render options

1 Open a 3D View window and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button on the 3D View window. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Navigation & Render Quality settings

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Render Options.

2 Drag the sliders to set the rendering quality for each feature you want to change and then click OK.

Note: The lower the render quality is set, the faster 3D View will render your design.



Setting Photo-Realistic Rendering EffectsWith Architect 3D you can apply outdoor effects to simulate fog and snow. These options are available from the Design Option window and are visible after rendering your 3D photo-realistic view.

To add a fog effect to the exterior view

1 Open a 3D View window and click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Under 3D Preferences, click Photo Rendering Effects. The options are displayed in the right pane.

3 Click the Effect drop-down menu and choose Fog or Ground Fog. The fog effect options are displayed.

■ Fog Density slider adjusts how sparse or dense the fog is displayed.

■ Fog Color preview opens the Color window and allows you to select a color for the fog.

■ Fog Distance controls how far the fog extends.

■ Fog Height control how high from the ground the fog extends (only applies to Ground Fog).

■ Select or deselect Use transparent shadows to enable or disable this option.

■ Select to deselect Use enhanced anti-aliasing to enable or disable this option.

4 Click OK. To see the effect, render the drawing.

To add a snow effect to the exterior view

1 Open a 3D View window and click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed.


3 Click the Effect drop-down menu and choose Snow. The snow effect options are displayed.

282 Architect
3D User’s Guide

Depth of Field Focus

■ Flake Density slider to adjust how sparse or dense the snow flakes are displayed.

■ Flake Color preview opens the Color window and allows you to select a color for the flakes.

■ Flake Near Scale determines the size of the closer flakes in the view.

■ Flake Far Scale to determines the size of the further flakes in the view.

■ Select or deselect Use transparent shadows to enable or disable this option.

■ Select or deselect Use enhanced anti-aliasing to enable or disable this option.

4 Click OK. To see the effect, render the drawing.

Depth of Field FocusWhen Photo-Realistic rendering is enabled, you can adjust the depth of field focus settings to control the focus distance and how the non-focal space is displayed in your 3D view. The depth of field settings include a focus distance, viewing angle width, and the amount of blur.

The Focus Distance is the distance from the viewpoint to the point of focus in your drawing. You can measure this distance using the Virtual Ruler (“The Virtual Ruler”, on page 66) or one of the Dimensioning tools (“Dimensioning”, on page 59).

The Angle of View setting determines how narrow or wide the blur factor appears at the specified focus distance. The wider the setting, the more blur affects the scene.

The Blur Factor setting controls how blurry the areas outside the focus distance appear.

In this example, Depth of Field is disabled. You can clearly see the foreground objects and the house in the background.



Depth of Field enabled with medium Blur Factor Depth of Field enabled with high Blur Factor

The focus is on the table in the foreground, which is very clear while the background is blurred.

To enable depth of field

1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > Photo-Realistic Rendering and open a 3D View window.

2 Click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed.


4 Under the Camera Effects section, select the Enable depth of field focus and blur checkbox. The depth of field settings become enabled.

■ Angle of View slider controls how narrow or wide the amount of space the blur occupies.

■ Blur Factor slider controls the amount of blur outside of the specified focus distance area.

■ Focus Distance text box defines the distance from the current viewpoint to the desired focus point.

■ Ignore Background checkbox controls whether the background image is rendered with the design. To include the background when rendering with depth of field enabled, deselect the Ignore Background checkbox; to exclude, select the checkbox.

5 Click OK.

Rendering 3D EffectsThe 3D Effects tab contains reflection and displacement effects, which can be applied to objects and surfaces in 3D.


Rendering 3D Effects

You can see the effects using 3D Rendering when they are applied to surfaces such as floors, decks, and stairs, also flat surfaces on 3D objects. 3D Effects can also be rendered using the Photo-Realistic Rendering option.

To render 3D effects

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose 3D Effects from the Libraries drop-down menu. The 3D Effects categories become available.

2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose Displacement or Reflectivity. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.

3 Scroll through the options and drag and drop the effect you want onto the surface, in 3D.

4 Render the image to see the effect.

To remove a 3D effect

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose 3D Effects from the Libraries drop-down menu. The 3D Effects categories become available.

2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose Displacement or Reflectivity. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.

3 Drag and drop the first option onto the surface in 3D.




Adding Lighting and ShadowsWith Architect 3D, you can customize the lighting and shadows. You can virtually see how that big oak tree casts shadows into your living room window.

To adjust lighting settings

1 Open a 3D View window and click the 3D Lighting button on the toolbar. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Lighting settings

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > Lighting.

2 Edit the settings as needed and then click OK.

■ Sunlight On checkbox enables all of the sunlight settings in the 3D when selected; the sunlight settings are ignored when deselected.

■ Direction slider controls the direction from which the sun shines. Drag the slide to position the sun around the plan.

■ Angle slider controls the sun’s angle in the sky. Drag the slider to adjust the angle from which the sun shines.

■ Brightness slider increases or decreases the sun’s brightness. Drag to adjust the brightness as needed.

■ Sun Shadow settings are disabled when Optimal Quality is selected. To edit the settings, deselect the Optimal Quality checkbox and drag the slider to change the sun’s shadow quality. (A lower shadow quality speeds up rendering times, while a higher quality slows down rendering times.)

■ Adjust Background Brightness checkbox controls if the background image is affected by the Sunlight or Ambient Light settings. When selected, lighting settings affect the background as well; when deselected the background is not updated when lighting settings are changed.

■ Ambient Light is controlled by the Intensity and Brightness settings. Drag the sliders to increase or decrease the settings.

To adjust lighting to daytime

1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously.

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > Adjust Lighting to DayTime. All of the light fixtures are turned off, and your design is displayed as if it is daytime.

To adjust lighting to nighttime



Photo-Realistic Scene Lighting

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > Adjust Lighting to NightTime. All of the light fixtures are turned on, and your design is displayed as if it is nighttime.

To turn all light fixtures on


2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > All Light Fixtures ON. All of the light fixtures in your design turn on.

To turn all light fixtures off


2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > All Light Fixtures OFF. All of the light fixtures in your design turn off.

To render shadows to a 3D view


2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Preview 3D Shadows.

Note: Shadows are also rendered when the Render Final Quality selection is clicked.

Photo-Realistic Scene LightingThe Photo-Realistic Rendering mode offers various scene lighting options for controlling the amount of light in a rendered 3D view. When fully enabled, the extra scene lighting offers a bright, well-lit rendering. You can adjust the extra scene lighting by choosing its sources, or disable it altogether, which limits the light in a space to only the surface(s) in its direct path.

Additionally, sunlight is rendered using a white color by default. In Photo-Realistic Rendering mode, you can change the color of sunlight.

To use extra scene lighting

1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > Photo-Realistic Rendering.

2 Open a 3D View and click the Lighting button in the toolbar. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Lighting settings.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Lighting > Lighting.

3 Under Photo Scene Lighting, select the Use extra scene lighting checkbox.

■ Source drop-down menu defines the source(s) of the extra scene lighting.■ Ambient provides extra intensity in the scene

produced by light fixtures.■ Eye provides extra lighting that is generated from

the viewing position and sent towards the scene.■ Both includes Ambient and Eye.

■ Intensity slider controls how dim or bright the lighting effect is displayed.

■ Sunlight Color preview opens the Color window and allows you to select a color for the sunlight.

4 Click OK.

To see the photo-realistic settings, render the 3D view using one of the Photo-Realistic Render options.

For more information, see “Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering Styles”, which begins on page 278.



Drawing Animation PathsAnimations allow you to define a path in 2D along which you can walk-through your design in 3D. After you place your animation path, or paths, you will be able to view your design in an automated walk-through fashion, like a movie.

You can customize the animation path by adjusting the 3D view for each segment in the path, and also define different 3D render styles for each segment if you’d like to. This way, the animated walk-through shows exactly what you want to see.

Once placed, you should set the 3D view and render style for each segment so the animation shows exactly what you want to see.

■ For more information, see “To change a segment’s viewing position”, which begins on page 288.

■ For more information, see “To change a segment’s 3D render style”, which begins on page 289.

To draw animation paths

1 On the Edit toolbar, click the Animation Path Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the length and angle of the path.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the path and then right-click to place.

To remove points from an Animation Path

1 From the Edit toolset, click the Delete Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2 Move your cursor along the animation to find the point you want to remove and click to remove the point.

3 Continue deleting points until you are finished, then right-click to end.

To change a segment’s viewing position

1 Open a 3D view window.

2 Right-click the segment you want to update and choose Update 3D From Animation Segment from the context menu. The 3D view updates to position itself at that segment.

3 Adjust the 3D view so it is positioned in the direction you want to face while viewing the animation. You can use the Viewpoint icon in the 2D design window or the Walk-Through Tool in the 3D View window. The animation path is updated based on the view(s) you’ve set.

(optional) To preview a segment on the path, select the segment and click 3D menu > Animations > Preview Selected.


Previewing and Exporting Animations Paths

To change a segment’s 3D render style


2 Right-click the segment you want to update and choose Update 3D From Animation Segment from the context menu. The 3D view updates to position itself at that segment.

3 Choose the render style you want for the selected segment. The animation path is updated based on the render style(s) you’ve set.

For more information, see “Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles”, which begins on page 275.

Repeat this process for each segment that you to use a specific render style.

Previewing and Exporting Animations PathsYou can preview your animation path (or paths) to help adjust your 3D views and to see the animation before you export a video file. There are three ways to preview your animation paths:

■ Individual segment on an animation path

■ One full animation path

■ All animation paths in the drawing

To preview the entire animation


2 Click 3D menu > Animations > Preview All. A preview of all of the animation segments is displayed in the 3D view window.

Note: To stop the preview, press the ESC key.

To preview animation paths Segments


2 Click to select the segment(s) you want to view.

To view just one individual segment, click to select the end point at the start of the segment.

Note: Hold down SHIFT and click several animation segments to select them.

3 Click 3D menu > Animations > Preview Selected. A preview of the selected animation segment(s) is displayed in the 3D view window.

Note: To stop the preview, press ESC.

To reverse an animation path

■ On the design window, right-click the segment a you want to reverse and choose Reverse Animation Path. The animation path is reversed.

To export animation

1 Click File menu > Export > Animation. The Animation Export Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the export settings you want.



■ Video Size slider defines the size of the exported video. As you drag the slider, a preview is displayed.

■ Video Quality slider allows you to define a Quick, High Quality, or Ultra-High video.

■ Render Shadows On Export checkbox enables shadows in the exported video when selected; shadows are excluded when deselected.

■ Play After Export checkbox opens the exported video after the file is saved.

■ Fade Color allows you to define the color of the fade effect.

3 Click OK. The Export Animation Video dialog box is displayed.

4 Browse to the folder where you want the video to be exported and type a new file name. Architect 3D automatically adds the extension.

5 Click Save. The video file is exported to the location you’ve specified.

To play the animated path, navigate to the file location and open the file. The AVI file opens in your default media player.

Animation Path PropertiesAnimation path properties are available to control the display of the path in the design window as well as the playback behavior. You can edit the animation path properties before or after you draw.


■ Segment Length defines the playback length for each segment in the path.


■ Display checkboxes control the options that are displayed in the 2D design window. Selected options are displayed; deselected options are hidden. By default, paths display their elevation, segment time, view angle, and path name.

■ Fade checkboxes allow you to specify a fade effect at the beginning, end, or both for your path(s). This is especially helpful when you’ve defined more than one animation path in your drawing because the transitions between the paths appear smoother.

Note: You can customize the fade color during export.

■ Preview Speed slider increases or decreases the preview playback speed.

Naming and Prioritizing Animation PathsIt’s easy to set the exact order of multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names to each path will make it easier to set their order in the final video.

To name an animation path

1 On the design window, right-click the segment you want to rename and choose Animation Path Name. The Animation Path Name dialog box is displayed.


Using the Decorator Palette

2 Type the name for the path and click OK.

To set the order of animation paths

1 Click 3D menu > Animations > Change Path Order. The Animation Paths dialog box is displayed.

2 Click to select a path name in the Active section.

3 Click the Order arrows to change the order of the animation paths.

(optional) Click the arrows between the Active and Inactive menus to suppress export of specified animation paths.

4 Click OK. The animation paths are reordered.

Using the Decorator PalettePunch! Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other segment of your design.

You simply load the Decorator Palette with the colors and materials you want to apply to your 3D view, then save the palette for use in later sessions. Decorator Palettes can even be exported and imported for use in different drawings.

To build a palette

1 Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > Decorator Palette Visible. The default palette is displayed.

Architect 3D User
’s Guide 291


2 Drag-and-drop a color or material onto a blank palette tile.

Applying colors and materials from palette

■ Drag-and-drag the color or material you want from the palette tile to an area of your design. Your selection is displayed in 3D View.

To clear a palette entry

1 Right-click the entry you want to delete and choose Clear Palette Entry.

2 Click Yes at the prompt to remove the entry.

Identifying Colors and Materials from the Decorator PaletteWhen you’re working with a lot of different colors and materials, it can become difficult to remember the library where each appears. You can find a color or material’s original library with just a few simple clicks.

To select a color or paint

■ Right-click the color or paint in the palette and click Select Color/Paint from the context menu. Its original library is displayed on the Preview Bar, with the color or paint selected.

To select a material

■ Right-click the material in the palette and click Select Material from the context menu. Its original library is displayed on the Preview Bar, with the material selected.

Managing Decorator Palette GroupsYou can organize the colors and materials of each room by assigning groups. Decorator Palette provides you with 15 blank group labels.

To create a group

1 Select a material or color you want to add to the palette and then drag-and-drop the color or material onto a blank palette tile. Repeat with additional materials or colors, as desired.

2 Once you have all the materials and colors you want, click the Group 1 label, then choose Rename Section on the drop-down menu. The Palette Section Name dialog box is displayed.

292 Arch

Managing Decorator Palettes

3 Type a name for the group in the Palette Section Name text box and click OK. The name you entered is displayed in the group label.

To collapse a group

■ Click the group label and choose Collapse Section. The group collapses and displays only its assigned name.

(optional) Click the minus box on the group label.

To expand a group

■ Click the group label and choose Expand Section. The group expands and displays your entries.

(optional) Click the plus box on the group label.

To expand all groups

■ Click the group label and choose Expand All. All of your groups expand and display your entries.

To collapse all groups

■ Click the group label and choose Collapse All. All of your groups collapse and display only their assigned names.

Managing Decorator PalettesYour Decorator Palettes are saved separately from the rest of your design. That means you can use the same palette in different drawings, different sessions, or even share palettes with colleagues.

To save a custom palette

1 Click the palette drop-down menu and choose Add Copy of Current Palette. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify your palette by typing a name in the Palette Name text box and click OK. Your palette is saved and the name of your palette is displayed.

To import a custom palette

1 Click the palette drop-down menu and choose Import Palette. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the palette you want to import and click Open. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.

3 Type a new Palette Name if you want to, then click OK. The palette is displayed.

To export a palette

1 Click the palette drop-down menu bar and choose Export Palette. The Save As box is displayed.

2 To select a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save.

Organizing Decorator PalettesUsing the Palettes Organizer you can prioritize and rename your palettes. You can also delete any palettes you do not want to keep, however at least one palette must remain.



To access the Palettes Organizer

■ Click the palette menu and choose Organize Palettes. The Palettes dialog box is displayed with the names of each of your palettes.

To control palette order

1 Open the Palettes Organizer and click to select the palette you want to reorder.

2 Click the arrow button that corresponds to the direction you want to move the palette. The palette is reordered.

3 Close the Palettes Organizer.

To rename a palette

1 Open the Palettes Organizer and click to select the palette you want to rename. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the new name in the Palette Name field and then click OK. The palette is renamed.


To delete a palette

1 Open the Palettes Organizer and click to select the palette you want to delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Note: At least one palette must exist.

2 Click Yes to delete the palette. The palette is deleted.


Customizing the 3D View There may be times when you will need to see your design without specific features or objects. With Architect 3D you have complete control over what parts of your design are visible.

294 Arch

Saving a 3D View

To hide/view specific features in 3D


2 Click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed.

3 Under 3D Preferences, click Visible 3D Elements. The options are displayed in the right pane.

4 Click to select the features you want to show or deselect the features that you want to hide and then click OK.

Saving a 3D View You can save pre-set 3D views that can be easily accessed at any time. The Saved 3D Views menu option is available from the 3D menu. Here, you can save a 3D view and access your saved views. When you save a view, the render style is also saved with the view.

Additionally, you can update a saved view and organize views to rename or delete them.

To save a 3D View

1 Using the 3D navigation tools, set the 3D View window with the direction, angle, and render style that you want to save.

2 Click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views > Save 3D View. The View Name dialog box is displayed.



3 Type a name for the view in the View Name field and click OK.

To access a saved view

■ Click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views and then click the view description on the submenu. The 3D View window displays the selected view.

To update a saved view

1 Open the 3D view you want to edit.

2 Reposition the 3D view as desired and then click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views > Update.

Organizing Saved 3D ViewsUsing the 3D Views Organizer you can prioritize, rename, and deleted your saved 3D views.

To access the 3D Views Organizer

■ Click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views > Organize 3D Views. The 3D Views organizer is displayed.

To control saved 3D view order

1 Open the 3D Views Organizer and click to select the view you want to reorder.

2 Click the arrow button that corresponds to the direction you want to move the view. The view is reordered.

3 Close the 3D Views Organizer.

To rename a saved 3D view

1 Open the 3D Views Organizer and click to select the view you want to rename.

2 Click the Rename View button. The View Name dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the new name in the View Name field and then click OK. The view is renamed.


Preparing to Construct a RealModel


To delete a saved 3D view

1 Open the 3D Views Organizer and click to select the view you want to delete.

2 Click the Delete View button. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Yes to delete the view. The view is deleted.


Preparing to Construct a RealModelWhen constructing a RealModel, you’ll need to get a few supplies together first. Visit your local craft supply or hobby store to purchase these materials.

Items you’ll need to construct a RealModel:

■ Construction material — foam board or poster board

■ Adhesive — spray adhesive, rubber cement, glue stick, or similar product

■ Tape

■ Straight pins

■ Straight-edge ruler

■ Artist’s knife or scalpel



To open the RealModel view

■ Click the RealModel View button from the 3D View drop-down menu. The design is displayed in RealModel view.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > RealModel > Show RealModel.

Defining ScaleThe scale you choose will define the actual size of your model. All model templates will print in this scale. For example, if you choose 1/2"=1' - a ten-foot wall will print as a five-inch template.

To select RealModel scale

1 Show the RealModel view.

2 Click 3D menu > RealModel > Model Scale. The Scale dialog box is displayed.

3 Click to select the scale you want then click OK.

Printing RealModel TemplatesThe templates are used to guide you, as you build your RealModel. They will specify which wall section is attached to other walls and where doors and windows are placed. Floor templates show where each wall is placed. You have the choice of printing all of the wall and roof templates, as well as the template of each floor at one time or printing each element individually.

To edit print settings, see “Printing Floor Plans”, on page 56.

To print RealModel templates

1 Open the RealModel view.

2 Click 3D menu > RealModel and then choose the template you want to print.

■ Print All Wall Templates- Prints all of the walls in the design.

■ Print All Roof Templates- Prints all of the roofs in the design.

■ Print Floor Template- Choose the floor you want to print from the submenu.


Constructing Wall Templates

■ Print Template- To print an individual template from your design, type the template number you want to print from the RealModel view, then click Print.

The Print dialog box is displayed.

3 Confirm your default printer selection, then click Print.

Constructing Wall TemplatesYou will notice that some wall templates will have darker, shaded edges. These shaded areas indicate the thickness of your construction material. Use these as guidelines on where to attach adjoining walls. The directions for connecting the walls will be printed on each page. Be sure to transfer this information to the template, before cutting it out.

To construct a wall template

1 Attach each wall template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.

2 Cut out each wall section to the exact size of the template. Be sure to include shaded areas.

3 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.

Constructing Roof TemplatesAlthough your roof templates may print attached at points, cut out each roof section separately from your construction material to the exact size of the template.

To construct a roof template

1 Attach each roof template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.

2 Cut out each roof section to the exact size of the template.

3 Attach each roof template to its appropriate counterpart.

4 Secure the roof to the walls.

Printing Template Materials and ColorsTo add a realistic look to your RealModel, you can print sheets of materials and colors to be applied to your model and trimmed to size. With this process, you can see what your design will look like. Follow these steps for every wall and roof on your model.

Note: It is best to print and assemble the material and color on each wall, before moving on to the next wall. If you choose not to do this, you should label each material template and color, as they are printed, to make identifying them easier, when attaching them to your model.

To print template materials and colors

1 Open the RealModel view. Decide which material you want to print first.

2 Click 3D menu > RealModel > Print Template Materials and Colors. The Print Template Textures & Colors dialog box is displayed.



3 Type the template number of the material and color you want to print, then click Print. The Print dialog box is displayed.

4 Confirm your printer settings, then click Print.

Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your ModelOnce the materials and colors have been printed, you will need to affix them to the appropriate template and trim them to size. It is best to use spray adhesive, glue stick, or tape for this step, as using white glue may cause the paper to wrinkle.

To attach the template materials and colors

1 Affix the material to the proper wall template, which has already been attached to the construction material.

2 Carefully trim around the outside edges of the wall template.

3 Cut out the door and window openings.

4 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.


Part 4

Design & Drawing PowerTools

Chapter 21: Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Chapter 22: Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Chapter 23: Ceiling Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Chapter 24: Fireplace Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 25: Mantel Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Chapter 26: Pool Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Chapter 27: Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Chapter 21

Door DesignerWhether you’re drawing custom grillwork or simply designing a door for a unique space, Punch! Door Designer lets you create custom doors that render like any other door in Architect 3D. Once placed in your design, you can edit doors created with Door Designer just like the other doors in your custom library.

Designing Custom DoorsWith Door Designer you can create custom doors by using unlimited combinations of the three door components.

Door Casing is the trim that surrounds the door opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine shapes to create a more ornate door casing.

Door Panels are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing. By varying the thickness of the panels, you can create raised panels to define the door.

Grills add elegance to your door design after you have added the casing and panels. As you draw, you can set the width of the grills on the Properties Bar. If you want your door design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.



Chapter Door Designer21

Launching Door Designer

1 Click Design menu > Launch PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher is displayed.

2 Click to select Door Designer and click the Launch button. The Door Designer is launched.

Drawing Door ComponentsYou can modify an existing custom door design or draw your own custom doors from scratch. As you draw each component, Punch! displays your door design in 3D. Door Designer has three component drawing modes that let you design doors from the outside to the inside.

■ Casing Start by drawing the trim to surround your custom door. The Casing tab includes tools for drawing the trim casing.

■ Panels Next, draw the wood panels that comprise the visible body of your door. The tools on the Panels tab are designed to provide flexibility as you draw.

■ Grills Finally, add detailed grillwork to aesthetically define windows in a door. If you want your door design to include only glass, simply leave those areas empty.

Each of the three component drawing modes features an assortment of 2D drawing tools. The geometry of all three modes is drawn the same. For best results, use these tools in conjunction with Snaps and editing tools to reshape door elements—minimizing repetition and increasing accuracy.

For more information about using editing tools, see “Editing Your Door Design”, on page 305.

For more information on using drawing tools, see “Detail Plan Tab”, on page 233.

Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a door component, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the 2D menu, click to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent door components without selecting the corresponding door tool each time.

Door Component PropertiesThe casing, panel, and grill door component properties are displayed when the component is selected in the design window. You can affect the properties of more than one component by holding the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple components.

■ Edit Level Select Object to resize the whole object or Points to edit individual points on the shape. For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.


■ Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are displayed.

■ Bring to Front button moves the selection to the top layer while Send to Back button moves the selection to the bottom layer.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Bring To Front or Send to Back.

■ Type settings specify the component type.

■ Thickness defines the thickness of the polylines in the shape (applies to panel and grill components only).

■ Open & Closed options specify if the shape is open-ended or contained.


Editing Your Door Design

Editing Your Door DesignRather than draw each geometric feature of your door casing, panel, or grill separately, use Door Designer’s editing tools to reshape, reposition, re-orient, or even join existing door elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. Join tools allow you to join lines, arcs, and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.

For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see “Flipping & Mirroring Elements”, on page 305.

The following options are available for editing your door design:

Selection Tool (For more information, see “Moving a Selection”, on page 256 and “Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects”, on page 51).

Rotate Tool (For more information, see “Rotating a Selection”, which begins on page 257.)

Resize Segment Tool (For more information, see “Changing Segment Length”, which begins on page 120.)

Add Point Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

Remove Point Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

Fillet Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

Inverted Fillet Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

Chamfer Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

To select the next door element

■ On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Next Object Tool. Door Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

To select the previous door element

■ On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Previous Object Tool. Door Designer selects the objects in reverse order.

To join arcs, lines or polylines

1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each element that you want to be joined.

Note: The end points of each element must be nearby for those elements to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”.

2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The objects are joined into a polyline.

Note: You can separate the segments of any polyline (whether or not you created it using the Join Tool) by selecting the polyline and clicking the Unjoin Tool on the Standard toolbar.

Flipping & Mirroring ElementsThe Flip function takes the original component and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical components facing one another.

For more information, see “Flip and Mirror”, which begins on page 257.



Controlling Drawing SettingsThere are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify door elements. The Properties Bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace.

Note: Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.

■ Workspace Boundary defines the size of the drawing space. Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes.

If you have already drawn objects in the design window, select Scale Objects to resize them accordingly.

■ Grid Options control the grid settings. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.

■ Nudge Rate defines the distance a selection moves when nudged using the arrow keys. Type a new value in the text box to change it.

■ Join Sensitivity defines how close elements must be in proximity to another element when joining them. A lower value means that you must position elements closer to join them.

■ Drawing Precision specifies Inches or Feet-Inches as the unit of measurement.

■ Tracking Constraints setting control if the angle of a segment being drawn is constrained to a 5-degree increments or to the roof pitch value. When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the door design automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home design

■ Replace Existing checkbox controls if door styles that are added from the Preview bar replace the existing components in the design window. When selected, components are replaced when door styles are applied; when deselected multiple styles are applied to the design window.

■ Scale To Workspace checkbox controls if door styles that are added from the Preview bar match the workspace size. When selected, styles are automatically scaled to match the workspace size; when deselected the default door style is retained.

■ Save Door To Library For more information, see “Managing Door Designs”, which begins on page 307.

Using Snaps to Draw ComponentsArchitect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance door elements are placed from other door elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode.

Below is a description of the snap tools, from the top of the toolbar to the bottom.

No Snap Deactivates an active snap tool.

Snap to End Point The shape snaps to the nearest end point.

Snap to Segment Center The shape snaps to the nearest segment center point.

Snap to Object Center The shape snaps to the center point of the component.

Snap to Object Corner point The shape snaps to the corner point of the component.

Snap to Intersection The shape snaps to the nearest intersection point.


Viewing your Drawing in 3D

Snap to Perpendicular The shape snaps to the nearest segment to draw perpendicular from the segment.

Snap to Segment-Offset The shape snaps to a point based on an offset distance you specify before drawing the shape.

Snap to On-Segment The shape snaps to the nearest component segment.

Viewing your Drawing in 3DDoor Designer displays your door design in 3D in the upper right corner of the Door Designer screen. You control the 3D view in the same way you control a 3D View rendering using Fly-Around mode.

To view your door in 3D

■ Drag in the 3D view to navigate in fly-around mode. The view is updated dynamically.

To increase or decrease the Fly-Around speed

■ Click 3D menu > Helicopter Speed and then select a speed setting from the submenu. The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.

To reset the 3D view

■ Click 3D menu > Reset 3D View.

To view a window design using ClearView

■ Click 3D menu > Render ClearView.

To render a window design in 3D final quality

■ Click 3D menu > Render 3D Final Quality.

To automatically render a window design in 3D final quality

■ Click 3D menu > Auto Final Render.


■ Click 3D menu > 3D Final Quality and choose the render quality you want from the submenu.


Managing Door DesignsDoor Designer not only allows you to save new doors for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing door libraries.



To import an existing door design

1 On the Properties Bar, click the Doors drop-down, then select a Door library. The Preview Bar changes to display doors in this library.

(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Replace Existing checkbox, to remove existing door designs from the design window as you import from the library. When this checkbox is unchecked, imported designs are placed on top of existing designs.

(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Scale to Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the door design to the current workspace size as you import from the library.

2 Click a door design on the Preview Bar and drag it into the design window.

To save a new door design

1 Click the Save Door to Library button on the Properties Bar. The Save Door to Category dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click File menu > Save Door to Library.

2 In the Door Category section, click to choose the door category.

(optional) Click New to create a new door category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

3 Type a name for the new door in the Door Name text box. New door names can contain up to 44 characters.

4 Type a description of the new door in the Door Description text box. New door descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

5 Click OK.

Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! DrawingOnce you’ve designed a custom door, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other door, making sure to select the custom door library before you place the door. In the 2D design window, custom doors are displayed the same as standard doors, but they are fully rendered in 3D View.

To add a custom door

1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Door Tool. The Door Properties are displayed on the Properties tab.

2 Click the Door Style button, then click the Custom Door style at the bottom of the list. The Door Preview Bar is displayed


Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing

3 Click the arrow next to “Doors” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the door library list, then click a library. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.

4 Click a door in the Preview Bar to select it.

5 On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a door.

6 (optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary.

7 (optional) Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them.

Note: Any changes made on the Door Properties Bar, become the default and will be used the next time a door is placed.




Chapter 22

Window DesignerWindow Designer lets you create custom windows and detail custom window shapes that render like any other window in Architect 3D. Once placed in your design, you can edit windows created with Window Designer just like the other custom windows in your library.

Designing Custom WindowsWith Punch! Window Designer, you can create custom windows by using an unlimited combination of the three window components.

Window Casing is the trim that surrounds the window opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine shapes to create a more ornate window casing.

Window Sills are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing.

Grills add elegance to your window design, after you have added the casing and sills. As you draw, you can set the width of the grills on the Properties Bar. Wherever you want your window design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.



Chapter Window Designer22

Launching Window Designer


2 Click to select Window Designer and click the Launch button. The Window Designer is launched.

Drawing Window ComponentsYou can modify an existing window design or draw your own custom windows from scratch. As you draw each component, Punch! displays your window design in 3D. Window Designer has three component drawing modes that let you design windows from the outside to the inside.

■ Casing Start by drawing the trim to surround your custom window. The Casing tab includes tools for drawing the trim casing

■ Sills Next, draw the wood trim that comprises the base of your window.

■ Grills Finally, add detailed grillwork to aesthetically define panes in a window. Wherever you want your window design to include only glass, simply leave those areas empty.

Each of the three component drawing modes features an assortment of 2D drawing tools. For best results, use these tools in conjunction with snaps and editing tools to reshape window elements, minimize repetition, and increase accuracy.

For more information about using editing tools, see “Editing Your Window Design”, on page 313.


Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a window component, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the 2D menu, click to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent window components without selecting the corresponding window tool each time.

Window Component PropertiesThe casing, sill, and grill component properties are displayed when the component is selected in the design window. You can affect the properties of more than one component by holding the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple components.




■ Bring to Front button moves the selection to the top layer while Send to Back button moves the selection to the bottom layer.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Bring To Front or Send to Back.

■ Type settings specify the component type.

■ Thickness defines the thickness of the polylines in the shape (applies to panel and grill components only).

■ Open & Closed options specify if the shape is open-ended or contained.


Editing Your Window Design

Editing Your Window DesignRather than redraw each geometric feature of your window casing, sill, or grill to position them perfectly, use Window Designer’s editing tools to reshape, reposition, and reorient existing window elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. Join tools allow you to join lines, arcs, and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.

For more information on flipping and mirroring, see “Flipping & Mirroring Elements”, on page 313.

The following options are available for editing your window design:









To remove window elements

■ Click the component to select it, then right-click and click Clear.

To select the next window element

■ On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Next Object Tool. Window Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

To select the previous window element

■ On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Previous Object Tool. Window Designer selects the objects in reverse order.

To join arcs, lines or polylines

1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each component that you want to be joined.

Note: The end points of each component must be nearby for those components to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”.

2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The components are joined into a polyline.


Flipping & Mirroring ElementsThe Flip function takes the original component and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical components facing one another.




Controlling Drawing SettingsThere are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify window elements. The Properties Bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace.

Note: Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.

■ Workspace Boundary controls the size of the drawing space. Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes.

If you have already drawn elements in the design window, select Scale Objects to resize them accordingly.

■ Grid Options control the grid settings. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.

■ Nudge Rate controls the distance a selection moves when nudged using the arrow keys. Type a new value in the text box to change it.

■ Join Sensitivity affects how close components must be in proximity to another component when joining them. A lower value means that you must position components closer to join them.

■ Drawing Precision Specifies Inches or Feet-Inches for the unit of measurement.

■ Tracking Constraints setting control if the angle of a segment being drawn is constrained to a 5-degree increments or to the roof pitch value. When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the window design automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home design

■ Replace Existing checkbox controls if window styles that are added from the Preview bar replace the existing components in the design window. When selected, components are replaced when window styles are applied; when deselected multiple styles are applied to the design window.

■ Scale To Workspace checkbox controls if window styles that are added from the Preview bar match the workspace size. When selected, styles are automatically scaled to match the workspace size; when deselected the default window style is retained.

■ Save Door To Library For more information, see “Managing Window Designs”, which begins on page 314.

Using Snaps to Draw Window ElementsArchitect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance window elements are placed from other window elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.


For more information on using the snap tools, see “Using Snaps to Draw Components”, on page 306.

Managing Window DesignsWindow Designer not only allows you to save new windows for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing window libraries.

To import an existing window design

1 On the Properties Bar, click the Windows drop-down menu, then select a category tab and Window library. The Preview Bar changes to display windows in this library.

(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Replace Existing checkbox to remove existing window designs from the design window, as you import from the library. When this checkbox is unchecked, imported designs are placed on top of existing designs.


Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing

(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Scale to Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the window design to the current workspace size, as you import from the library.

2 Drag-and-drop a window design on the Preview Bar and drag it into the Design Window.

To save a new window design

1 Click the Save Window to Library button on the Properties Bar. The Save Window to Category dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click File menu > Save Window to Library.

2 In the Window Category section, click to save the window to a User Library category or click the New button to create a new User Library category or sub-category.

3 Type a name for the new window in the Window Name text box. New window names can contain up to 44 characters.

4 Type a description of the new window in the Window Description text box. New window descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

5 Click OK.

Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! DrawingOnce you’ve designed a custom window, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other window, making sure to select the custom window library before you place the window. In the 2D design window, custom windows are displayed the same as standard windows, but they are fully rendered in 3D View.

For information on editing windows once placed, see “Window Properties”, on page 129.

To add a custom window

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Window properties are displayed in the Properties tab.

2 Click the Window Style button, then click Custom WIndow from the drop-down menu that is displayed. The Preview Bar displays the windows available in the current library.

3 Click the Windows drop-down menu and then click the User Library tab.

4 Choose the category where you saved the window and then select the window in the Preview Bar.

5 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to place the window.




Chapter 23

Ceiling DesignerImagine an exquisite ceiling design with exotic wood beams, opening up an inspirational great room; now create it with Ceiling Designer! Punch! Ceiling Designer offers tools and designs that allow you to capture the ceiling of your dreams and make it real.

Note: It is recommended that you disable the auto ceiling in the main application if it is enabled in your design before opening the Ceiling Designer. For more information, see “Automatic Ceiling”, which begins on page 122.

To Launch Ceiling Designer


2 Click to select Ceiling Designer and click the Launch button. The Ceiling Designer is launched.

Placing an Auto CeilingYou can automatically place a ceiling over an enclosure with just a couple clicks of the mouse. Once placed, you can edit the ceiling’s shape, size, and properties. The Auto Ceiling dialog box is available when you click an existing wall in



Chapter Ceiling Designer23

the design. You can set the elevation and the extension before placing the auto ceiling, and then edit it after the ceiling has been placed.

To create an Auto Ceiling

1 On the workspace, select an existing wall and click Auto Ceiling. The Auto Ceiling dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the Elevation and Extension you want in the corresponding text boxes and then click OK.

Drawing a Custom CeilingThe first step to creating a creative and unique ceiling is to select the shape you want. Punch! offers ceiling tools to create a ceiling from basic 2D shapes, pre-drawn ceiling templates, and curved shapes. All of these elements are available on the tool menu.

Rectangle Ceiling ToolFor more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233.

Oval Ceiling ToolFor more information, see “Drawing Circles and Ovals”, which begins on page 234.

Polygon Ceiling ToolFor more information, see “Drawing Polygons”, which begins on page 235.

Multigon Ceiling ToolFor more information, see “Drawing Multigons”, which begins on page 237.

Custom Drawn Ceiling PropertiesYou can edit custom drawn ceilings to adjust the shape as well as create a custom ceiling tray or convert the shape to a ceiling cutout.

Note: Always press ENTER to accept new values in a text box.


Custom Drawn Ceiling Properties




■ Tray Height defines the height of the ceiling tray. When set to 0, the ceiling remains flat. When a feet-and-inches value is entered, the tray is created to the specified height.

Tray Height = 0 Tray Height = 1'-6"

■ Elevation defines the elevation at which the ceiling is placed. This does not include the tray height.

■ Auto-Elevate button allows you to automatically detect the wall height and position the ceiling at an elevation relative to the top of the walls.

■ Cutout checkbox specifies a shape as a cutout section, so the area is literally cut out from the existing ceiling.

Note: Be sure the cutout’s elevation matches that of the existing ceiling.

■ Slanted checkbox controls if a slanted angle is applied to the ceiling tray. When selected, the Inset text box becomes active where you can define the distance you want the ceiling to slant towards the top of the tray. A higher Inset value results in a more sloped, more severe pitch.



Inset = 0 Inset = 3'-0"

Drawing a Predefined Ceiling ShapeThe predefined ceiling shapes allow you to create ceilings using unique shapes and then adjusting their properties to further customize the look.

Gable Ceiling Tool Creates a pitched ceiling with gable ends. Gable ceilings are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Hip Ceiling Tool Creates a pitched ceiling with slanted panels. Hip ceilings are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Barrel Ceiling Tool Creates a curved ceiling with two flat ends. Barrel ceilings are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233.

Dome Ceiling Tool Creates a rounded ceiling. Dome ceilings are created using the same drawing method as ovals and circles. For more information, see “Drawing Circles and Ovals”, which begins on page 234.

Ceiling Beam Tool Creates an individual beam based on the length you specify. Ceiling beams are created using the same drawing method as line. For more information, see “Drawing Lines”, which begins on page 234. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Hip and Gable Ceiling PropertiesHip and Gable ceilings are defined by their pitch, elevation, and ridge direction. You can define the pitch before or after drawing the ceiling. This and other properties can be edited by selecting the ceiling in the design window after it has been created.



Barrel and Dome Ceiling Properties

■ Pitch specifies the pitch of the ceiling panels. Choose the radio button corresponding to the pitch you want or choose Custom and type the pitch you want in the text box.

■ Pitch Angle defines the ceiling panel pitch angle if you know that. Type the angle you want, in the Pitch Angle text box. The value in the Custom Pitch text box changes to reflect the Pitch Angle you’ve entered.

■ Elevation defines the elevation at which the base of the ceiling is placed.


■ Ridge Direction button controls the direction of the ridge, either horizontally or vertically, depending on its original position.

■ Gable Ends checkbox controls if the ends of the gable ceiling are enabled or disabled. When enabled, ends are visible; when disabled the ends are removed creating an open-ended gable ceiling.

Gable Ends Enabled Gable Ends Disabled


Barrel and Dome Ceiling PropertiesWhen a barrel or dome ceiling is selected, its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.


■ Size defines the Width, Length, and Height of the ceiling (you can also drag an edge to resize manually).

■ Elevation defines the elevation at which the base of the ceiling is placed.


■ Barrel Direction button controls the direction of the barrel center line, either horizontally or vertically, depending on its original position.

■ Ends Caps checkbox controls if the ends of the barrel ceiling are enabled or disabled. When enabled, ends are visible; when disabled the ends are removed creating an open-ended barrel ceiling.




Ceiling Beam PropertiesCeiling beams are defined by their size, elevation, and pitch. You can define the size before or after drawing the beam. This and other properties can be edited by selecting the beam in the design window after it has been created.


■ Size Type the Width and Height for the beam in the corresponding text boxes. You can also drag selection points to resize manually.

■ Elevation defines the elevation at which the ceiling beam is placed.

■ Auto-Elevate button allows you to automatically detect the wall height and position the ceiling beam at an elevation relative to the top of the walls.

■ Pitch specifies the pitch of the beam. Choose the radio button corresponding to the pitch you want or choose Custom and type the pitch you want in the text box.

■ Pitch Angle defines the ceiling beam pitch angle if you know that. Type the angle you want, in the Pitch Angle text box. The value in the Custom Pitch text box changes to reflect the Pitch Angle you’ve entered.

■ Pitch Direction button controls the direction of the beam is pitched. Click to reverse the beam pitch direction.


Editing a CeilingCeiling Designer offers a variety of ways to customize and edit your ceiling. You can control the shape, size, pitch, and other factors that affect the appearance of both a custom ceiling and an Auto Ceiling. Using these tools, you can design unique and creative ceilings. You can only reshape ceiling shapes created using the custom ceiling shape tools; predefined ceiling shapes cannot be reshaped. After you’ve created your ceiling, click the ceiling to select it; its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.

The following options are available for editing your ceiling design:







Inverse Fillet Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)



Flipping & Mirroring Elements



Define Ceiling ElevationsNot only can you control your Working Elevation and individual component elevations, but Ceiling Designer is also equipped with an Auto-Elevate feature, which automatically elevates new ceilings and adjusts existing ceilings, according to elevation changes.

■ Auto-Elevate new ceilings When selected, new ceilings are automatically added at a default ceiling elevation.

■ Adjust ceilings on elevation changes When selected existing ceilings are automatically updated when changes are made that affect the ceiling height.

To control auto-elevate settings

1 Click Design menu > Auto-Elevate Settings. The Auto-Elevate Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the settings and then click OK.

Controlling Your 2D ViewWhile creating your ceiling design, you’ll use a variety of tools and views, so it will be helpful to be able to adjust your 2D view, quickly, to accommodate your needs. You can pan, or move, across your entire design using the Pan Tool, zoom in and out to focus on specific areas, as well as quickly fit your entire design within the 2D window.

For more information, see “Viewing the 2D Plan”, which begins on page 41.

2D Drawing ColorsTo help distinguish the ceiling you’re working on from the rest of your design, and possibly the grid, you can customize the color of your 2D ceiling while working in Ceiling Designer.

To change your drawing color

1 Click 2D menu > Drawing Color. The color palette is displayed.

2 Choose the color you want your ceiling components to be, and click OK.

To reset drawing colors

■ Click 2D menu > Reset Drawing Color.

3D View Window Options3D View offers three different 3D views for you to see your design as you’re creating. The 3D View window can be repositioned and resized at any time during the design process. The 3D View window sizes are accessible through buttons in Ceiling Designer, and by right-clicking on the 2D workspace.

For more information, see “Working with 3D Views”, which begins on page 43.

Navigating in 3DYou can navigate through your 3D view using a Walk-Through and Fly-Around feature. As you’re navigating, you can adjust your viewing elevation, and even anchor your position using the Controlled navigation tools.



As you navigate through your design, you can adjust the speed at which you’re moving and adjust the size of the camera angle.

For more information, see “Moving Around in 3D”, which begins on page 271.

3D Rendering OptionsRendering options are available to control 3D navigation and viewing settings.

■ Speed slider controls the navigation speed, from slow to fast.


■ Camera Angle slider control how thin or wide the 3D view is displayed.

■ ClearView Opacity slider controls how transparent or opaque components appear when in ClearView.

■ Render 3D components that have been added to your drawing are automatically displayed when viewing your drawing in Ceiling Designer. You can select which 3D components are displayed, or hide all to help speed up rendering. Click to select, or deselect the options to include, or exclude.

To access rendering settings

1 Open a 3D View window.

2 Click 3D menu > Rendering Options. The Rendering Options dialog box is displayed.

3 Adjust the render settings and then click OK.

Selecting Render StyleThere are two rendering styles to choose from when viewing your design in 3D. Each offers a different perspective of your drawing.

To view in 3D textured

1 Open 3D View.

2 On the 3D menu, click to deselect ClearView. The design is displayed in 3D texture in the 3D View window.

To view in ClearView

1 Open 3D View.

2 On the 3D menu, click ClearView. The design is displayed in ClearView in the 3D View window.

Adjusting 3D LightingYou can control the intensity and brightness of lighting of your 3D view in Ceiling Designer.


Using Templates

To adjust lighting intensity in a 3D view

1 Click 3D menu > 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.

2 Adjust the sliders to control Intensity and Brightness and then click OK.

Using TemplatesPunch! Ceiling Designer offers pre-made ceiling designs to quickly place in your drawing. You can also create and manage your own templates, which is extremely useful when working with multiple ceilings throughout multiple designs. The Template Organizer allows you to manage all of your templates; you can move them between categories, rename templates and categories, as well as delete templates and categories.

To use templates

1 Click the Templates tab. The ceiling templates are displayed.

2 Click the Templates drop-down menu and choose the ceiling library you want. The templates are displayed on the Properties Bar.

3 Drag-and-drop a template onto the workspace.

Note: The position of your cursor, when you drag and drop a template, determines the center of the design.

To organize templates

1 From the Templates drop-down menu, click Template Organizer.

2 On the left side of the Organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.

3 On the right side of the organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.

4 Click on the name of the template you want to move.

5 Click the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to another.

To change template info

1 Select the ceiling template you want to change and click the Info button, under Template. The Template Info dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the name you want, in the Template text box.

3 Type a description in the Template Description text box.

4 Click OK.



To delete a template

1 Click the template you want to delete to select it.

2 Click the Delete button, under Template. A confirmation box is displayed.

3 Click Yes to permanently delete the template from the library.

To create a new ceiling category

1 Click the New button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

2 Select a folder for the location of your new category and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the name of your new category in the Category Name text box and click OK. Your new category is displayed on the right side of the Organizer.

To delete a category

1 Click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.


Using Templates

2 Select the category you want to delete and click OK. The delete confirmation box is displayed.

3 Click Yes to permanently delete the category and its templates from the Organizer.

To rename a category

1 Click the Rename button under category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the category you want to rename and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.



3 Type the new name in the Category Name text box and click OK. The new category name is displayed in the Organizer.

To create a ceiling template

1 Create a ceiling design you want to save as a template and then click to select the ceiling element(s) you want to include in your template.

2 Click the Templates tab. Templates are displayed on the Properties Bar.

3 Click the Templates drop-down menu and choose Create Template. The Save Template To Category dialog box is displayed.

4 Click the Template Category drop-down menu to select the category where you want to save your ceiling template.

5 Type the name of your ceiling in the Template Name text box.

6 Type a description of your ceiling in the Template Description text box.

7 Once you’ve finished entering the information about your new ceiling, click OK. Your design is displayed on the Templates Properties Bar.

Tip: Use the Templates drop-down menu to navigate through your categories quickly.


Chapter 24

Fireplace WizardAdding a fireplace is now #10 on the “Things that Add Value to Your Home” list! With Punch! Fireplace Wizard, it’s a snap to do.

Once you have stepped through the Wizard you are able to customize every feature of your Fireplace. You can add materials and colors to create a truly individual home feature!

Designing a Custom FireplacePunch! Fireplace Wizard walks you through the initial design process, then allows total customization of each feature.

Launching Fireplace Wizard


2 Click to select Fireplace Wizard and click the Launch button. The Fireplace Wizard is launched.

To design a full fireplace

1 If the Fireplace Wizard is not open, click File > New. The fireplace types are displayed. Here you can choose the style fireplace you want to start with.



Chapter Fireplace Wizard24

Remember, this style is just a base, you can customize the properties to make the fireplace your own.

2 Select the type of fireplace you want to design, then click Next. The fireplace dimensions are displayed.

3 (optional) Type new dimensions in the appropriate text box(es), then click Next. The chimney options are displayed.

Note: You can always change these dimensions later.

330 Arch

Defining Dimension Increments

(optional) Check the feature(s) you want and type new dimensions in the appropriate text box(es).

4 Click Finish to display your fireplace.

Defining Dimension IncrementsYou can gain great control over changes in the dimensions of each area of fireplace design by specifying a dimension increment. This increment is the measurement amount used when you click the arrows to alter each dimension.

To change the dimension increment

1 Click Design menu > Set Dimensions Increment. The Increment Value dialog box is displayed.



2 Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.

Customizing the Fireplace PropertiesA fireplace is made up of three components: face, hearth & mantle, and chimney. Each of these components’ properties are individually customizable.

As you work, you can quickly move between the fireplace components to display and edit their properties. Simply choose the fireplace component you want from the drop-down menu.

Note: The Hearth & Mantel and Chimney can be removed.

Customizing the Face DimensionsThe Face includes the actual height, width, and depth of the actual face as well as the firebox. These two components make up the face. The Face properties allow you to control the dimensions of these components. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.

Note: All faces may not be available at all times. Some fireplaces may have three faces, while others may have only one face.

To change the face dimensions

1 Choose Face from the Components drop-down menu.

2 If your fireplace includes more than one face, click Design menu > Face and click the face you want to edit from the submenu menu.

3 Under Face Dimensions, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment you’ve set.

As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

To change the firebox dimensions

1 Click Design menu > Face and click the face you want from the submenu menu.

332 Arch

Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions

2 Under Firebox Dimensions, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, Depth, and Elevation text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment you’ve set.


Customizing Hearth & Mantel DimensionsThe Hearth & Mantel properties affect the appearance of these components, the dimensions as well as their overall inclusion on your fireplace. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.

To include a hearth

1 Choose Hearth & Mantel from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Hearth checkbox to display the hearth and enable its properties.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Face Components > Include Hearth. A checkmark is displayed when the hearth is included.

To change the hearth dimensions

1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Hearth & Mantel. The Hearth Properties and Mantel Properties are displayed.

2 Under Hearth Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment you’ve set.




To include a mantel

1 Choose Hearth & Mantel from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Mantel checkbox to display the mantel and enable its properties.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Face Components > Include Mantel. A checkmark is displayed when the mantel is included.

To change the mantel dimensions

1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Hearth & Mantel. The Hearth Properties and Mantel Properties are displayed.

2 Under Mantel Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, Depth, and Elevation text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment you’ve set.



Customizing the Chimney Dimensions

Customizing the Chimney DimensionsThe Chimney properties in Punch! Fireplace Wizard allow you to update whether or not you want a chimney and let you specify its dimensions. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.

To include a chimney

1 Choose Chimney from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Chimney checkbox to display the chimney and enable its properties.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Chimney Components > Include Body. A checkmark is displayed when the chimney is included.

To change the chimney dimensions

1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Chimney. The Chimney Properties are displayed.

2 Under Chimney Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment you’ve set.


To include a chimney pot

1 Choose Chimney from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Chimney Pot checkbox to display the chimney pot and enable its properties.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Chimney Components > Include Pot. A checkmark is displayed when the chimney pot is included.

To change the chimney pot dimensions

1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Chimney. The Chimney Pot Properties are displayed.

2 Under Chimney Pot Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment you’ve set.




Moving around in Fireplace WizardFireplace Wizard provides the same two interactive 3D viewing options available in the 3D view, the Animated Walk-Through and Fly-Around tools. Using these tools, you can vary the viewing level, by adjusting the angle, to provide the best viewing capabilities available.


Applying Material or Color to FireplacesYou can customize your fireplace’s appearance by applying different materials or colors. Just as in Architect 3D, customizing your fireplace is a simple drag-and-drop procedure.

For more information on using the available libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

To apply material to a fireplace

1 In the Fireplace Wizard window, click the Materials tab. By default, the Materials library is displayed in the Preview Bar.

2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials”, to display the Materials libraries menu, then click to select the material library you want. The library’s content is displayed.

3 Scroll to view the available materials.

4 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the material onto the fireplace in the Fireplace Wizard window. The material you selected is applied.

To apply color from a customizable palette

1 In the Fireplace Wizard window, click the Colors tab. By default, the Winter Colors library is displayed.


Adding Lighting and Shadows

2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the arrow next to “Colors”, to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring or whichever category you prefer. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

3 Scroll to view the available spring colors.

4 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto a side of your fireplace in the Fireplace Wizard window. The color you selected is applied.

To apply a series of the same color or material

1 Find the color or material you want to apply to multiple surfaces.

2 Right-click the color or material you want to apply.

3 Right-click each component where you want the color or material applied. For example, right-click the mantel or chimney.

4 Click the left mouse button to end. The color or material you selected is applied.

Adding Lighting and Shadows With Fireplace Wizard you can customize how lighting and shadows are rendered. Lighting settings are controlled in the 3D Lighting dialog box.

To adjust the lighting intensity


2 Click the direction from which you want the light to originate, in the Direction section of the 3D Lighting dialog box.

3 Increase or decrease the light intensity by clicking and dragging the Intensity slider.

4 Increase or decrease the overall brightness by clicking and dragging the Brightness slider.

5 Click OK.

Default ViewsThere are pre-defined views, to which you can default in Fireplace Wizard: Active Face View, Chimney Pot View, and 3D View.

Face View and Chimney Pot View set your view close to either the face or the chimney pot, if available.

Note: You must be in Animated Walk-Around mode to default to these views.

The 3D View, sets your view back away from the chimney with the entire design in full view.

To reset the active face view

■ Click Design menu > Reset Active Face View.



To reset the chimney pot view.

■ Click the Design menu > Reset Chimney Pot View.


■ Click the 3D menu > Reset 3D View.

Saving a FireplaceWhen you open a file, Fireplace Wizard copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes, or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo.

When you click the Save As command, Fireplace Wizard saves the active drawing, using the name and location you specify. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name, in different folders or on different disks.

Note: When you save a custom fireplace, the Fireplace Wizard automatically adds the PFW extension.

Exporting to 3D Custom WorkshopBy exporting a Fireplace Wizard design to 3D Custom Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which begins on page 429.

To export a fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop

1 Click File menu > Export to Custom Workshop. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Fireplace Wizard automatically adds the POB extension. Click OK.

Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.


Chapter 25

Mantel DesignerThe Punch! Mantel Designer gives you the freedom to create extravagant, customized mantel designs. Using shapes or pre-designed templates, you can add a uniqueness to your fireplace, one that defines your personality and creates the look and feel only you could create.

Mantel DesignerPunch! Mantel Designer allows you to create unique mantels to customize the look of your fireplace. You can use 2D shapes to draw the mantel of your dreams, or use pre-drawn templates to customize your fireplace.

To launch the Punch! Mantel Designer


2 Click to select Mantel Designer and click the Launch button. The Mantel Designer is launched and the Welcome window is displayed.



Chapter Mantel Designer25

Drawing Mantel ShapesUsing tools provided in Mantel Designer, you can create a variety of mantel shapes. To begin, launch the Mantel Designer.

Rectangular Mantel Face Tool Creates a rectangular or square mantel face. These are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Circle/Oval Mantel Face Tool Creates a circular or oval-shaped mantel face. These are created using the same drawing method as circles and ovals. For more information, see “Drawing Circles and Ovals”, which begins on page 234. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Polygon Mantel Face ToolCreates a user-defined mantel face made of polylines. These are created using the same drawing method as polygons. For more information, see “Drawing Polygons”, which begins on page 235. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Multigon Mantel Face ToolCreates a multigon-shaped mantel face. These are created using the same drawing method as multigons. For more information, see “Drawing Multigons”, which begins on page 237. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Curved Mantel Face ToolCreates a user-defined mantel face made of curves. These are created using the same drawing method as curves. For more information, see “Drawing Curves”, which begins on page 237. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Dental Mantel Face ToolCreates a line-shaped dental face. These are created using the same drawing method as lines. For more information, see “Drawing Lines”, which begins on page 234. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after you’ve drawn the shape.

Editing Your Mantel DesignMantel Designer offers multiple ways to customize your mantel. You can control the shape and size, as well as control your mantel’s appearance by shaping element edges and projecting elements to create a look all your own.

After you’ve created a mantel shape, click the shape to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.



Dental Mantel Face Properties

■ Projection defines the distance the shape projects from the surface.




Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved mantel shapes.

Dental Mantel Face PropertiesDental mantel face is defined by its projection as well as the size of the teeth along the shape.


■ Projection defines the distance the shape projects from the surface.


■ Teeth Height defines the distance from the bottom of the dental face line to the top.

■ Teeth Width defines the distance from one side of a block in the line to the other side.

■ Teeth Spacing defines the distance between each block in the dental face line.

Editing Your Mantel DesignRather than draw each geometric feature of your mantel separately, use Mantel Designer’s editing tools to reshape, reposition, re-orient, or even join existing mantel elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. Join tools allow you to join lines, arcs, and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.

For more information on flipping and mirroring, see “Flipping & Mirroring Elements”, on page 342.







Teeth Height

Teeth Width

Teeth Spacing





Chamfer Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.



Using Snaps to Draw Mantel ElementsArchitect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance mantel elements are placed from other mantel elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.



Tracing an ImageIf you already have an image that shows the mantel design you want—for instance a scanned mantel drawing—Mantel Designer lets you trace mantel designs directly over that image. Simply import the image, position it in the drawing, then use one of the mantel face tools to trace the image.

For more information, see “Import a Floor Plan Image”, which begins on page 267.

Controlling Your 2D ViewWhile creating your mantel design, you’ll use a variety of tools and views, so it will be helpful to be able to adjust your 2D view, quickly, to accommodate your needs. You can pan, or move, across your entire design using the Pan Tool, zoom in and out to focus on specific areas, as well as quickly fit your entire design within the 2D window.

For more information, see “Viewing the 2D Plan”, which begins on page 41.

LiveView Window OptionsLiveView offers three different 3D views for you to see your design as you’re creating. The LiveView window can be repositioned and resized at any time during the design process. The LiveView window sizes are accessible through buttons in Mantel Designer, and by right-clicking on the 2D workspace.

For more information, see “Working with 3D Views”, which begins on page 43.

Navigating in 3DYou can navigate through your 3D view using a Walk-Through and Fly-Around feature. You can adjust your viewing elevation, and even anchor your position using the Controlled navigation tools.

As you’re navigating, you can adjust the speed at which you’re moving and adjust the size of the camera angle.



Adjusting 3D Lighting

Adjusting 3D LightingYou can control the lighting settings of your 3D view in Mantel Designer.

To adjust lighting intensity in a 3D view



Using TemplatesPunch! Mantel Designer provides pre-made mantel designs for you to quickly place in your drawing. You can also create and manage your own templates, which is extremely useful when working with multiple mantels throughout multiple designs. The Template Organizer allows you to manage all of your templates; you can move them between categories, rename templates and categories, and delete templates and categories.

To use templates

1 Click the Templates tab. The mantel templates are displayed.

2 Drag and drop a template onto the workspace.

Note: The position of your cursor, when you drag and drop a template, determines the center of the design.


1 From the Templates drop-down menu, click Template Organizer.

2 On the left side of the Organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.

3 On the right side of the organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.

4 Click on the name of the template you want to move.

5 Click the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to another.

To change template info

1 Select the mantel template you want to change and click the Info button, under Template. The Template Info dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the name you want in the Template text box.

3 Type a description in the Template Description text box.

4 Click OK.



To delete a template

1 Click the template you want to delete to select it.

2 Click the Delete button, under Template. A confirmation box is displayed.

3 Click Yes to permanently delete the template from the library.

To create a new mantel category


2 Select a folder for the location of your new category and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the name of your new category in the Category Name text box and click OK. Your new category is displayed on the right side of the Organizer.

To delete a category

1 Click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.


Using Templates


3 Click Yes to permanently delete the category and its templates from the Organizer.


1 Click the Rename button under category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.




3 Type the new name in the Category Name text box and click OK. The new category name is displayed in the Organizer.

To create a mantel template

1 Create a mantel design you want to save as a template and click the Templates tab. Templates are displayed on the Properties Bar.

2 Click the Template Library drop-down menu and select Create Template. The Save Template To Category dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Template Category drop-down menu to select the category where you want to save your mantel template.

4 Type the name of your mantel in the Template Name text box.

5 Type a description of your mantel in the Template Description text box.

6 Once you’ve finished entering the information about your new mantel, click OK. Your design is displayed on the Templates Properties Bar.


Exporting to 3D Custom WorkshopBy exporting a mantel created using Mantel Designer to 3D Custom Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which begins on page 429.

To export a mantel to 3D Custom Workshop

1 Click File menu > Export to Custom Workshop. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Mantel Designer automatically adds the POB extension. Click OK.

Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.


Chapter 26

Pool DesignerImagine the pool of your dreams, picture it in your mind. Now make it a reality with Punch! Pool Designer! Create a pool as extravagant or intimate as you like. Create the ultimate atmosphere by selecting just the right accessories, from Pool Designer. Get started now...

Launching Pool Designer


2 Click to select Pool Designer and click the Launch button. The Pool Designer is launched.

Create a Pool Using Pool WizardThe Punch! Pool Wizard lets you choose a pool shape from pre-designed Basic Shapes, Advanced Shapes, and Above Ground shapes. After choose your pool shape, you can customize the pool properties, such as coping (the tiles that edge your in-ground pool), water, liner, and more, or create your pool using the default settings.



Chapter Pool Designer26

To create a pool using Pool Wizard

1 From the Shape tab, click the Pool Wizard Tool. Pool Wizard is displayed.

(alternatively) Click File > Pool Wizard.

2 Click a one of the pool shape tabs and choose the pool shape you want. A full-color preview is displayed when you click a shape thumbnail.

3 After selecting your shape, customize the properties on the Properties Bar.

■ Coping Properties define the overall width and thickness of the coping around the pool.

Coping 1'-0" Wide 2" Thick Coping 2'-0" Wide 6" Thick

■ Water Properties your pool is displayed filled with water when viewed in 3D View. If you want your pool to appear empty in 3D View, deselect the Fill Pool checkbox.

To change the water level, type the distance you want the water to appear, from the top edge of the pool, in the Water Level text box.

■ Liner Properties specifies the depth of your pool. By default, some pools feature both a shallow end and a deep end. Type the depth for the shallow end of your pool in the Shallow End Depth text box.

By default, the Deep End Depth checkbox is selected. Type the depth for the Deep End of your pool in the Deep End text box.

Deselect the User Defined Depth Areas checkbox if you want to create custom shallow and deep ends using the methods described in the section “Defining the Depth of your Pool”, on page 350.

■ Sizing you can change the Sizing properties by entering custom dimensions for your pool. In the Pool Width text box, type the width you want; in the Pool Height text box, type the height you want.

348 Architect 3D
User’s Guide

Shaping your Pool

Note: By default, Punch! Pool Wizard automatically calculates the aspect ratio to keep your shape intact. Deselect the Maintain aspect ratio checkbox to override this feature.

4 Default button returns to the pool’s original width and height.

5 When you have selected your pool’s shape and customized its properties, click OK. Your pool is displayed on the Pool Designer workspace.

Shaping your PoolThe first step to creating the pool of your dreams is to select the shape you want. Punch! offers pool tools to create a pool from basic shapes and a Pool Wizard to create a more advanced design.

Rectangle Pool Tool Creates a rectangular or square pool shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233.

Oval/Circle Pool Tool Creates an oval or circular pool shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Circles and Ovals”, which begins on page 234.

Polygon Pool Tool Allows you to define the pool shape using polylines. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as polygons. For more information, see “Drawing Polygons”, which begins on page 235.

Multigon Pool Tool Creates a multigon pool shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as multigons. For more information, see “Drawing Multigons”, which begins on page 237.

Curved Pool Tool Allows you to define a pool shape using curves. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as curves. For more information, see “Drawing Curves”, which begins on page 237.

Pool Shape PropertiesPool Designer offers a variety of ways to customize and edit your pool. You can control the shape, walls and coping (the tile lip that surrounds the top edge of your pool). Pool Designer also allows you to create and store templates, plus add colors and materials to your pool.





■ Auto-Dim checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are displayed.

Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved depths.


■ Liner Color color preview shows the current liner color. To change the color, click the preview, then select the color you want from the Color window and then click OK.

■ Water When the Fill checkbox is selected, water is displayed in your pool in the 3D view. To change the water level, type the distance you want the water to appear from the top edge of the pool, in the Level text box. To remove water from the 3D view, deselect the Fill checkbox.

Water On Water Off

■ Side Walls checkbox controls the width of the side walls. If enabled, side walls are visible in the 3D view. To change the wall width, type the width you want in the Width text box. To remove the side walls, deselect the On checkbox.

■ Coping settings control the display and size of the coping around the pool. When the On checkbox is selected, coping is displayed in the 3D view. Type the width and thickness you want in the corresponding text boxes. When deselected, coping is not visible in the 3D view.

Coping On Coping Off

■ Depth defines how deep the shape projects into the ground. This text box is only available when there are no manually drawn depths created for the pool.

Defining the Depth of your PoolAfter you have fine-tuned the shape of your pool, you can set the depth by drawing shapes, with the tools that work just like those on the Shapes Tab.

Rectangle Depth Tool Creates a rectangular or square depth shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as circles and ovals. For more information, see “Drawing Rectangles and Squares”, which begins on page 233.


Pool Depth Properties

Oval/Circle Depth ToolCreates an oval or circular depth shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as rectangles and squares. For more information, see “Drawing Circles and Ovals”, which begins on page 234.

Polygon Depth Tool Allows you to define the depth shape using polylines. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as polygons. For more information, see “Drawing Polygons”, which begins on page 235.

Multigon Depth Tool Creates a multigon depth shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as multigons. For more information, see “Drawing Multigons”, which begins on page 237.

Curved Depth Tool Allows you to define a depth shape using curves. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as curves. For more information, see “Drawing Curves”, which begins on page 237.

Pool Depth PropertiesIn addition to changing the depth of an area in your pool, you can reshape and resize the depth to suit your needs. After you’ve created a shape, click the shape to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.



■ Auto-Dim checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are displayed.

Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved depths.


■ Area Depth defines how deep the shape projects into the ground. The entire depth shape uses the specified depth value and the rest of the pool shape slope to that depth. Using various depth shapes you can create a pool with multiple depths.

Note: To create an island in your pool, type 0 in the Area Depth text and press ENTER.

■ Parallel Depth button allows you to create a matching depth either inside or outside an existing depth. By default, the Parallel Depth is offset 6" from the inside edge. To increase or decrease the Offset Distance, type the amount of space you want between the edge and the Parallel Depth.

When you add a parallel depth, the new area depth is the same as the original depth. So when using parallel depths to create a sloped depth, be sure to adjust the area depth value for each depth.



Parallel Depth added inside the original depth at 6" offset

Managing Your Pool DesignYou can easily view your pool’s volume and sizing, as well as customize drawing options.

To calculate your pool’s volume

■ Click Design menu > Calculate Pool Volume. A dialog box is displayed with your Pool Volume, Perimeter Length, and Pool Surface Area.

To customize your pool’s options

1 Click Design menu > click Pool Options. The Options dialog box is displayed.

■ Pool Liner Render Quality Move the slider side to side to increase or decrease the Pool Liner Rendering Quality.

■ Water Transparency Move the slider side to side to increase or decrease the Water Transparency. ■ Move Equipment With Pool To enable equipment to move with your pool, select the checkbox. Your

equipment stays in place anytime you move or resize your pool. ■ Move Steps With Pool To enable steps to move with your pool, select the checkbox. Your steps stay in

place anytime you move or resize your pool. 2 Configure the options and then click OK.

Adding a Ladder with StepsThe ladder with steps options are available on the Ladders tab. Using one of these tools you can add a ladder with steps to the edge of your pool. Each tool offers some variety in the rail style.


Adding Ladder Rails without Steps

When one of the tools is active you can choose the style you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. The styles offer 3-step and 4-step ladder options. Below is an example of the styles available for the Standard Ladder Tool.

To add a ladder with steps

1 Click the Ladders tab and choose the ladder tool you want. The Options button is displayed on the Properties Bar.

2 Click the Options button and choose the style you want.

3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the ladder to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the ladder.

Adding Ladder Rails without StepsThe ladder rails options are available on the Ladders tab. Using one of these tools you can add ladder-style rails without steps to the edge of your pool. Each tool offers some variety in the rail style.

To add ladder rails without steps

1 Click the Ladders tab and choose the rail tool you want.

2 Position your cursor where you want the rails to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the rails. The component is displayed in your design.



Adding a Hand RailThe hand rail options are available on the Rail & Step tab. Using one of these tools you can add a hand rail to the edge of your pool. Each tool offers some variety in the rail style.

When one of the tools is active you can choose the style you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. The styles offer various sized hand rail options, with the dimensions noted for each style option. Below is an example of the styles available for the 2-Bend Hand Rail Tool.

[

Note: Options are available for all of the hand rail tools with the exception of the Spa-Rail Tool.

To add a hand rail

1 Click the Rail & Step tab and choose the hand rail tool you want. The Options button is displayed on the Properties Bar.

2 Click the Options button and choose the style you want.

3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the hand rail to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the hand rail.


Adding Steps

Adding StepsYou can easily add steps to an edge of your pool using one of the step tools on the Rail & Step tab. To following options are available from the Register/Return toolset:

■ Perimeter Steps

■ Freehand Steps

■ Pre-Built Steps

Perimeter StepsPerimeter steps are drawn along the edge of the pool. Dimensions are display as you drag to extend the length of the steps.

Before adding perimeter steps to your pool design you can specify the Auto-Steps settings on the Properties tab. Once the steps are placed you can only edit the height of each step, the elevation of each step, and the shape of the steps.


■ Build Style button provides options for the step shape style. Parallel steps follow the shape of the pool while Straight steps create a straight line.

Parallel Steps Straight Steps

■ Stagger button provides options to control how the ends of the steps are staggered when the Parallel style is selected (only available for Parallel Steps style).

No Stagger Standard Stagger Slanted Stagger

■ Round Step Corner checkbox allows you to choose if you want the corners of Parallel steps rounded or straight. When selected, the corners are rounded; when deselect they are straight (only available for Parallel Steps style).

■ Tread Count defines the number of step treads.

■ Height defines the distance from one step to the next.

■ Depth defines the distance from the back of the exposed step to the front.

To place a wall receptacle

1 On the Rail & Step toolbar, click the Perimeter Step Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, set the Auto-Steps properties you want.

3 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the length for the steps along an edge of the pool.



Freehand StepsFreehand steps are drawn by clicking points to define the shape of the step. Using this tool you can create a unique shape to along any edge of your pool design. Dimensions are display as you drag to extend the segments of the steps. The step is placed at the current working elevation, which you can adjust before you draw, or you can edit the step’s elevation after it is placed.

For more information, see “Controlling Elevations”, which begins on page 365.

You can edit the step height and curvature on the Properties tab before or after you draw the step.


■ Height defines the distance from the bottom of the step to the top.


To add a freehand-drawn step

1 On the Rail & Step toolbar, click the Freehand Step Tool.

2 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a freehand step.


Adding Pool Equipment

Pre-Built StepsPre-built steps are placed in your drawing with a single click. All of the steps and the hand rails are combined as one component.

When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. The styles offer in-ground and above-ground options with various sizes.

[


■ Controlling Elevations■ Editing Your Pool Design

To add pre-built steps

1 On the Rail & Step toolbar, click the Pre-Built Steps Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the style you want.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the pre-built steps in your design.

Adding Pool EquipmentPool equipment is available on the Equipment tab. Using these tools you can complete your pool design by adding details such as the support system parts, skimmers, and more.


■ Controlling Elevations■ Editing Your Pool Design



Pool Support SystemsThe support system components are available to add to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. You can add components individually, or choose a pre-built support system that includes a filter, pump, and heater combined on a concrete pad.

To add a pool support system

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Pool Support Systems Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the support system you want to add.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the support system in your design.

Automatic CleanerYou can add an automatic cleaner to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.

To add an automatic pool cleaner

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Automatic Cleaner Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the pool cleaner you want to add.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the pool cleaner in your design.



Surface SkimmerYou can add a surface skimmer that is built into the edge of your pool. By default, this is added along an edge where the coping exists. Once place you can click-and-drag the skimmer to a new location in your pool.

Note: If you do not position the surface skimmer along the pool edge, Punch! automatically places the surface skimmer on the closest edge.

To add a surface skimmer

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Surface Skimmer Tool.

2 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the surface skimmer to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the surface skimmer.

DrainYou can add a drain to your pool design with just one mouse click. Drains are automatically placed at the elevation of the lowest detected depth where you click.

To add a drain

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Drain Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the drain in your design.

Leaf SkimmersThe Leaf Skimmer Tool offers a variety of options for adding a skimmer to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.



To add a leaf skimmer

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Leaf Skimmer Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the skimmer you want to add.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the leaf skimmer in your design.

Floating ThermometerThe Floating Thermometer Tool places a thermometer in your pool at the surface. Once placed you can move the thermometer by dragging it to a new position or using your arrow keys to nudge it into place.

To add a floating thermometer

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Floating Thermometer Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the thermometer in your design.

ChlorinatorThe Chlorinator Tool places a chlorine float in your pool at the surface. Once placed you can move the chlorinator by dragging it to a new position or using your arrow keys to nudge it into place.

To add a chlorinator

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Chlorinator Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the chlorinator in your design.



Liner VacuumsThe Liner Vacuum Tool offers a variety of options for adding a liner vacuum to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.

To add a liner vacuum

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Liner Vacuums Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the vacuum you want to add.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the vacuum in your design.

Liner BroomsThe LIner Broom Tool offers a variety of options for adding a liner broom to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.



To add a liner broom

1 On the Equipment tab, click the Liner Brooms Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the broom you want to add.

3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the broom in your design.

Adding Pool AccessoriesPool accessories is available on the Accessory tab. Using these tools you can add the things that make your day at the pool jam-packed with activity.


■ Controlling Elevations■ Rotating a Selection

Volleyball Net

You can easily add a volleyball net that stretches from one side of your pool to the other. A rubber band line is displayed as you draw. The volleyball net is positioned at a default elevation, which you can change after it is placed.

To add a volleyball net

1 On the Accessory tab, click the Volleyball Net Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to draw the volleyball net from one side of the pool to the other side.

Basketball GoalUsing the Basketball Goal Tool you can add a basketball goal along any edge of your pool.


Adding Pool Accessories

To add a basketball goal

1 On the Accessory tab, click the Basketball Goal Tool.

2 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the basketball goal to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the basketball goal.

Diving BoardsThe Diving Boards Tool offers a number of options for adding a diving board to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.

To add a diving board

1 On the Accessory tab, click the Diving Boards Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the diving board you want to add.

3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the diving board to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the diving board.



SlidesThe Slides Tool offers a number of options for adding a slide to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.

To add a slide

1 On the Accessory tab, click the Slides Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the slide you want to add.

3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the slide to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the slide.


Controlling Your Working Plan Views

Controlling Your Working Plan ViewsYou can control which plans are visible while editing your design. Each tab has a drop-down box that allows you to view or hide the work you’ve done in each other plan. Additionally, you can control the default plan color, which is used to distinguish components that are added from each tab.

By default, if you have created a design from a tab, it is visible on the workspace and has a checkmark next to it in the drop-down menu. To hide a specific plan or plans, click the plan(s) you want to hide. The checkmark and plan(s) disappear.

Note: You cannot hide the active plan.

To display or hide your pool plans

■ Click a tab to display the drop-down menu and click to select the plan(s) you want to view. A checkmark is displayed next to the visible plans and they are displayed on the workspace.

To hide a plan, click to deselect the checkmark and hide the plan and all of its contents.

To customize a plan’s color on the workspace

1 Click a tab to display the drop-down menu and choose Plan Color. The color palette is displayed.

2 Select the color you want to use to denote the selected plan and then click OK. The contents of that plan are displayed in the color you chose.

Controlling ElevationsThe working elevation is the elevation at which all items are drawn. Once placed, you can adjust an item’s elevation manually or use one of the pre-defined elevations to position an item accurately.

To change the working elevation

1 Click Design menu > Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) While nothing is selected in your design, right-click the Elevation Slider and choose Set Working Elevation.

2 Type the elevation you want in the text box and click OK.

To elevate a component

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the component you want to elevate (hold down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple components).

2 Click Edit menu > Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Right-click the Elevation Slider and choose Set Elevation.

3 Choose one of the pre-defined elevations or choose Custom and type the elevation you want it text box, then click OK.

To elevate a component using the Elevation Slider

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the component you want to elevate (hold down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple components).



2 Drag the Elevation Slider to the elevation you want.

Editing Your Pool DesignRather than draw each geometric feature of your pool separately, use Pool Designer’s editing tools to reshape, reposition, or re-orient existing pool elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners.









Chamfer Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.

Calculating Pool VolumeYou can quickly view the volume of your pool design, the perimeter length, and the surface area.

To calculate pool volume

■ Click Design > Calculate Pool Volume. The volume, length, and area of the pool are displayed.

Using Snaps to Draw ElementsArchitect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance pool elements are placed from other pool elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.



Adding Lighting and ShadowsAs in Architect 3D, you can customize the lighting and shadows in Pool Designer.


Using Templates

To adjust the lighting intensity in a 3D View

3 Click LiveView menu > 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.


Using TemplatesPunch! Pool Designer provides prefabricated templates for you to quickly place an original pool style. You can also create and manage your own templates independent of specific drawings you have saved. The Template Organizer is particularly useful when you’re working with multiple pool designs because you can organize your Template by category.

To use templates

1 Click the Templates tab. The Templates drop-down is displayed in the Properties Bar.

2 Click the Templates drop-down box and the Template categories and options are displayed.


1 Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Pool Template Organizer. The Pool Organizer is displayed.

2 To move templates from one category to another, open both categories using the category drop-down menu in Pool Organizer.



3 Use the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to the other. The templates are displayed under the category where you move them.

To review information on a particular template

1 Select the pool from the library and click the Info button. The Pool Info dialog box is displayed.

2 To customize the Pool Name, type the name you want in the Pool Name text box.

3 To customize the Pool Description, type the description you want in the Pool Description text box.

4 Once you have updated all the Pool Info you want to, click OK and the information is updated.

To create a new category


2 Select the folder you want your new category to appear in and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.


Using Templates

3 Type the name of your new category in the Category Name text box and click OK. Your new category is displayed on the right side of the Pool Organizer.

4 To delete a category from Pool Organizer, click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.


6 Click Yes to permanently delete the category from Pool Designer.


1 Click the Rename button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.


3 Type the new name in the Category Name text box and click OK. The new category name is displayed in Pool Organizer.

To delete a template from the library

1 Click the Delete button. The delete confirmation box is displayed.



2 Click Yes to permanently delete the pool template from the library.

3 Once you’ve finished organizing your pool templates, click the Close button to close Pool Organizer and return to the Templates tab.

To create a pool template

1 Create a pool design you want to save as a template and click the Templates tab. Templates are displayed on the Properties Bar.

2 Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Create Pool Template. The Save Pool To Category dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Pool Category drop-down menu to select the category you want to save your pool template to.

4 Type the name of your pool in the Pool Name text box.

5 Type a description of your pool in the Pool Description text box.

6 Once you’ve finished entering the information on your new pool, click OK. Your design is displayed in the Templates Properties Bar.



Chapter 27

Fence DesignerWhether it’s selecting the picket type for an ornamental iron fence, setting the railing heights on a gate, or adding color or texture to fence sections, the Fence Designer lets you customize images of fences and gates so you can tour a realistic rendering of your garden plan in Architect 3D.

Designing FencesFence Designer gives you two powerful toolsets to use in your fence designs. Controlled Detailing tools allow you to control attributes such as rail placement and picket caps. Freehand Detailing tools allow you to modify the appearance of those elements or even draw new elements.

The first step to creating your fence is choose the style fence you want. The Fence Design dialog box allows you to select basic style options to get your fence started, then you can customize each component’s property to make it your own.

Launching Fence Designer


2 Click to select Fence Designer and click the Launch button. The Fence Designer is launched.



Chapter Fence Designer27

To select a fence style and size

1 To display the Fence Design dialog box, launch the PowerTool, or click File menu > New. The Fence Design dialog box is displayed.

2 Select either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3 From the Component Style drop-down menu, choose the style fence you want.

4 Type the width and height you want in the corresponding text boxes.

5 Click OK. The fence is displayed, based on your specifications.

To create a new fence style

■ Click File menu > New. The Fence Design dialog box is displayed.

Customizing Chain-Link Fence PropertiesChain-link fences are made up of the following components: Chain Link Fabric and Frame Work. To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the top of the Properties Bar.

Chain Link Fabric■ Mesh Dimensions defines the width and height that makes up the mesh. The

smaller the dimension, the more condensed the mesh is displayed.

Mesh 3"x3" Mesh 6"x6"

■ Wire Thickness defines the thickness of the wires that make up the mesh.

372 Arc

Customizing Ornamental Iron Fence Properties

Wire 1pt Wire 4pt"

Frame Work■ Upper Frame Rail defines the height and elevation of the upper frame rail. Type the

Height and Elevation you want for the upper rail. Press ENTER to accept each value.

■ Lower Beam checkbox controls whether or not a lower rail is included. To include a lower rail, select the checkbox. Type the Height you want in the corresponding text box.

Lower Beam Disabled Lower Beam Enabled

Note: You can resize and reshape the upper and lower rails by dragging selection points using Object or Points Level editing. For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.

Customizing Ornamental Iron Fence PropertiesOrnamental iron fences are made up of the following components: Iron Pickets, Railing, and Embellishments. To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the top of the Properties Bar.

Iron Pickets■ Dimensions defines the width, height, and spacing for each of the pickets.

Note: The number of pickets that are displayed will vary depending on the width.

Note: The height is based on the original width specified on the Fence Design dialog box.

■ Iron Picket Cap defines the style, height, and width of the picket cap.



Railing■ Select the rails to be included, or deselect to exclude.

■ To define the height and elevation for a rail, click to select the rail # and then type the dimensions you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.

Embellishments■ Select the accessory to be included, or deselect to exclude.

■ To define the properties for each accessory, click to select it and specify the style, thickness, height, and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.

Customizing Picket Fence PropertiesPicket fences are made up of the following components: Pickets, Top Edge, and Back Railing. To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the top of the Properties Bar.

Pickets■ Dimensions define the width height, and spacing for the pickets. Press ENTER

to accept each new value.

■ Picket Cap specifies the cap style and height.

Note: The Picket Cap height is not available for the Straight style, as all of the caps will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Height text box becomes active.

Top Edge ■ Specifies the style and minimum height you want.

Note: The Min Height is not available for the Leveled style, as the top will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Min Height text box becomes active.

Back Railing■ Select the rail(s) to be included, or deselect to exclude.

■ To define the properties for each rail, click to select it and specify the height and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.


Customizing Privacy Fence Properties

Customizing Privacy Fence PropertiesPrivacy fences are made up of the following components: Boards and Back Railing. To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the top of the Properties Bar.

Boards■ Dimensions define the width and height you want. Press ENTER to accept each new

value.

■ Include gap between boards checkbox controls the spacing between boards. By default, the boards are placed with a small gap between them. Deselect this option to remove the gap.

■ Board Cap specifies the style and height of the boards.

Note: The Board Cap Height is not available for the Straight style, as all of the boards will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Height text box becomes active.

Back Railing■ Select the rail(s) to be included, or deselect to exclude.

■ To define the properties for each rail, click to select it and specify the height and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.

Customizing Rail Fence PropertiesRail fences are made up of the following components: First Rail and Second Rail. To access properties for each component, click the Rail drop-down menu and choose which rail you want to work on.

■ Dimensions defines the height and elevation you want for the selected rail.

■ Tertiary Rail checkbox controls the display of a third rail. By default, a tertiary rail is included, positioned between the first and second rail. Deselect the checkbox to exclude it.

Freehand Detail DrawingIn Freehand Detailing mode, you can move, rotate, or apply colors and textures to individual components of the fence or gate. You can even add custom shapes to the design.

All shapes drawn in Fence Designer can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated, layered, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately as you edit.




To display dimensions as you draw

■ Click Options menu > Show Tracking Dimensions. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. When this item is checked Fence Designer automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy to precisely place shapes in your drawing.

Editing Fence ShapesYou can edit a shape or part of a fence to reshape, reposition, and reorient existing elements.

The following options are available for editing your fence design:

■Rotate selections (see “Rotating a Selection”, on page 257)

■Moving selections (see “Moving a Selection”, on page 256)

To control layering

■ Right-click the element you want to position and choose Bring to Front or Send to Back from the context menu.

To remove fence elements

■ Right-click the element and choose Clear.

To adjust curvature

■ Right-click a shape and choose Smooth. For more information, see “Changing Curve Tension”, which begins on page 238.

To resize or reshape a fence or gate manually

■ Right-click a shape and choose either Object-Level Editing or Point-Level Editing. For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.

To resize a fence section or gate using dimensions

1 Click Edit menu > Adjust Design Dimensions. The Design Dimensions dialog box is displayed.

2 Click either Resize Using Dimensions or Resize Using Percentages, then enter new values for the width and height in the corresponding text boxes.

3 (optional) Select Rescale Freehand Geometry if you want to scale any shapes you have already drawn in the design.

4 Click OK.

376 Arch

Customizing Fence Materials and Color

Customizing Fence Materials and ColorThe following editing modes are available in Fence Designer:

■ Custom Color Tools in this mode will completely replace the original color, in your selected area, with a custom color of your choice.

■ Custom Material Library Tools in this mode completely replace the original material, in your selected area, with a custom material of your choice.

To apply color or texture to a fence component or shape

1 Select a fence component (such as a rail or a picket or a shape).

2 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar. The color or texture is applied to that shape.

File ManagementYou can return to a Fence Designer project simply by opening an existing fence design file. Fence designs are saved with the file extension *.FDD. When you’re ready to use your fence design in a home design project, simply export it to one of the custom material libraries.

To open an existing fence definition

1 Click File menu > Open. The Open Design dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives.


To save a fence image to a material library

1 Click File menu > Export to Material Library. The Punch! Fence Designer dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose the User Library category where you want the fence stored.

Tip: Add the fence to an existing Fence library so all of the fence options are available from the same place.

3 Type a name for the new fence or gate in the Material File Name text box.

4 Type a description of the new fence or gate in the Material Description text box.

5 Click OK.

Using Fence Designer Materials in Your ProjectOnce you’ve created your own custom fence or gate materials in Fence Designer you can easily apply them back in your Architect 3D project. After you’ve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab, simply navigate to the library where you stored the new image, and drag the image to the fence in your 3D view.

To apply Fence Designer materials

1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Materials from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Materials categories become available.

2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the User Library tab and category you want to view. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.

3 Drag-and-drop the custom fence material you want to apply onto the fence or gate in the 3D view window. The custom material you selected is applied.




Part 5

Enhancement & Customization PowerTools

Chapter 28: PhotoView and PhotoView Editor . . . . . 381

Chapter 29: Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Chapter 30: Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Chapter 31: Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Chapter 32: Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Chapter 28

PhotoView and PhotoView EditorArchitect 3D lets you import a digital photograph or a scanned image of your home and landscape around it. From cars to pets, windows to chimneys, doors to neighbors, you can customize your design to match your dreams. You can even place an imported image of your own backyard, so when you look out a window, you’re home.

With PhotoView Editor, you can apply different building materials onto your home’s picture. No redrawing walls, no adding windows and doors - just click and drag a new material onto your home!

Tips for Using PhotoViewArchitect 3D’s PhotoView lets you take digital pictures and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying.

■ Verify that the image is level and straight, when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial photograph is not straight, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments, until it is.

■ Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image.

■ Double-check the dimensions when importing PhotoView images.

■ Take your time masking the image; the better the mask, the better the end result.

■ Images are placed in the center of the lot. When importing multiple images, move each image, as it is placed, to avoid stacking them on top of each other.

■ Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.

Importing PhotoView ImagesWhether you want to import an image of your home’s facade to landscape around or you want to add a custom door or window, Punch! PhotoView makes it easy. You can import any image you want, even your pet or your neighbor.

To import PhotoView images


2 Click to select PhotoView and click Launch. The Open dialog box is displayed.



Chapter PhotoView and PhotoView Editor28

3 In the Look In box, type the name of the directory where your file is located, or search for the file by browsing folders or drives.

Note: As you scroll through the available images, when one is highlighted, it will be displayed in the preview box.

4 When you find the file you want, click to select it.

5 Click Open. The Properties dialog box is displayed.

6 Type width and height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, then click OK.

Note: PhotoView Images appear as lines in the 2D window.

382 Arc
h itect 3D User’s Guide

PhotoView Properties

PhotoView PropertiesOnce you have imported your PhotoView image, you have the option of further customizing its appearance. This can be done at any time during the design process. You can resize, change elevation, rotate, flip it, and perform other editing tasks. To edit a PhotoVIew image, click to select it in the design window and the PhotoView Properties are displayed.


■ Size defines the Width and Height, in inches or feet and inches, for the image. You can also resize an image manually by dragging an end point until the image is the size you want.

Note: Dragging an end point only changes the width of the image; to keep proportions accurate, update the Height value manually.

■ Cast Shadows checkbox controls if the imported image generates a shadow or not. When selected, the image casts a shadow; when deselected no shadow us cast.

■ Transparent Black checkbox controls if black masking that has been added to an image is ignored to create a transparent area or if the black is displayed as part of the image.

Transparent Black Enabled Transparent Black Disabled

■ Flip button flips the image horizontally.

■ Set Image button allows you to set a different image in your drawing. You can search for a new image and add it to the design, replacing the existing image (the dimensions remain the same).

■ Image Info button open the PhotoView Info dialog box, which shows the path where the file is located on your hard drive.

Tip: You may find it useful to store PhotoView images in the Content folder (C:\Users\<USER>\My Documents\Punch! Software\User Library\Content). The content folder is designed to be the first place searched for missing files, for instance, PhotoView files, custom materials, or custom trims.

Landscaping Using PhotoView ImagesOne way to get started landscaping your yard is to import a PhotoView image of your home. You can then embellish your design with landscaping and other elements.

Note: It’s very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see “To import PhotoView images”, which begins on page 381.



To landscape using PhotoView images

1 Import the image of your home, as explained previously, and open a 3D view window.

Note: It’s very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see “To import PhotoView images”, which begins on page 381.

2 Add landscaping (see “Landscape Plan Tab”, which begins on page 209) and plants (see “Plants Libraries”, which begins on page 78).

Note: PhotoView images appear in the 2D design window as lines, similar to interior walls.

Right in Your Own BackyardIn Architect 3D you can even look out the window of your new home design and see your own backyard. By taking a digital picture of your backyard, you can position it so when you view your design in 3D View, you’re home.

Note: In the example above, the PhotoView image is the line at the top of the design window.

To view your own backyard

1 Create your home design, using tools and techniques outlined in previous chapters and open a 3D view window.

2 Import the image of your own backyard using PhotoView and adjust the position and size of the image as needed.

3

PhotoView Editor

PhotoView EditorYou can now take a digital picture of your house and apply materials and colors directly to it with PhotoView Editor, then import it into Architect 3D.

Launching PhotoView Editor


2 Click to select PhotoView Editor and click the Launch button. The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 In the Look In box, type the name of the directory where your file is located. Or search for the file by browsing folders or drives.

4 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it and then click OK.

To open a PhotoView image in PhotoView Editor

1 Click to select the PhotoView image on the design window that you want to open in the PhotoView Editor


3 Click to select PhotoView Editor and click the Launch button. The image opens in the PhotoView Editor.

Editing Your PhotoView ImageWith Punch! PhotoView Editor, you can draw shapes to color, fill, replicate, or add materials to your photograph.

The four drawing styles available in PhotoView Editor are:

Color Tools on this tab will create shapes that add a tint to your photograph.

Fill Tools on this tab will completely replace the original color with a color of your choice.

Replicate Tools on this tab copy what is on the original photograph, so it can be placed elsewhere.

Material Tools on this tab completely replace the original material with a material of your choice.

Editing ShapesAll shapes drawn in PhotoView Editor can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated, layered, edited, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit.

To control layering

1 Click the Selection Tool and then right-click a shape to select it.

2 Click Bring to Front on the pop-up menu that is displayed to place the shape on the top of the other shapes.

Click Send to Back on the pop-up menu that is displayed to place the shape behind the other shapes.

To convert to another drawing style

1 Click the Selection Tool and then right-click a shape to select it.



2 Click Convert To on the pop-up menu that is displayed and then click to select the type of feature you want.

Editing Material PerspectiveIn addition to rotating, moving, and point-level editing, material shapes can be edited to conform to the perspective in the photograph. Click a shape to select it. This will activate Perspective Editing Mode. In this mode, there will be different colored controls that manipulate different things.

To adjust material perspective

■ Click to select the material you want to edit. The perspective handles are displayed.

■ Resize handles Red points control size and shape of the material. Drag a corner to adjust the material shape.

■ Material Perspective Green points control perspective vanishing point. Drag a point to narrow or widen the perspective.

■ Perspective Angle Blue arrow rotates to adjust angle. Drag the arrow to rotate the angle. To specify a precise angle, right-click the material and choose Change Material Angle, then type the angle you want in the text box and click OK.

■ Center line Yellow points adjust the material section in view. Drag the points to position the material view you want.

To flip material orientation

■ Right-click the material, then click Flip Material Orientation on the context menu that is displayed. The material orientation is flipped in a clockwise direction.

To restore the material, right-click the material then click Restore Material Orientation to reset the orientation back to the original direction.

To set the scale

■ Right-click the material, then click Change Material Scale on the context menu that is displayed. Type the new percentage(s) in the text box, then click OK.

To reset perspective changes

■ Right-click the material, then click Reset Material Attributes on the context menu that is displayed.

File ManagementWith PhotoView Editor you can save your personalized image as a new file or you can overwrite the existing file.

Saving an image

1 Click File menu > Save Image as BMP. The Save Image dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click OK. This saves an image of your edited file. Overlays you’ve add are saved as part of the image.

Opening an overlay mask

1 Click File menu > Open Overlay Mask. The Open Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search other folders or drives.


File Management

3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4 Click OK. This opens an overlay design you previously saved.

Saving an overlay mask

1 Click File menu > Save Overlay Mask. The Save Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click OK. This saves the overlay design you’ve added to the image. You can later open this overlay and edit it further, if needed.

Opening a custom color list

1 Click File menu > Open Custom Color List. The Open Color List dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search other folders or drives.

3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4 Click OK. This opens a colors palette you previously saved.

Saving a custom color list

Note: For information on creating custom colors, see “To define a custom color”, which begins on page 88.

1 Click File menu > Save Custom Color List. The Save Color List dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click OK. Changes to the Colors palette are saved.




Chapter 29

EstimatorArchitect 3D keeps track of building materials, as you design your home. Estimator continually and automatically tallies your expenses and building materials. This information is presented in an editable, printable, exportable spreadsheet format. Estimator also utilizes the Plan Tabs from Architect 3D, so you can easily find the materials for a specific part of your design.

As you input the material costs for your area, Estimator calculates the subtotals of each size door and window, each plant type, including sod, roofing materials, and roof trusses, and computes the grand total for the entire project.

You can even create custom pricelists, so you use appropriate vendors or wholesalers for specific parts of the job. This may be especially useful if you plan to renovate just one or two rooms. Punch! Estimator calculates each room separately, too.

Launching EstimatorArchitect 3D includes an extremely versatile PowerTool called Estimator. Estimator inventories almost every feature of your design. Prices may be higher during the peak building season and will depend on the part of the world where you are building your new home. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.



Chapter Estimator29

Launching Estimator

1 Click Design menu > Launch PowerTool, then choose Estimator and click Launch. The Setup Options window is displayed.

2 Edit the options for your estimate as needed and click OK to open the plan estimates.

■ Dry Wall Estimation By default, Estimator will estimate dry wall usage, without regard to where doors or windows are placed. Choose Exclude Window and Door Area if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

■ Wall Material Estimation By default, Estimator will make estimations, without regard to where doors or windows are placed or whether or not the walls have base trim. Choose Exclude Window and Door Area and/or Exclude Base Trim Area if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

■ Insulation By default, Estimator estimates insulation needed, without regard to where doors or windows are placed. Choose Exclude Window and Door Area if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

■ Calculate Roofing Squares By default, Estimator will estimate the number of roofing squares needed for your design. Choose Off if you do not need this calculation.

■ Floor & Deck Estimation By default, Estimator makes floor and deck estimates without regard to where cutout areas are placed. Choose Exclude Floor Cutout Area or Exclude Deck Cutout Area if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

Customizing the Spreadsheet You may find it easier to use or read the data, if you change the colors of specific areas of your spreadsheet. Architect 3D makes this easy. You can assign any color you want to certain parts of the spreadsheet.

390 Arch

Selecting a Plan Tab

To customize colors

1 Click Options menu > Set Colors. The Colors dialog box is displayed showing the customizable sections of the estimate.

2 Click the color block next to the feature you want to customize. The Color dialog box is displayed.

3 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum block to select a color.

4 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color.

5 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.

6 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the color block on the Colors dialog box.

7 Click OK. The color is applied to the spreadsheet.

To reset a color back to the default

1 Click Options menu > Set Colors. The Colors dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Reset button next to the feature you want to reset to the default color. Then click OK.

(optional) Click the Reset All button to reset all colors then click OK.

Selecting a Plan TabEstimator will automatically display features and materials used on all plan tabs of your design. You can choose to estimate specific areas of your design, for instance just the HVAC materials or just the materials for your deck.

To select a plan tab

■ Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the materials list for that tab appears.

(alternatively) Click View menu > Estimates then click the individual plan you want.

Cells Background

Text

Schedule Headers

Category Headers

Unit Cost Cell

Total Row

A
rchitect 3D User’s Guide 391

Chapter Estimator29

Calculating Construction CostsEstimator automatically calculates the total square footage for each floor of your design. The Construction Cost Per Square Foot is dependent upon variables specific to your area. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.

To calculate construction costs

1 Click the Unit Cost cell (green cell) next to Construction Square Foot Cost.

2 Type the estimated cost.

3 Press ENTER. Architect 3D automatically calculates the total and places it in the grey-shaded cell across from Total Cost.

Completing the Various SchedulesEstimator catalogs the features of your design that appear on each Plan Tab. From cubic yards of concrete, for a slab foundation, to light switches, everything is displayed on individual lines and calculations are based upon prices that you obtain from a building supply company near you.

To complete Estimator schedules

1 Click the green-shaded cell for the Unit Cost of each material or feature of your design.

2 Type the estimated cost.

3 Press ENTER. Architect 3D automatically calculates the total and displays it in the Total Cost column, then keeps a running Grand Total of each schedule.

Note: Use the arrow keys, on your keyboard, to move around your spreadsheet.

Creating a Master PricelistEstimator saves the prices you enter in a master pricelist file to make it easy to create a new estimate, after making alterations to your design. In addition, you can create individual pricelists for each building supply company, vendor, or wholesaler that you make purchases from.

To store a master pricelist

1 Click View menu > Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.

2 Type the costs from the source where you plan to purchase materials.

3

Exporting a Pricelist

3 Click Save as a Master when you have finished updating your prices. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

4 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save. The file extension is added automatically.

(optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save.

To open a master pricelist

1 Click View menu > Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.

2 Click Open Master List. The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Type a file name in the File Name text box or click to select the Master List you want to use. Click Open.

Exporting a PricelistYou can export the information contained in an Estimator spreadsheet so you can use the information in other programs, such as Microsoft Excel or Quickbooks. You can even display your pricelist on the web!

To export a pricelist

1 Click File menu > Export then click either Excel File, Comma Delimited, Tab Delimited, QuickBooks Item List, or HTML. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a file name in the File Name text box; the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

Note: All necessary graphics are copied to the directory where you save the HTML file. You will need to upload all files to your web server to make them available to be viewed by others.

Printing a PricelistYou can print pricelists any way you need them. There are many ways to customize your estimations.

To print a pricelist

1 Click File menu > Print. The Print Preview Setup dialog box is displayed.


Chapter Estimator29

2 Click to check the options you want to have printed and uncheck any options you don’t want to print.

(optional) Click Printer Setup to specify which printer you want to use. For more information on printer setup, see “Printing Floor Plans”, which begins on page 35.

(optional) Click Preview to see what the page will look like, before you actually print it.

3 Click Print when you have finished setting the options.

394 Arc

Chapter 30

Trim DesignerIn much the same way that ornate trim pieces are milled from basic lumber, Punch! Trim Designer lets you fashion trims by editing a basic shape. Modify one of the trims in Architect 3D’s libraries, or create one of your own, using Trim Designer’s powerful image editing and management tools.

Launching Trim Designer


2 Click to select Trim Designer and click the Launch button. The Trim Designer is launched.

Managing Trim DesignsTrim Designer not only allows you to save new trims for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing trim libraries.

To open a new trim design

1 Click File menu > New Trim. The Trim Design Selection dialog bog is displayed.



Chapter Trim Designer30

2 Click to select one of the basic trim templates.

(optional) Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes.

3 Click OK.

To import an existing trim design

1 On the Properties Bar, click the down arrow next to Trims then select a Trim category from one of the libraries. The Preview Bar changes to display trims in this library.

2 Double-click a trim design on the Preview Bar, to place it in the design window.

To save a new trim design

1 While nothing is selected in your design, click the Save Trim To Library button on the Properties Bar. The Save Trim to Category dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click File menu > Save Trim to Library.

■ Trim Category specifies the category where the trim is saved.Click New to create a new trim category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK. Fore more information on using content libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

■ Trim Name is the unique name for the trim. New trim names can contain up to 44 characters. ■ Trim Description is the description of the trim. New trim descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

2 Click OK to save the trim.

To export trim to 3D Custom Workshop

1 Click File menu > Export to Custom Workshop. The Custom Workshop Export dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a name in the File name text box.

3 Specify the folder where you want the trim saved and then click Save.

396 Arch

Trim Properties

Trim PropertiesWhen a segment is selected the trim properties are displayed on the Properties Bar. You can control curvature, alignment, and switch between base and crown trim designs.


■ Align To Grid button aligns the selected point to the grid.

■ Design Mode options allow you to specify the trim as either Base Trim or Crown Trim.

Designing Custom TrimsRather than drawing your custom base and crown trims, Trim Designer lets you create custom trims for your home plan by reshaping a rectangular base shape—in much the same way that trims are milled from boards. You can also modify existing trims, from the Trim Library. Using standard editing tools to change the location, shape, or angle of individual segments of the trim face, you can add graceful curves or carve precision angles into the face of your custom trims.

To nudge a trim segment

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element.

2 Use the arrow keys on your keyboard, to nudge the selection.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Nudge and then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

Note: For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”, on page 398.

To resize trim segments

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select a trim segment.

2 Click a trim segment to select it.

3 Press the mouse button, drag the segment to a new location, then release the mouse button.

To resize the entire trim object

1 While nothing is selected in your design, click the Resize Trim button on the Properties Bar. The Trim Size dialog box is displayed.

2 Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes and click OK.

To reshape corners

■ Use the fillet and chamfer tools to reshape corner points.



■Fillet Corner Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

■Inverted Fillet Corner Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

■Chamfer Corner Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

To add or remove points

■ Use the Add and Remove points tools to reshape segments.

■Add Point Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

■Remove Point Tool (For more information, see “Editing Detail Shapes”, which begins on page 241.)

Flipping ObjectsThe Flip function takes the original trim object and reverses it vertically.

To flip an object vertically

■ Click Edit menu > Flip Vertically.

Controlling Drawing SettingsThere are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify trim segments in Trim Designer.

To adjust the nudge rate

■ On the Properties Bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate text box, then press ENTER.

To control automatic dimensioning

■ Click Options menu > Automatic Dimensioning to insert a dimension for any trim segment you draw. Automatic Dimensioning is enabled when a checkmark is displayed next to the menu option.

To reset the view

■ Click the Reset View button (or press CTRL+E). Your plan is reset to the original, default view.


Viewing your Trim Design in 3D

Viewing your Trim Design in 3DTrim Designer displays your trim design in 3D in the upper right corner of the Trim Designer window. You control the 3D view in the same way you control a 3D View rendering, using Fly-Around mode.

To view your trim in 3D

■ Drag the Fly-Around pointer around inside the 3D Trim Designer window and watch the view move dynamically.

To zoom in and out in 3D, press and hold the right mouse button to change the viewpoint.

To increase or decrease the helicopter speed

■ Click View menu > Helicopter Speed, then select a speed setting from the submenu that is displayed.



■ Click the Reset 3D View Tool.

(alternatively) Click View menu > Reset 3D View.

To view a trim design using ClearView

■ Click the Toggle ClearView Tool in the 3D view window.

(alternatively) Click View menu > Render ClearView. When a checkmark is visible, ClearView is enabled.

To render a trim design in 3D final quality

■ Click the Render Final Quality Tool in the 3D view window.


■ Click View menu > 3D Final Quality and choose one of the options.


Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! DrawingOnce you’ve created your own custom trims in the Trim Designer, you can easily apply them back to your Architect 3D project. Simply navigate to the library where you stored the new trim and drag the image to a surface in your 3D View window.

To apply custom trims




2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose the trim library you want. The trim style categories are displayed.

3 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the Trim category you want. Its contents appear in the Preview Bar.

4 On the Preview Bar, click the custom trim you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home in the 3D View window. The custom trim you selected is applied.


Chapter 31

Section DetailerYou can store even more details of your home design, without cluttering your project, using Section Detailer. Create a separate detailed drawing of built-in book shelving or an electrical sub-panel, then simply place a reference marker to the detail in your main project.

Launching Section Detailer


2 Click to select Section Detailer and click the Launch button. The Section Detailer is launched and the Choose Detail window is displayed.

3 Choose the Style you want, type a name in the Detail Name text box, and choose the link size, then click OK.

Use the drawing tools, text, and symbols to create your detail.

Managing Section DetailsSection Detailer not only allows you to save Details for use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for managing how those details are displayed in the 2D drawing.



Chapter Section Detailer31

To change a detail’s link properties

1 Click the Detail Properties button. The Detail Link Style dialog box appears.

(alternatively) Click Project menu > Detail Link Properties.

2 Click one of the Styles to choose the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

3 Type a name in the Detail Name text box. This is limited to five characters.

4 Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

(optional) Select the Thick Line checkbox to set the line weight in your detail drawing to thick.

5 Click OK.

To open a new detail

1 Click the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose Detail dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Project menu > Switch Details.

2 Select the Create New Detail Link checkbox.

3 Click one of the Styles to choose the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

4 Type a name in the Detail Name text box. This is limited to five characters.

5 Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

402 Arch

Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Details

(optional) Select the Thick Line checkbox to set the line weight in your detail drawing to thick.

6 Click OK.

To open an existing detail

1 Click the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose Detail dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Project menu > Switch Details.

2 Under Detail Link Name, choose the name of the detail you want to open and then click OK.

Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw DetailsSection Detailer features a full array 2D CAD drawing and editing tools. You can create details from scratch with text or the drawing tools. Or you can create new details by adding CAD geometry to existing symbols.

Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a CAD component, be sure to turn off Auto Reset. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD components without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time. For more information, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”, which begins on page 408.


Adding 2D Symbols to a DetailYou can use the contents of the Symbols libraries to create details. For information on navigating the Symbols libraries and adding them to your design, see in the section “2D Symbols Library”, on page 76.

Using Rules and FillsYou can control the color and thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the CAD shapes in your detail drawing.

For more information, see “Using Different Lines and Fills”, which begins on page 239.

To set the fill to gradient

1 Click Options menu > Fill > Gradients. The Gradient Fills dialog box is displayed.

2 Click one of the gradient patterns to select it.

3 Click the dark color icon on the left side of the gradient display. The Color dialog box is displayed.



4 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

5 Click OK to set the first color in the gradient.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 3 to set the second gradient color.

7 Click OK.

Adding Text to DetailsUse text to add information to your detail. For example, you might specify a model number or a specific feature in your detail. Section Detailer gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your drawing using different formatting techniques for each text instance.

For more information, see “Text Font”, which begins on page 56.

Using Dimensioning ToolsA number of dimensioning tools are available to help with precise drawing as you create detail sections.

For more information, see “Dimensioning”, which begins on page 59.

Editing Section Detail ComponentsYou can move, rotate, and modify components using the array of editing tools in Section Detailer. The following options are available for editing your design:






404 Arch

Editing Section Detail Components




To scale objects

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object.

2 Click the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection dialog box appears.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Scale Selection.

3 Choose either Object Size or Percentage, then enter values to scale the object.

4 In the Scale From section, choose a location to use as the base point during the scaling operation. For instance, clicking Bottom Right means that location will remain constant.

5 Click OK.

To skew objects


2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Skew Tool.

3 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the element to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

4 Release the mouse to stop skewing the element.

To trim objects


2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Trim Tool.



3 Click the point on the segment where you want to trim (or break) the element into two separate segments.

To join arcs, lines, or polylines

1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each component that you want to be joined.

Note: The end points of each component must be nearby for those components to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”.

2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The components are joined into a polyline.


To place an element on top of another element

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on top.

2 Click the Bring To Front button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Bring To Front.

To place an element behind another element

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on the bottom.

2 Click the Send To Back button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Send To Back.

To clear elements

■ Right-click the element and choose Clear from the context menu.

Flipping ElementsThe Flip function takes the original element and reverses it either horizontally or vertically.

To flip horizontally

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to flip.

2 Click the Flip Horizontal button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Horizontal.

To flip vertically


2 Click the Flip Vertical button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Vertical.

Mirroring ElementsMirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical elements facing one another.

To mirror horizontally

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to mirror.

2 Click the Mirror Horizontal button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Horizontal.


Duplicating Elements

To mirror vertically


2 Click the Mirror Vertical button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Vertical.

Duplicating ElementsSimilar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the element you select. In the Duplicate Offsets dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates.

To create a duplicate

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to duplicate.

2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Object (or press CTRL+D).

To create a series of duplicates

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to duplicate.

2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate Offsets dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.

Note: These variables control the distance apart that the duplicates are placed.

4 Click OK. The element is duplicated at the offset you defined.



Grouping ElementsBy defining a Group, you create a set of selected elements that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing.

To control groups

1 Press and hold SHIFT and then click each element that you want to be included in the group.

2 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool. The selections are grouped as one element.

Click the Ungroup Tool to ungroup a set of elements.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Group or Ungroup.

Locking ElementsYou can protect CAD components or symbols from accidental modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited locked elements in a drawing.

To control locks

1 Click to select the element you want to edit.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple elements.

2 On the Control toolbar, click the Lock Tool to lock the selection(s) in place.

Click the Unlock Tool to unlock the selection(s).

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Lock or Unlock.

Controlling Drawing SettingsThere are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify CAD components and symbols. The Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the sensitivity of snap or join tools.

Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you to draw parallel segments, switch between object and point selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.

Drawing PreferencesDrawing preferences are default settings that affect all tools and objects as your draw. These settings are controlled in the Preferences dialog box.

408 Arch

Controlling Drawing Settings

■ Multigon Sides controls the number of sides on a selected multigon and changes the number of sides with which multigons are drawn.

■ Curve Smoothness defines the default curvature. Lower values result in less curvature.

■ Zoom Percentage defines the amount of magnification that is applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.

■ Scrolling Speed allows you to increase or decrease the rate at which the drawing window moves when you click the scroll arrows.

■ Snap Tool & Selection Sensitivity allows you to increase or decrease the snap radius. A lower value means that you must click closer to an element to snap to or select it.

■ Join Sensitivity allows you to Increase or decrease the join radius. A lower value means that you must position elements closer to join them.

■ Auto Reset Tools checkbox controls tool behavior. When deselected, you can draw concurrent CAD components without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time; when selected the tool resets to inactive after you use it.

To change drawing preferences

1 Click Options menu > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the preferences you want and then click OK.

Drawing ScaleThe drawing scale defines how the details on the screen relate to the actual size. When adjusting the drawing scale, you can choose to update existing elements in your design by rescaling them to reflect the new scale.

■ Screen Units defines the size of the objects on the screen that correlates to a real-world size. Higher values in the screen units section make it easier to draw small details.

■ World Units defines the actual size of objects in the real world that correlates to the screen size. Higher values in the world units section make it easier to draw large details.

■ Rescale Objects checkbox updates existing objects to the new scale when selected; when deselected existing objects are unaffected by changes to the scale.

To change the drawing scale

1 Click Project menu > Drawing Scale. The Drawing Scale dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the scale units and settings as needed and then click OK.

Paper SizeThe drawing area is determined by the paper size setting. Depending on your needs, you can adjust the paper size so your design is created on a realistic page. You can choose one of the four output styles, then select a standard size from the corresponding drop down menu, or choose to define a custom size.



To change the paper size

1 Click Project menu > Paper Size. The Paper Size dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose an output style and size or choose Custom and define the width, height, and unit of measurement.

3 Click OK.

To display the drawing pages

■ Click Project menu > Draw Page Breaks. When a checkmark is visible page breaks are enabled

Drawing Origin PositionBy default the drawing origin is positioned at 0,0. You can change the position of the origin by selecting a point or by manually defining its position along the horizontal and vertical axis.

To display the drawing axis

■ Click Project menu > Draw Axis. The axis lines are dotted lines drawn through the origin. When a checkmark is visible the axis is visible.

To set the drawing origin by clicking a point

■ Right-click in the drawing area where you want the origin and choose Set Origin from the context menu. The origin is repositioned to that point.

To move the drawing origin by defining X and Y

1 Click Project menu > Move Origin. The Move Origin dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a new value in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes and then click Move. The drawing origin is moved by the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.

(optional) Click Reset to reset the origin to 0,0.

To change the axis color

1 Click Project menu > Axis Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

4
10 Arch itect 3D User’s Guide

Drawing Parallel Segments


(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color.

3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color

1 Click Project menu > Drawing Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing.

To change the background color

1 Click Project menu > Background Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing background.

Drawing Parallel SegmentsYou can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD component. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the number of parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction from the original.

■ Inside, Outside, and Center specify the direction for the parallel segment.

■ Parallel Width defines the distance between the original and parallel segments.

■ Group checkbox allows you to automatically group the original and parallel segments. When selected, the segments are grouped; when deselected they are not.

To control the settings for parallel segments

1 Click Options menu > Parallel. The Parallel dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose a direction to draw the offset parallel and then type a new value in the Parallel Width text box. This controls the distance between the original and parallel segments.

(optional) Select the Group checkbox to automatically group the original and parallel segments.

3 Click OK.

To enable/disable parallel segments

■ Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a single line is visible parallel segments are disabled.

Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a double line is visible parallel segments are enabled.

Archite
ct 3D User’s Guide 411


Using Object or Point Selection ModesObject Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit.

In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits, using point selection mode.

For more information, see “Controlling Selection Mode”, which begins on page 463.

Drawing from Corner or CenterYou can draw a CAD component from corner to corner or from center to corner. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables, and most other angular components much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only.

For more information, see “Drawing from Corner or Center”, which begins on page 441.

Changing Curve TensionTo further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Unsmooth feature it is easy to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 20. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 20 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve.

For more information, see “Changing Curve Tension”, which begins on page 238.


1 Click to select an element.

2 Click the Smooth/Unsmooth Selected button then click Smooth. The Tension dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Tension.

3 Type the amount of tension that you want and then click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

Changing Grid SettingsBy default, the grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square in the Design window is one (1) square foot. By customizing the grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the detail components simple.

For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.

412 Arch

Using Snaps to Draw CAD Components

To control grid visibility

■ Click the Grid On/Off Toggle at the lower left of the window. If Grid Visible is checked, it is displayed. If unchecked, the grid is hidden from view.

(alternatively) Click Project menu > Grid > Grid Visible.

To turn off the snap grid

■ Click the Snap Grid On/Off Toggle, at the lower left of the window or on the Project menu, click Grid, Snap to Grid. If Snap to Grid is checked Snap to Grid is on. If unchecked, Snap to Grid is off.

To change the grid color

1 Click Project menu > Grid Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing grid.

Using Snaps to Draw CAD ComponentsArchitect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance CAD components are placed from other CAD components. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.


For more information, see “Using Snaps to Draw Components”, which begins on page 306.

To snap a CAD component to the drawing origin

1 Click one of the CAD tools.

2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Drawing Origin Tool, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3 Click in the Section Detailer window. The CAD component will “snap to” the drawing origin.

Note: For information on moving the drawing origin, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”, which begins on page 408.

Viewing your DrawingThe Section Detailer supports the same zoom and pan capabilities you can use when viewing your design in 2D.

For more information, see “Zooming In and Out in 2D”, on page 42 and “Panning Across the 2D Drawing”, on page 42.



Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG FileYou may find it useful to share files with your architect, builder and others involved in your design process. Importing and exporting your detail drawings to DXF or DWG format will make sharing your files simple.

To export a DXF/DWG drawing

1 Click File menu > Export DXF/DWG. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose a format and a version for your file.

3 Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is displayed.

4 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Architect 3D automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension.

5 Click Save.

To import a DXF/DWG drawing

1 Click File menu > Import DXF/DWG. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.


(optional) Select the Group Objects on Import checkbox to group all elements in the DXF/DWG together.

3 Click Open.

414 Arch

Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File

To import a Symbol

1 Click File menu > Import Symbol. The Import Symbol dialog box is displayed.


(optional) Select the Rescale to Current checkbox to use the scale currently set.

3 Click Open.




Chapter 32

Symbol EditorArchitect 3D Symbol Editor lets you create custom symbols, or modify existing symbols, for use in your 2D drawing plans. Using standard 2D design tools, you can draw the symbol, save it to a library, and even record a brief description of the symbol. You can manage your custom symbols, and the entire library of Architect 3D symbols, using the Symbol Organizer.

Launching Symbol Editor


2 Click to select Symbol Editor and click the Launch button. The Symbol Editor is launched.

Managing SymbolsSymbol Editor not only allows you to save new symbols for use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing symbols and managing symbol categories.



Chapter Symbol Editor32

To save a new symbol

1 Click the Add Symbol to Library button. The Save Symbol to Library dialog box is displayed.

■ Symbol Category specifies the category where the symbol is saved.Click New to create a new category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

■ Symbol Name is the unique name for the symbol. Names can contain up to 44 characters. ■ Symbol Description is the description of the symbol. Descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

2 Click OK to save the symbol.

Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw SymbolsSymbol Editor features a full array 2D drawing and editing tools. You can create symbols from scratch with text or the drawing tools. Or you can create new symbols by adding geometry to existing symbols.

Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a CAD component, be sure turn off Auto Reset. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD components without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time. For more information see in the section “Controlling Drawing Settings”, on page 422.


Adding Text to SymbolsUse text to add information to your symbol. For example, you might specify a model number or a specific feature in your symbol. Symbol Editor gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your drawing, using different formatting techniques for each text instance.

For more information, see “Adding Text to Details”, which begins on page 404.

Using Rules and FillsYou can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the CAD shapes.

For more information, see “Using Different Lines and Fills”, which begins on page 239.

Using Dimensioning ToolsThe Leader Dimension Tool is available to help with precise drawing as you create symbols. For more information, see “Leader Dimension”, which begins on page 61.

418 Arch

Editing Symbol Editor Elements

Editing Symbol Editor ElementsYou can move, rotate, and modify elements using the array of editing tools in Symbol Editor. The following options are available for editing your design:









To scale objects


2 Click the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection dialog box appears.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Scale Selection.

3 Choose either Object Size or Percentage, then enter values to scale the element.

4 In the Scale From section, choose a location to use as the basepoint, during the scaling operation. For instance, clicking Bottom Right means that location will remain constant.

5 Click OK.

To skew objects


2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Skew Tool.

3 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the element to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

4 Release the mouse to stop skewing the element.



To trim objects


2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Trim Tool.

3 Click the point on the segment where you want to trim (or break) the element into two separate segments.

To join arcs, lines, or polylines

1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each element that you want to be joined.

Note: The end points of each element must be nearby for those elements to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”.

2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The elements are joined into a polyline.


To place an element on top of another element

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on top.

2 Click the Bring To Front button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Bring To Front.

To place an element behind another element

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on the bottom.

2 Click the Send To Back button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Send To Back.

To clear elements

■ Right-click the element and choose Clear from the context menu.

Flipping ElementsThe Flip function takes the original element and reverses it either horizontally or vertically.

To flip horizontally


2 Click the Flip Horizontal button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Horizontal.

To flip vertically


420 Arch

Mirroring Elements

2 Click the Flip Vertical button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Vertical.

Mirroring ElementsMirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical elements facing one another.

To mirror horizontally


2 Click the Mirror Horizontal button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Horizontal.

To mirror vertically


2 Click the Mirror Vertical button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Vertical.

Duplicating ObjectsSimilar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the Duplicate Offsets dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates.


1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object you want to duplicate.

2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Object (or press CTRL+D).

To create a series of duplicate objects

1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object you want to duplicate.

2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate Offsets dialog box is displayed.



3 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.

Note: These variables control the distance apart that the duplicates are placed.

4 Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset you defined.

Grouping ElementsBy defining a Group, you create a set of selected elements that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing.

To control groups

1 Press and hold SHIFT and then click each element that you want to be included in the group.

2 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool. The selections are grouped as one element.

Click the Ungroup Tool to ungroup a set of elements.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Group or Ungroup.

Locking ElementsYou can protect CAD components or symbols from accidental modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited locked elements in a drawing.

To control locks

1 Click to select the element you want to edit.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple elements.



(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Lock or Unlock.

Controlling Drawing SettingsThere are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify CAD components and symbols. The Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the sensitivity of snap or join tools.

Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you to draw parallel segments, switch between object and point selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.

Drawing PreferencesDrawing preferences are default settings that affect all tools and elements as your draw. These settings are controlled in the Preferences dialog box.

422 Arch

Controlling Drawing Settings

■ Multigon Sides controls the number of sides on a selected multigon and changes the number of sides with which multigons are drawn.

■ Curve Smoothness defines the default curvature. Lower values result in less curvature.

■ Zoom Percentage defines the amount of magnification that is applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.

■ Scrolling Speed allows you to increase or decrease the rate at which the drawing window moves when you click the scroll arrows.

■ Snap Tool & Selection Sensitivity allows you to increase or decrease the snap radius. A lower value means that you must click closer to an element to snap to or select it.

■ Join Sensitivity allows you to Increase or decrease the join radius. A lower value means that you must position elements closer to join them.

■ Auto Reset Tools checkbox controls tool behavior. When deselected, you can draw concurrent CAD components without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time; when selected the tool resets to inactive after you use it.

To change drawing preferences

1 Click Options menu > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the preferences you want and then click OK.

Drawing ScaleThe drawing scale defines how the details on the screen relate to the actual size. When adjusting the drawing scale, you can choose to update existing elements in your design by rescaling them to reflect the new scale.

■ Screen Units defines the size of the objects on the screen that correlates to a real-world size. Higher values in the screen units section make it easier to draw small details.

■ World Units defines the actual size of objects in the real world that correlates to the screen size. Higher values in the world units section make it easier to draw large details.

■ Rescale Objects checkbox updates existing objects to the new scale when selected; when deselected existing objects are unaffected by changes to the scale.

To change the drawing scale

1 Click Project menu > Drawing Scale. The Drawing Scale dialog box is displayed.

2 Edit the scale units and settings as needed and then click OK.

Paper SizeThe drawing area is determined by the paper size setting. Depending on your needs, you can adjust the paper size so your design is created on a realistic page. You can choose one of the four output styles, then select a standard size from the corresponding drop down menu, or choose to define a custom size.



To change the paper size

1 Click Project menu > Paper Size. The Paper Size dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose an output style and size or choose Custom and define the width, height, and unit of measurement.

3 Click OK.

To display the drawing pages

■ Click Project menu > Draw Page Breaks. When a checkmark is visible page breaks are enabled

Drawing Origin PositionBy default the drawing origin is positioned at 0,0. You can change the position of the origin by selecting a point or by manually defining its position along the horizontal and vertical axis.

To display the drawing axis

■ Click Project menu > Draw Axis. The axis lines are dotted lines drawn through the origin. When a checkmark is visible the axis is visible.

To set the drawing origin by clicking a point

■ Right-click in the drawing area where you want the origin and choose Set Origin from the context menu. The origin is repositioned to that point.

To move the drawing origin by defining X and Y

1 Click Project menu > Move Origin. The Move Origin dialog box is displayed.

2 Type a new value in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes and then click Move. The drawing origin is moved by the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.

(optional) Click Reset to reset the origin to 0,0.

To change the axis color

1 Click Project menu > Axis Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

4

Drawing Parallel Segments



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color

1 Click Project menu > Drawing Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing.

To change the background color

1 Click Project menu > Background Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing background.

Drawing Parallel SegmentsYou can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD component. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the number of parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction from the original.

■ Inside, Outside, and Center specify the direction for the parallel segment.

■ Parallel Width defines the distance between the original and parallel segments.

■ Group checkbox allows you to automatically group the original and parallel segments. When selected, the segments are grouped; when deselected they are not.

To control the settings for parallel segments

1 Click Options menu > Parallel. The Parallel dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose a direction to draw the offset parallel and then type a new value in the Parallel Width text box. This controls the distance between the original and parallel segments.

(optional) Select the Group checkbox to automatically group the original and parallel segments.

3 Click OK.

To enable/disable parallel segments

■ Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a single line is visible parallel segments are disabled.

Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a double line is visible parallel segments are enabled.

Archite
ct 3D User’s Guide 425


Using Object or Point Selection ModesObject Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit.

In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode.

For more information, see “Controlling Selection Mode”, which begins on page 463.

Drawing from Corner or CenterYou can draw a CAD component from corner to corner or from center to corner. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables, and most other angular elements much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only.

For more information, see “Drawing from Corner or Center”, which begins on page 441.

Changing Curve TensionTo further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Unsmooth feature it is easy to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 20. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 20 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve.



1 Click an element to select it.

2 Click the Smooth/Unsmooth Selected button then click Smooth. The Tension dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Tension.

3 Type the amount of tension that you want and then click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

Changing Grid SettingsBy default, the grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square in the Design window is one (1) square foot. By customizing the grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the symbol components simple.

For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.

To control grid visibility

■ Click the Grid On/Off Toggle at the lower left of the window or on the Project menu, click Grid, Grid Visible. If Grid Visible is checked it is displayed. If unchecked, the grid is hidden from view.

426 Arc

Using Snaps to Draw CAD Components

To turn off the snap grid

■ Click the Snap Grid On/Off Toggle at the lower left of the window or on the Project menu, click Grid, Snap to Grid. If Snap to Grid is checked, Snap to Grid is on. If unchecked, Snap to Grid is off.

To change the grid color

1 Click Project menu > Grid Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.



3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing grid.

Using Snaps to Draw CAD ComponentsArchitect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance CAD components are placed from other CAD components. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.


For more information, see “Using Snaps to Draw Components”, which begins on page 306.

To snap a CAD Component to the drawing origin

1 Click one of the CAD tools.

2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Drawing Origin Tool, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3 Click in the design window. The CAD component will “snap to” the drawing origin.

Note: For information on moving the drawing origin, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”, which begins on page 422.

Viewing your DrawingThe Symbol Editor supports the same zoom and pan capabilities you can use when viewing your design in 2D.

For more information, see “Zooming In and Out in 2D”, on page 42 and “Panning Across the 2D Drawing”, on page 42.

Exporting and ImportingThere may be times that you want your symbol exported to DXF/DWG format.

To export a DXF/DWG symbol

1 Click File menu > Export DXF/DWG. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.



2 Choose a format and a version for your file.

3 Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is displayed.

4 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Symbol Editor automatically adds the extension.

5 Click Save.

To import a DXF/DWG symbol

1 Click File menu > Import DXF/DWG. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.


(optional) Select the Group Objects on Import checkbox to group all elements in the DXF/DWG together.

3 Click Open. The Scale menu is displayed.

4 Choose the scale you want to use and then click OK.

428 Arc
h itect 3D User’s Guide

Part 6

3D Custom Workshop

Chapter 33: Before You Draw in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Chapter 34: Drawing 2D & 3D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Chapter 35: Editing 2D & 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Chapter 36: Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 33

Before You Draw in 3DWhen you start 3D Custom Workshop, a new blank drawing grid is displayed with the floor grid active. The foreground and background colors are defined within 3D Custom Workshop. The unit of measurement (inches or metric) is defined in the home design program. If you start 3D Custom Workshop by double clicking an object in your home design program, that element is displayed on the design window.

If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open to display it on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop displays it in a new window.

The changes you make to an object occur only in your computer’s memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing, using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing with a new name, use Save As.

Opening Files and ObjectsOpening a new file creates a new blank drawing grid with the floor grid active. You can open a saved Custom Workshop file at anytime to further edit the design. Additionally, you can open 3D object from the Furnishings library to edit, save, or export.

To open a new file

■ Click File menu > New (or press CTRL+N). An empty drawing grid is displayed.


Chapter Before You Draw in 3D33

Note: If you were working on an object, you will be prompted to save your work.

To open an existing file

1 Click File menu > Open (or press CTRL+O). The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by browsing folders or drives.


To open 3D objects using drag-and-drop

1 Click the Furnishings tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.


Some of the categories are organized into sub-categories. Click to expand a category to see its contents. For more information on working with the content libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

3 Scroll through the available objects in the Preview Bar and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto the design window or 3D view window.

Saving a FileWhen you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo.

When you click the Save command, 3D Custom Workshop saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks.

To save an existing file

■ Click File menu > Save (or press CTRL+S).

To save a new, unnamed file


2 In the File Name text box, type a name and then click Save. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the POB extension.

Saving to a Content LibraryIn addition to saving your drawing file, you can save the object you’ve created or edited to one of the User Object Libraries or User component Libraries.

The object libraries are available from the Furnishings tab in the main application. In order to save the object to an object User Library, the User Library must already exist. For more information on working with libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

The component libraries are available when select drawing tools are active; for example, when the Door Tool is active, a component library of door styles is available on the Properties tab.


Exporting Files

To save an object to an object library

1 Click File menu > Save to Object Library or Save to Component Library. The Save to Library dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose the Object Library options and then click Save.

■ Library Location specifies the library where you want the object or component saved. The library you select is the library from which you can add the object or component to your design. Click the New button to create a new User Library folder. For more information on working with the content libraries, see “Organizing Library Content”, on page 69.

■ Object Name is the name that appears in the Status Bar when you hover over the object in the Preview Bar.

■ Object Description is the text describing the object. This appears in the Object Description dialog box. ■ Keywords are the search terms that make the object easy to find when searching for objects. ■ To view recently saved information, click the arrow button to the right of the text box.■ Ceiling mounted checkbox specifies that the object should be positioned on the ceiling surface. By

default, objects are positioned on the floor surface (this applies to objects only).■ Automatically Generate 2D Profile checkbox controls if a 2D profile is automatically generated for the

object. When selected, a simplified 2D profile is generated to make it easier when editing the 2D shape. ■ Automatically Set Up Preview Shot checkbox, when enabled, automatically creates the preview that is

displayed in the Preview Bar, regardless of the view orientation in 3D Custom Workshop. To create a custom preview based on the view in 3D Custom Workshop, deselect this option.

■ Preview Camera Angle options specify the direction from which the object is displayed in the Preview Bar. Note: The object always appears on a light blue background.

Exporting FilesWith 3D Custom Workshop, you can export your design drawing for editing or sharing, or you can export an image of your 3D design. When exporting a 3D image, the image is saved using the current rendering style (Textured, Wireframe, or ClearView modes).

To export a 3D rendering

1 Click the Rendering Style button to toggle between Shaded and Wireframe.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style then click the rendering style you want.

2 Click File menu > Export 3D, then choose the file format you want. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.

3 Choose the folder where you want the file saved.

4 In the File Name text box, type a name then click Save. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the file extension.



Note: The background of the file will be white, regardless of what color is specified in 3D Custom Workshop.

To export a 3D Custom Workshop drawing

1 Click File menu > Export, then choose the file format you want. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.

2 Choose the folder where you want the file saved.

3 In the File Name text box, type a name then click Save. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the file extension.

Printing Objects3D Custom Workshop prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. Your object can be printed in Textured, Wireframe, or ClearView modes. In rendered mode, you have the choice of four qualities.

To print in Wireframe mode

1 Click the Rendering Style button to specify Wire Frame.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Wire Frame.

2 Click File menu > Print > Print Wire Frame.

3 In the Print dialog box, select the printer you want to use and click Print.

(optional) Change your printer and page preferences.

To print in rendered mode

1 Click the Rendering Style button to specify Shaded.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Shaded View.

(optional) To print in Clear View mode, click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Clear View.

2 Click File menu > Print, then click the Quality you want to use.

3 In the Print dialog box, select the printer you want to use and click OK.

(optional) Change your printer and page preferences.


Drawing Grids

Drawing GridsBy using the Drawing Grids in 3D Custom Workshop you can work on any object from three distinct 3D angles. Each grid controls two axes. You can also draw or edit in 2D from any of six directions, which will make editing and detailed alignment simple.

The 3D drawing grids are the Front, Floor, and Side grids. The X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions are the dominant axes when drawing on the Front Grid. While the Floor Grid controls the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions, the Side Grid controls the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. Using these grids in concert will give you the ability to design anything you want.

Drawing on the Front GridUsing the Front Grid, you can concentrate on the X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions. You can extrude objects along the Z (Depth) axis. You will be able to tell by the tighter grid pattern which drawing grid is active.

To draw on the front grid

■ Click the Front Grid Tool on the toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Draw on Floor Grid (X-Z Axis).

Drawing on the Floor GridFrom the Floor Grid you concentrate on the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the Y (Height) axis.



To draw on the floor grid

■ Click the Floor Grid Tool on the toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Draw on Floor Grid (X-Z Axis).

Drawing on the Side GridThe Side Grid activates the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the X (Width) axis.

To draw on the side grid

■ Click the Side Grid Tool from the toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Draw on Side Grid (Z-Y Axis).

Changing Grid SettingsBy default, the Grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square on the floor plan is one (1) square foot. By defining a customized Grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the components simple. To keep things from slipping behind the active grid, use the Grid Constrain feature.

Grid settings are controlled in the Grid Spacing dialog box.

■ Grid Visible checkbox turns the grid on and off. When selection the grid is visible. To hide the grid, deselect the checkbox.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Grid Visible (when a checkmark is visible the grid is enabled).

■ Width, Height, and Depth Gridlines text boxes control the size of the grid along those corresponding axis. Type the size you want for each grid pane in these text boxes.

■ Constrain objects to the drawing grid boundaries checkbox keeps objects within view on the grid when enabled. When disabled, objects can be moved beyond the grid.

■ Gridlines text boxes control the Horizontal and Vertical distance between the individual grid lines.

■ Snap Grid text boxes control the Horizontal and Vertical distance your cursor snaps to along the respective gridline.

■ Nudge Distance is the distance a selection moves when using nudge. For more information, see “Setting a Nudge Distance”, which begins on page 437.


Setting a Nudge Distance

To change grid settings

1 On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Properties button. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Grid Properties.

2 Configure the Grid Spacing properties as needed and then click OK.

To control snap to grid

■ On the Grid Toolbar, click the Toggle Snap to Grid button. When the minor grid lines are visible, Snap To Grid is enabled.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Snap to Grid. When a checkmark is visible, Snap to Grid is enabled.

Note: To adjust the snap to grid settings, see “Changing Grid Settings”, on page 436.

Setting a Nudge DistanceWith Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and in definable increments. The up, down, left, and right selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Through the Grid Spacing dialog box, distances as small as one inch may be defined. You can set up to three pre-defined nudge distances to choose from.

To change the nudge distance

1 On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Spacing Tool. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Grid Spacing.

2 Select the radio button corresponding to the nudge distance you want to edit.

3 Type a custom distance in text box and then click OK.

To move an object by nudging

1 Choose the drawing grid you want to move along and then click to select the object you want to nudge.

2 Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the selection in that direction along the active grid.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right),

Elevation SliderWith the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric measurements.

To use the elevation slider

1 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. The Elevation Slider is displayed.

(optional) Right-click the Elevation Slider and choose the measurement increments. The increments depend on the unit of measure you’ve specified in the main application.

2 Click to select the object you want to elevate.

(optional) To elevate multiple objects to the same elevation, hold down SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate.

3 Drag the elevation control up or down until the object is at the correct elevation.

To specify an exact elevation

1 Click to select the object you want to elevate.



(optional) To elevate multiple objects to the same elevation, hold down SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate.

2 Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation on the context menu that is displayed.

3 Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen and then click OK.

To set the working elevation

1 While nothing is selected on the workspace, right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Working Elevation from the context menu that is displayed.

2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

3 To enable the working elevation for drawing, right-click the Elevation Slider and click Enable Working Elevation.

Tracing an Imported ImageIf you have an image you want to re-create and use in your drawing, for instance a scanned piece of furniture or door design you like, 3D Custom Workshop lets you trace objects directly over that image. You can import you image to one of the available grids using the Image Trace Properties dialog box. Once imported, use the drawing tools to trace the image.

Note: To view an image on Floor Grid, you must be in 2D Profile View and Wire Frame rendering style.

Note: To view an image on the Front Grid, you must be in 2D Front View and Wire Frame rendering style.

Note: To view an image on the Side Grid, you must be in 2D Left View and Wire Frame rendering style.


Tracing an Imported Image

To import a trace image

1 Click Design menu > Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is displayed. You can import an image to one of the three grids.

2 Click the Set Image button that is associated with the grid where you want the image to be placed.

3 In the Open dialog box, select the file you want to trace and then click Open. The image is displayed in the Preview Box.

(optional) Select the Image Visible checkbox to turn on the image’s visibility.

(optional) Type a Width and a Height value in the corresponding text boxes.

4 Click OK.




Chapter 34

Drawing 2D & 3D Entities3D Custom Workshop is an extremely useful CAD (computer-aided design) PowerTool. Whether you want to draw angular objects like cabinets and desks, or curved objects like lamps and round mirrors, there is a tool to match each task.

You may find it easier to begin your design in 2D and add the third dimension later. You will find the 2D design tools are extremely useful for this technique. Once you’ve drawn a 2D shape, you can convert it to 3D, creating as much depth as you want in any direction necessary.

In this chapter, each drawing tool’s function will be explained. You will also learn the Draw from Center, Draw from Corner, Object Editing, and Point Editing techniques, which will make drawing any object you want easier.

Drawing from Corner or CenterThe options to Draw from Corner and Draw from Center controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools.

Draw from Corner This makes drawing cabinets, tables and most other angular objects much easier. This method works with the

rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only.

To draw from corner

■ Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Draw from Corner icon is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Draw from Corner.

Draw from Center Makes drawing concentric objects a breeze. This method is applicable with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane

tools only.

Punch! Home Design Software User’s Guide 441

Chapter Drawing 2D & 3D Entities34

To draw from center

■ Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Draw from Center icon is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Draw from Center.

Switching Between 2D and 3D ToolsThe toolbar displays the 3D drawing tools by default. You can switch to the 2D tools or back to the 3D tools at any time using the Toggle 2D/3D Design Tools button on the left side of the toolbar.

2D Tools

3D Tools

To toggle the 2D and 3D tools

■ On the Design toolbar, click the Toggle 2D/3D Design Tools button to access the toolbar you want.

(alternatively) On the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or 3D Design Tools.

Drawing ShapesYou can draw 2D and 3D shapes to edit an object or create your own. Before you draw, choose the Draw Grid (see “Drawing Grids”, which begins on page 435) and the Draw Method (see “Drawing from Corner or Center”, which begins on page 441).

As your draw your shape, dimensions are displayed in the Readout Bar at the bottom of the design window.


■ Controlling Selection Mode■ 2D/3D Shape Properties■ Editing 2D & 3D Objects

2D/3D RectangleIn 3D rectangle drawing mode, you can draw squares and rectangles as well as cubes and boxes. You will find this tool useful when drawing tables, cabinets, counters, and more.

To draw a 2D rectangle

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Rectangle Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the rectangle and then click-and-drag to extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.

442 Punch! Home Design Software User’s Guide

Drawing Shapes

3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle and click again to place the shape.

To draw a 2D rectangle

■ On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Rectangle Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.

2D/3D OvalIn ellipse drawing mode, you can draw circles and ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches, planters, rugs, and more.

To draw a 3D oval

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Oval Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the oval and then click-and-drag to extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to draw a perfect circle from its center point.



3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the oval and click again to place the shape.

To draw a 2D oval

■ On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Oval Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to draw a perfect circle.

3D MultigonIn multigon drawing mode you are able to draw objects with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs, and othershapes with more than four edges. By default, multigons are drawn with 6 sides. You can edit the number of sides before you draw in the Custom Options window.

444 Pun
ch! Home Design Software User’s Guide

Drawing Shapes

To set number of multigon sides

■ Click the Custom Options button (or click Options menu > Custom Options) and change the Multigon Tool - # of Sides text box, then click OK to close the window.

To draw a 3D multigon

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Multigon Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point (center) for the multigon and then click-and-drag to extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button. The radius measurement will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

Note: Although you can define any number of sides, the more sides you specify, the more the multigon will begin to look like a circle.

3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the multigon and click again to place the shape.



To draw a 2D multigon

■ On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Multigon Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the shape from its center point to the size you want.

2D/3D PolygonIn polygon drawing mode, you can draw an object with any number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons, and more.

To draw a 3D polygon

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Polygon Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the polygon.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the polygon and then right-click to place the 2D shape.

4 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object and click again to place the shape.

446 Pun

Drawing Shapes

To draw a 2D polygon

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Polygon Tool


3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the polygon and then right-click to place the 2D shape.

2D/3D Closed ArcIn closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, chairs, and drop-leaf tables, for example.

To draw a 3D closed arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the Closed Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the closed arc and then click-and-drag to extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the arc to 90-degrees

3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the oval and click again to place the shape.



To draw a 2D closed arc

■ On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Closed Arc Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the arc to 90-degrees.

2D/3D Circular Closed ArcIn circular closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw circular objects that are closed within the shape boundaries. You will find this tool useful when drawing moldings for cabinets and other unique details.

To draw a 3D circular closed arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the Circular Closed Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.

3 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to set the angle you want and then click.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to invert the arc angle.

448 Pun

Drawing Shapes


To draw a 2D circular closed arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Closed Circular Arc Tool and position your cursor at the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.

2 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want, and then click to end drawing mode.

2D/3D Closed CurveIn closed curve drawing mode, you can draw enclosed curved objects and areas. You will find this useful for creating curved cabinets or furniture pieces.

To draw a 3D closed curve

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Closed Curve Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the 3D closed curve.



3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to place the 2D shape.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the lines to 90-degrees.

Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode.


To draw a 2D closed curve

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Closed Curve Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the curve.




2D/3D Open PolygonIn open polygon drawing mode, you will be able to draw polygons with an open side. You will find this tool useful for creating fences, bay windows, and other unique open-ended shapes and objects.

To draw an 3D open polygon

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Polygon Tool.


450 Pun

Drawing Shapes


(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain a line to 90-degrees.


To draw an 2D open polygon

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Polygon Tool.



(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain a line to 90-degrees.

2D/3D Open ArcIn open arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, slides, and more.

To draw an 3D open arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the arc to 90-degrees




To draw an 2D open arc

■ On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Arc Tool and use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.


2D/3D Circular ArcIn circular arc drawing mode, you can draw an arc of any radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing decorative edges, barrel planters, and more.

To draw a 3D circular arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Circular Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.

452 Pun

Drawing Shapes

3 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to set the angle you want and then click.



To draw a 2D circular arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Circular Arc Tool and position your cursor at the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.


2 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want, and then click to end drawing mode.



2D/3D PlaneIn plane drawing mode, you will be able to draw flat planes to the size you want. You will find this tool useful when adding angular details to cabinets, for example.

To draw a 3D plane

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Line Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the line and then click-and-drag to extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the line and click again to place the shape.

To draw a 2D line

■ On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Line Tool and use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

454 Pun

Drawing Shapes

2D/3D Open CurveIn curve drawing mode, you will be able to draw an open curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool useful when drawing curved ceilings, outdoor grills, and more.

To draw a 3D open curve

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Curve Tool.






To draw a 2D open curve

1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Curve Tool.







2D/3D Shape PropertiesWhen a shape is selected properties become available on the Properties Bar. You can select more than one shape at a time to edit properties on multiple objects at once. To do this, press the SHIFT key as you click points or objects.

For information on using object and point selection mode, see “Controlling Selection Mode”, on page 463.


■ Layer displays the selection’s current layer. Using the Move to Layer button you can quickly move the selection to a different layer. For more information on layers, see “Working in Layers”, on page 471.

■ Open and Closed radio buttons allow you to quickly change an open-ended object to a closed object with just a couple clicks of the mouse. Just as easily, you can change a closed object to be open-ended.

Select Open to remove a segment from a closed object. Select Closed to add a segment to enclose an open object.

■ Capped and UnCapped radio buttons control whether a 3D shape appears hollow or filled. By default, objects are drawn with their center filled, or capped. You can “uncap” objects to create a hollow shape. Select Capped to fill the object. Select UnCapped to hollow out an object.

■ Texture Mapping settings control how a material or texture of applied to the surfaces of an object. Planar Mapping applies a texture across each individual surface of a group of objects while Surface Mapping applies a texture across a group for a seamless look. Surface Mapping is best suited for objects with complex surfaces that require a lot of individual planes.

456 Pun

Applying Materials

■ Shading controls shading across multiple segments. When a revolving object is created, the shading starts over with each segment; this can increase render times. Once you’ve created a revolving object, you can smooth out the shading to create a more fluid appearance and, in turn, speed up rendering.

Choose Smooth to apply smoothness to all the segments. Select Normal to restart shading with each segment.

Smooth Enabled Normal Enabled

■ Adjust Curve button open the Curve Tension dialog box, where you can adjust the tension or straighten a selection. For more information, see “Changing Curve Tension”, which begins on page 465.

■ Resize Object(s) button opens the Object Size dialog box where you can control the size using precise specifications. For more information, see “Specifying Object Size”, which begins on page 470.

■ Move text boxes allow you to move the selection a specified distance along the corresponding axis. You can also move by dragging to a new location. For more information, see “Moving an Object”, which begins on page 472.

■ Cabinet Cutout checkbox allows you to convert a 2D shape into a cutout area in cabinets created using one of the cabinet tools. This is useful when adding a sink from one of the content libraries to an existing cabinet. The cutout must be created on the Floor Grid at zero elevation (and do not extrude the 2D shape).

■ Translucency button opens the Object Translucency dialog box where you can adjust the translucency percentage. The higher the Translucency, the more transparent an object appears.

Applying MaterialsJust like applying color, it’s easy to apply the appropriate material. 3D Custom Workshop includes both the Punch! Library and the Custom Material Library. You can drag-and-drop materials onto surfaces on the design window.

For detailed steps on applying materials, see “Applying Building Materials”, on page 91.

Note: To apply materials, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see “Using Different Views”, on page 478.

Applying Paint and Color With 3D Custom Workshop, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks.

For detailed steps on applying paint and colors, see “Applying Paint and Color”, on page 87.

Note: To apply paint and colors, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see “Using Different Views”, on page 478.



Controlling Application of Color or MaterialWith 3D Custom Workshop you can control how colors and materials are applied to your design.

Note: To apply materials, paint, and colors, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see “Using Different Views”, on page 478.

Single PaneBy default the Single Plane function is selected, where the color or material is applied only to the individual surface of an object.

To Use Single Plane Apply

1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Single Plane.

2 Drag the color or material you want onto the surface where you want it applied. The color or material is applied only to that surface.

3 Continue to drag and drop onto each surface where you want the color or material.

Wrap Single Segment The Wrap Single Segment option allows you to apply a color or material to a single segment along part of an object, as objects are made up of multiple segments, in most cases. In the example below, a white paint color is applied to a segment of the bed post.

To Use Segment Apply

1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Wrap Single Segment.

4

Controlling Application of Color or Material

2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied only to the single segment.

Wrap All SegmentsYou can also choose to Wrap All Segments with a selected color to material. This option covers all of the segments that make up a specific piece of an object. In the example below, a white paint color is applied to all of the segments of the bed post.

To Use All Segment Apply

1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Wrap All Segments.

2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all of the segments.

Grouped ApplyThe Grouped Apply method applies the color or material to all of the object’s segments at once. In the example below, a wood material is applied to all of the surfaces of the dresser.

To Use Grouped Apply

1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Entire Group.

2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to the entire object.



Note: To control how shadows are rendered across an object with many facets, use Planar Mapping (Options menu > Planar Mapping); Surface Mapping will apply the shadow to each facet individually.

Matching ApplyMatching Apply replaces all like colors or materials with the new one. In the example below, a wood material is applied to one of the drawers, and all of the surfaces with the same material are updated.

To Use Matching Apply

1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Matching.

2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all places matching the material you are replacing.

Using AutoClick PlacementAutoClick Placement allows you to tag the surfaces where you want a color or material applied and then apply it to all of the tagged surfaces at once. This offers flexibility in choosing only certain surfaces on one object or different surfaces on multiple objects in your design.

Note: To apply materials, paint, and colors, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see “Using Different Views”, on page 478.

To apply a series of the same color or material

1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and choose the category you want. Options appear in the Preview Bar.

2 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose AutoClick Placement.

3 Click the color or material you want to apply and then click each surface where you want the color or material applied.

4 Click the right mouse button to end. The color or material you selected is applied to each surface.

4

Using the Decorator Palette

Using the Decorator PalettePunch! Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other aspect of your design.

After you’ve created your palette in the main program, you can access it while working in 3D Custom Workshop.

For more information, see “Using the Decorator Palette”, which begins on page 291.

Searching for Colors or MaterialsIf you see a color or material you want to match, or have forgotten which library the color or material you want is stored in, you can use the Select Material/Color Tool to automatically find the library in which the color or material appears.

To find a material or color

1 Click the Select Material/Color Tool. Your cursor changes to an eye-dropper as you move it over the design window.

2 Click the material or color you want to search for. The material, or color, is displayed on the Preview Bar.

Punch! Home Design Software User
’s Guide 461



Chapter 35

Editing 2D & 3D Objects3D Custom Workshop makes it extremely easy to change objects once they are drawn. In this section, you will find instructions on techniques that make rotating, resizing, and other edits very simple.

You will also learn how to use layers, lock and unlock; in addition, you’ll learn to create groups that will make complex objects much more manageable. The flip and mirror techniques are also described and are useful when you need perfectly symmetrical objects.

Controlling Selection ModeObject Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object.

Object Selection ModeIn object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. This is ideal for moving a selection, or group of selections.

To use object selection mode

■ Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Object Selection icon is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Object Selection.

Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower left of your window, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click Textured.

Point Selection ModeIn point selection mode, each vertex of the object is treated separately, so you are able to move each vertex or

point individually in your drawing. This is ideal for detailed edits.

You can change the color of the point handles to make them most distinguishable or blend in, depending on your needs. For more information, see “Controlling Default Colors”, which begins on page 484.

To use point selection mode

■ Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Point Selection icon is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Point Selection.

Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower left of your window, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click Textured.


Chapter Editing 2D & 3D Objects35

To select all points

■ Right-click an object and choose Select All Points from the context menu.

To select all points on a segment

■ Right-click a line segment where you want to select all points and chose Select Segment from the context menu. All the points along that segment are selected.

OR

■ Right-click a point where you want to select all points of the segment and choose Select Segment Points from the context menu. All the points along that segment are selected.

To select all points along an extrusion path

■ Right-click a point and choose Select Extrude Points from the context menu. All of the points along the extrusion path are selected.

Selecting Points within an ObjectThe Select In Polygon Tool is a versatile tool that allows you to select objects or points that lie within another object. This tool allows you to click points to define a selection area, much like drawing a polygon shape.

To select points within an object

1 Enable Points Selection mode. For more information, see “Point Selection Mode”, which begins on page 463.

2 Click the Select In Polygon Tool.


4 Continue to click points and drag to define the selection shape around the points or objects you want selected, and then right-click to select points.

Adding and Removing PointsYou can adjust a shape and gain more control over its appearance by adding or removing points to 2D shapes.

464 Arch

Changing Curve Tension

To add and remove points, you must be in Point Selection mode. For more information on selections modes, see “Controlling Selection Mode”, on page 463.

To add a point to an object

■ Right-click the segment where you want to add a point and choose Add Point on the context menu. A point is added to the object where your cursor was positioned.

To remove a point from an object

■ Right-click the segment where you want to remove a point and choose Remove Point on the context menu. The point is removed from the object.

Changing Curve TensionTo further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve.



Curve Tension=5 Curve Tension=10 Curve Tension=20


1 Click to select an object and then click the Adjust Curve button on the Properties Bar. The Curve Tension dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Curve Smoothing > Curve Tension.

2 Type the amount of tension that you want, or click the arrows to increase or decrease the value incrementally, and then click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

To control default curve-drawing smoothness

1 Click the Custom Options button. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Options menu > Custom Options.

2 Drag the 2D Curve-Drawing Smoothness slider to decrease or increase the drawing smoothness and then click OK.

Note: When changed, the drawing smoothness affects all curves in the drawing.

Extruding a 2D ObjectOnce you draw an object in 2D you can add a third dimension at any time. The Extrude Tool makes this a straight-forward process, by simply clicking and dragging to the desired dimension. To extrude an object with more precision, you can use the Extrude dialog box to define the segment spacing, and how many segments to which you want to extrude.

4

Revolving a 2D Shape

To manually extrude a 2D object

1 Click to select the object to be extruded and, on the Standard Toolbar, click the Extrude Tool.

2 Click-and-drag in the direction that you want the object to extrude. Dimensions appear in the Readout Bar as you extrude.

3 Release the mouse button to end extrusion mode.

Note: Using the Extrude Tool always extrudes the selection perpendicular to the active grid.

To extrude an object by a specified amount

1 Click to select the object to be extruded and then click Edit menu > Extrude. The Extrude dialog box is displayed.

■ # of Segments defines number of segments want in the extruded shape. ■ Segment Spacing defines the length of each segment in the extruded

shape. Note: Specifying an extrusion value using the Extrude dialog box always extrudes the selection perpendicular to the grid on which it was drawn.

2 Specify the extrude settings you want and click OK.

Revolving a 2D ShapeAnother way to add a third dimension is by using the Revolve command. This command is useful when creating table legs, lamps, vases, and so on. Radians and degrees are two ways of measuring circular distances. One radian equals 180-degrees.

Note: Objects revolve in the direction of the active drawing grid.

90-degrees 180-degrees 360-degrees

To revolve a 2D object

1 Click to select the object to be revolved and then click Edit menu > Revolve. The Revolve dialog box is displayed.



■ Choose Degrees or Radians and type the measurement you want in the corresponding text box. Measurements are from -360 to 360-degrees or -6.28 to 6.28 radians.

■ Radius defines the size of the circle the shape revolves around. This is measured in the scale you have defined.

2 Specify the revolve settings you want and click OK.

Applying SkewTo skew an object means to slant it along a selected axis. This is a useful tool for adding beveled edges to counters, diagonal legs to tables, and so on. You can use the Skew Tool to manually drag points to define the skew, or specify values for a more precise slant.

Note: Objects are skewed in the direction of the active drawing grid.

To skew an object freely

1 Click to select the object you want to skew and then click the Skew Tool.

2 Click a corner point of the object and drag in the direction you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar as you draw.

3 Release the mouse to stop skewing the object.

To skew an object a specified amount

1 Click the object to skew and then double-click the Skew Tool. The Skew dialog box is displayed.

468 Arch

Rotating an Object

■ Horizontal defines the difference in distance between horizontal points■ Vertical defines the difference in distance between the vertical points.Note: The higher the value the more intense the skew.

2 Type the Horizontal and Vertical values to which you want the object skewed and then click OK.

Rotating an ObjectWith the Rotate Tool you can easily spin an object around any point on any drawing grid. This is useful when you want to face an object in a different direction from which it was drawn. You can use the Rotate Tool to manually drag points to define the angle, or specify a precise rotation angle.

Note: Objects are rotated based on the active drawing grid.

To rotate an object freely

1 Click to select the object to rotate and then click the Rotate Tool.

2 Click a corner point of the object and drag in the direction that you want to rotate.

3 Release the mouse to stop rotating the object.

To rotate an object a specified amount

1 Click to select the object to rotate and then or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Rotate.

2 You can rotate a selection using Degrees or Radians. Click the radio button corresponding to the system you want to use.

3 Type the angle you want to rotate the selection in the Angle text box and click OK.

To rotate an object in 1-degree increments

1 Click to select the object to rotate. Selection handles appear around the object.

2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.

Elevation SliderWith the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric measurements.

For more information, see “Elevation Slider”, which begins on page 437.



Specifying Object SizeWith the object size option you can specify exact measurements for each object, either as a percentage of the original size or by specifying dimensions in inches. This is very useful, especially when you know how large or small an object must be to fit a specific space in your home.

To change an object’s size

1 Double-click the object you want to resize. The Object Size dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click to select the object and click the Resize Object(s) button on the Properties Bar (or click Options menu > Object Size).

■ Object Size lets you resize using measurements. ■ Percentage lets you resize using a percentage of the original size.■ Size From options let you choose the direction the selection is resized

from. 2 Choose the resize method and type the values you want in the

corresponding text boxes.

3 Choose the Size From direction you want and then click OK. The object is resized to the exact measurements or percentage you specified.

Grouping ObjectsBy defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing.

To control object groups

1 Press and hold SHIFT and then click each object that you want to be included in the group.

2 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool. The selections are grouped as one object.

Click the Ungroup Tool to ungroup a set of objects.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Group or Ungroup.

Locking Objects in PlaceMany times you will want to lock an object in place after it is positioned. This avoids accidentally moving the object.

To control object locks

1 Click to select the object you want to edit.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple objects.



(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Lock or Unlock.

Hiding DetectionWhen you are working in layers, it will be helpful to make some objects unable to be selected, which makes it easier to select objects underneath. The Hide Detection feature makes this a simple process.

To the hide detection of an object

1 Click to select the object you want to hide from detection.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple objects.


Working in Layers

2 On the Control toolbar, click the Hide Detection Tool.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Hide Detection.

To detect objects

■ On the Control toolbar click the Detect Tool and then click to select the object.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Detect All.

Working in LayersUsing the Layer option, you can store different information on different layers of your drawing. The Active Layer’s name is always displayed on the Design toolbar.

From the Layers tab, you can choose to show or hide certain layers, which makes viewing and working on individual layers easy and uncluttered. Many of the functions are available through the Layer Properties dialog box. When making changes in the Layer Properties dialog box, you must click OK before your changes take effect.

To make complex objects more manageable, break them into logical layers. If you are drawing a chair, for example, you may want a separate layer for the back, the legs, the cushion, and so on.

Most of the layer management tasks can be performed on the Layers tab or using another method, so alternate methods are included where possible. These types of tasks include creating and deleting layers, controlling layer visibility, and more.

■ Active Layer drop-down menu allows you to choose which layer is your current working layer. Select the Show Active Layer Only checkbox to hide all layers except the Active Layer.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Active Layer then choose your active layer from the submenu.

■ Show All Layers button displays all of the objects on all of the layers in the workspace.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Visible Layers > Show All Layers.

■ Hide All Layers button hides all of the objects on all of the layers from the workspace.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Visible Layers > Hide All Layers.

■ New button opens the New Layer dialog box where you can define a new layer. Type a name for the layer and click OK.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties and then click the New button.

■ Show button allows you to show a hidden layer. Select the layer you want to see and click the Show button to display it in the workspace.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Show button.

■ Hide button allows you to hide a visible layer. Select the layer you want to hide and click the Hide button to remove it from the workspace.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Hide button.

■ Rename button opens the Rename Layer dialog box where you can change the name of an existing layer without affecting the objects on the layer. Type a new name for the layer and click OK.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Rename button.



■ Remove button deletes a layer and its contents from your design.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Rremove button.

To move a part of the drawing to a new layer

■ Select the object you want to move to another layer then click the Move To Layer button on the Properties Bar and choose the layer. The selection is moved to the new layer.

(alternatively) Right-click the part of the drawing you want to move to another layer, then click Move to Layer on the context menu that is displayed, then choose the layer.

Moving an ObjectYou can move an object easily, using the click and drag method or by specifying coordinates.

Note: Objects are moved based on the active drawing grid.

To move by dragging

■ Click to select the object you want to move and then click-and-drag the object to where you want it displayed.

To move by specifying the distance

1 Click to select the object you want to move.

2 On the Properties tab, type the distance you want the object moved in the corresponding text boxes. Press ENTER to accept each new value.

To align object faces

1 Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select the objects you want to align.

2 Click Edit menu > Align Objects and choose the face by which you want the selections aligned. The objects are aligned based on the component you selected.

472 Arc

Using Flip

Align Object Top Align Object Bottom Align Object Vertical Center

Using FlipThe Flip function takes the original object and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Depending on which grid is active, flipping an object varies.

Flip HorizontalWhen you flip an object horizontally, the points along the horizontal edge are flipped, based on the active drawing grid.

Original Flipped

To flip an object horizontally

■ Click to select the object you want to flip and then, on the Control toolbar, click the Flip Horizontal Tool.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Flip > Horizontal.

Flip VerticalWhen you flip an object vertically, the points along the vertical edge are flipped, based on the active drawing grid.

Original Flipped

To flip an object vertically

■ Click to select the object you want to flip and, on the Control toolbar, click the Flip Vertical Tool.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Flip > Vertical.



Using MirrorMirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects that face one another. Depending on which grid is active, mirroring an object varies.

Mirror HorizontalWhen you mirror an object horizontally, a mirror copy is created along the horizontal edge, based on the active drawing grid.

Original Mirrored

To mirror an object horizontally

1 Click to select the object you want to mirror and, on the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Horizontal Tool. A mirror copy of the object is created.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Mirror > Horizontal.

2 Drag the mirrored copy into position as needed.

Mirror VerticallyWhen you mirror an object vertically, a mirror copy is created along the vertical edge, based on the active drawing grid.

Top: Original

Bottom: Mirrored

474 Arch

Duplicating Objects

To mirror an object vertically

1 Click to select the object you want to mirror and, on the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Vertical Tool. A mirror copy of the object is created.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Mirror > Vertical.

2 Drag the mirrored copy into position as needed.

Duplicating ObjectsSimilar to standard copy/paste functionality, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the duplicate properties dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates. You can create duplicates using the default properties, or adjust the properties before creating duplicates.

Note: Objects are duplicated based on the active drawing grid.

Duplicate (on right) Series of vertical duplicates


1 Click the object you want to duplicate and, on the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate Tool. The Duplicate Properties dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Duplicate > Duplicate Properties.

(optional) Click Edit menu > Duplicate > Duplicate Object to automatically create a duplicate based on the default duplicate properties.



■ The Offset values specify the distance between duplicates. Type the distance each duplicate object should be offset, horizontally and vertically, from the original object and from each other (these can be negative values).

■ Repetitions defines the number of duplicates. Each duplicate is positioned based on the Offset values. 2 Specify the duplicate properties and then click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset(s) you

defined.

Above, the Horizontal Offset is 0, the Vertical Offset is -1'-0", and the Repetitions value is 3.

476 Arch

Chapter 36

Controlling ViewsYou can control the way you see your design in 3D Custom Workshop. These views can make editing much easier or can simply make it clearer to view specific areas of your drawing.

In this chapter you will learn to use ClearView, perspective, orthographic, textured, and Wireframe views. You will also learn how to zoom in on a specific area and how to set the camera angle.

Using Zoom and PanAt some point while illustrating your object, you may want a close-up view of a specific area. By using the zoom and pan tools in concert with the set zoom feature, you will be able to view any area of your drawing with pinpoint accuracy. With the Pan Tool, you can move the window to view a different area of the drawing without changing the magnification.

To zoom in or out of your drawing

1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Zoom Tool.

2 Click on the design window and drag up to zoom in; drag down to zoom out.

(alternatively) Zoom in and out easily with the wheel on your mouse.

Note: The location of the cursor will be centered on the design window.

To set a specific zoom percentage

1 Double-click the Zoom Tool. The Set Zoom dialog box is displayed.

(alternatively) Click View menu > Set Zoom.

2 Type a zoom percentage into the Zoom text box and click OK.

To pan across the drawing

1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Pan Tool.


Using Perspective or Orthographic 3D ViewsPerspective view is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop. Perspective views give more information about depth and are often easier to view because they are similar to a “real world” view. In Perspective View, the parts of the drawing that are nearest to you will appear larger than those further away.

Orthographic viewpoints make it much easier to compare, for example, two parts of the object, as there is no question of how the viewpoint may affect the perception of distance.


Chapter Controlling Views36

Perspective View Orthographic View

To set a 3D view

■ Click the Viewing Options button and choose Perspective or Orthographic from the pop-up menu.

(alternatively) Click View menu > View in Perspective or View in Orthographic.

Using Different ViewsUsing the rendering styles, you can literally see your design inside and out. 3D Custom Workshop’s technology includes anti-aliased, photo-realism. You can even create glass-topped tables by setting the Translucency of an object.

By default, objects are displayed in Shaded View. To speed up rendering times, you can set the default view so objects are displayed, first, in Wireframe.

Wire FrameIn Wireframe view each individual line or arc is visible and able to be changed; detailed editing of the object may be easier in Wireframe view. While viewing in Wireframe, you can control the appearance of the point handles, making them large, small, or turning them off completely.

To view Wireframe mode

■ Click the Rendering Style button so the Wire Frame style is displayed.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Wireframe.

To set Wireframe as your default view


(alternatively) Click Options menu > Custom Options

4

Using Different Views

2 Select the Start in WireFrame Mode checkbox and then click OK.

Shaded ViewTextured, shaded view gives a more realistic appearance and is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop.

To view shaded mode

■ Click the Rendering Style button so the Shaded View style is displayed.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Shaded View.

ClearViewWhile in ClearView, you can view your design in an opaque state.

To view using ClearView

■ Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > ClearView.

Rendering a 3D ViewTo view 3D objects in final quality, render the design. You change the default rendering quality, which affects rendering speeds.

To render using 3D final quality

■ Click View menu > Render 3D Final Quality.


■ Click View menu > 3D Final Quality choose one of the options.

■ Low results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output.■ High results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output.■ Ultra-High results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output.■ Excellent results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.



Using 2D Views2D Views work in harmony with the 3D Views. The 2D Top and Bottom Views are used in tandem with the 3D Floor Grid; the Front and Back Views are used with the 3D Front Grid; the Left and Right Views work with the Side Grid.

The 2D Views make complex alignment straightforward and simple. There are a number of ways to quickly access a 2D view, and it is easy to toggle back and forth between views. All 2D views work in the same manner.

■ Views Toolbar

■ Viewing Options pop-up menu

2D Top View

3D Perspective View 2D Top View

2D Bottom View

3D Perspective View 2D Bottom View

4

Using 2D Views

2D Front View

3D Perspective View 2D Front View

2D Back View

3D Perspective View 2D Back View

2D Left View

3D Perspective View 2D Left View

2D Right View

3D Perspective View 2D Right View



Setting the 3D Camera AngleWith the 3D Camera Angle options you can view your design from six preset vantage points. They are particularly useful when you need to quickly view a specific area of your design or when you want to line up multiple objects.

To change the 3D camera angle

■ Click View menu > 3D Camera Angle and choose a view from the submenu.

To return to the default view

■ Click View menu > Reset View.

To adjust the lighting intensity

1 Click View Menu > 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.

2 Drag the slider to increase or decrease the overall lighting and then click OK.

3D Top View

3D Perspective View 3D Top View

482 Arch

Setting the 3D Camera Angle

3D Bottom View

3D Perspective View 3D Bottom View

3D Front View

3D Perspective View 3D Front View

3D Back View

3D Perspective View 3D Back View

3D Left View

3D Perspective View 3D Left View



3D Right View

3D Perspective View 3D Right View

Using Fly-Around In addition to the preset 3D viewing angles, you can view your design from any other angle using the Fly-Around Tool. The Fly-Around Tool lets you rotate around a point of origin that can be defined with a couple clicks. You can easily rotate around the center of any object, again with just a click or two!

To use the Fly-Around Tool

1 On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Fly-Around button.


Note: To fly around one object, right-click the object and choose Center On Object from the context menu and then navigate using the Fly-Around Tool.

To set the rotation elevation

1 Click View menu > Set Rotation Elevation. The Set Rotation Elevation dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the Rotation Elevation you want in the text box and then click OK.

To show or hide the point of rotation origin

■ Click Options menu > Rotation Origin Visible. The Rotation Origin is visible when a checkmark exists.

(alternatively) Right-click the design window and choose Rotation Origin Visible.

Controlling Default ColorsUsing the Custom Options dialog box, you can control default colors of specific aspects of 3D Custom Workshop, such as Wireframe, point handles, grid color, new objects, and more.

4

Changing Curve Tension

To change a default color



2 Click the preview for the color you want to change. The Colors dialog box is displayed.

3 Choose a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix and then click OK. The color you chose is displayed as the new preview color.

4 Click OK to close the Custom Options dialog box.

To reset default colors



2 Click the Reset To Default button and then click OK.

Changing Curve TensionTo further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very



little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve.


Using Nudge and the GridOnce you’ve placed an object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Nudging a Selection”, which begins on page 256.

Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.

Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects and snapping objects to the grid. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 52.


Glossary

Numerics

3D cutaway sliderA feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to peel away layers of your design. Using the icon above the slider, you can control the direction from which the cutaway originates. Also called “Dollhouse View.”

3D fly around view A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to move around and view your entire design from above. You can establish views from any angle and save views for future use. See also 3D walk through.

3D View 3D View is a tool that allows you to move around and view your design in photo-realistic 3D. There are three window size options for viewing in 3D View: 3D Quarter View, Split Plan, and 3D Full View. Using 3D View you can add colors and materials to the objects and entities in your design, including walls, furniture, roofs, walkways, and much, much more. See also 3D fly around, 3D walk through, accessory, material.

3D walk through A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to move around and view your design as if you were walking through it. You can establish views from any angle and save views for future use. See also 3D fly around view.

A

accessory Decorative items such as drapes, shutters, or wall art that you can place in Punch! 3D View. Accessories are designed to “track the walls”, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls.

annotationA drawing component that gives information about the drawing. Examples of annotations include dimensions, text, and leaders.

arc An entity consisting of two points connected by a gradually curved segment. Arcs can be used to create interior and exterior walls, staircases, railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and driveways as well as retaining walls. See also circular arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve.

AutoClick Placement A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to quickly add selected objects, plants, trim, colors, and materials to your design with one click.

B

baluster One of a series of vertical supports between posts for a handrail.

beam A structural element that helps support a building or heavy load and take the weight off the walls or roof above. Punch! allows you to create beams made of steel, wood, or a custom material.

building padAn area of firm, level ground upon which a building’s foundation is made.

C

cased opening A door-shaped opening in a wall, which is framed like a doorway.

center point A center point is a point within a circle, from which the radius and equidistance can be determined. See also circle, curve.

circle A geometric entity defined by a center point and a radius. Punch! allows you to convert circles to walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. A circle differs from an oval in that a circle’s points are equidistant from the center point. See also curve, arc, circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon.

circular arc An entity consisting of a segment between two points on a circle. Circular arcs can be converted into interior and exterior walls, staircases, railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and driveways, as well as retaining walls and many more components. See also arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve.

ClearViewA feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to display your project in a semi-transparent mode. ClearView allows you to see nearby surfaces, even while items or surfaces behind them are also visible.

clipboard A temporary storage area for data you have cut or copied. A clipboard can only hold one item at a time. See also paste, edit menu.


Glossary

codec An acronym for Compression/Decompression, is a program that analyzes large files and programs for repetition and redundancies. When found, they are replaced with a formula to reduce or compress the number of bytes the file or program consumes when stored. When the file or program is open or recalled, the formula activates or decompresses the information so it appears as it was originally. See also, animator.

color ramp A color selection method in which you choose a color from a spectrum organized by shade and hue, then use the color library to find the correct shade. Colors are displayed from light to dark.

compass A feature that allows you to orient your design to north. You can establish the true north setting for your design, which will affect the position of the sun and the shadows, as well as determine the best location for a deck, pool, or large windows. See also true north.

componentA representation of a “real-world” item such as a door, or window. Components are available on the various plan toolbars. Typically different styles are available and properties can be edited on the Properties tab.

contentRealistic 3D features such as drapes, wainscoting, furniture, paint, and other real-world items that can be viewed in your 3D View window.

curve A geometric entity consisting of a smoothly sloping segment. Punch! allows you to create curves and convert them to walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also circle, arc, circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon.

curve tension The amount of slope in a curved segment. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50, with 1 equaling only a slightly curved segment, and 50 equaling a greatly-exaggerated curve.

D

Decorator Palette A 3D View feature that allows you to organize and store colors and materials for your 3D design.

diameter A geometric measurement that describes the distance, through the center, between points on a circle. See also circle.

dimension An annotation that describes the length, width, or height of an object or entity.


dollhouse view See 3D cutaway slider.

door headerSee header.

dormer A small window set vertically into smaller roof sections that protrude from the main roofline. See also gable roof, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

drag-and-drop Drag-and-drop is a manual action performed using your mouse, to move an object or entity from one location to another. You select the object or entity, press and hold your left mouse button, then drag your mouse to the desired location and release the mouse button to drop the object.

drawing scaleThe ratio between the size of your drawing screen and the real-world object you are drawing. Higher values on the screen units side make it easier to draw small details. Higher values on the world units side make it easier to draw large details. Also called plan scale.

DWGThe binary file format used by AutoCAD.

DXFAn ASCII- or binary-based file format developed by Autodesk, Inc. and widely supported by CAD programs.

E

elevation A measurement that describes an object or entity’s distance above or below the working level. Topographic elevation refers to an object or entity’s distance above or below sea level. Punch! allows you to control the elevation of everything, from your foundation to a window or light switch.

ellipseSee oval.

entity2D items such as lines, arcs, and circles that have not been assigned properties and do not display in 3D. See also object.

extrude To convert a two-dimensional shape into a three-dimensional object by giving the object depth. Extrude is available in 3D Custom Workshop.

F

fill Punch! defines the term “fill” in two separate contexts. When drawing geometric entities, “fill” refers a solid color or hatch pattern that is displayed inside of a closed entity, such as a rectangle or circle. When drawing topography objects, “fill” is a man-made deposit of natural soils or rock products and waste materials used to raise an area of land or to provide a bed for plants or a pool.

flipAn editing feature that allows you to select an object or shape and reverse it horizontally or vertically.

floor cutoutAn opening in the floor used to allow stair access or to create a loft.

fly aroundSee 3D fly around.

foundation An architectural structure that transmits loads from a building to the underlying ground. It supports the weight of the building and provides stability.

framing beamSee beam.

free rotateAn editing feature that allows you to rotate an object or entity, by clicking and dragging.

G

gable roof A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of equal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are supported by two equally-sized triangular wall extensions, known as gables. See also dormer, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

gambrel roof A roof defined by four pitches, two on each side. The bottom slopes of each side are more steep than the top slopes. Gambrel roofs are common on barns. See also dormer, gable roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

gridA visual drawing aid consisting of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines. In 2D plan view, grids are always oriented on the ground. 3D grids allow you to draw on the front or sides (lateral) of an object. See also Snap to Grid.

H

headerA structural element above a door or window that transfers stress to the load-bearing studs on either side of the opening.

hip roof A roof defined by four sloped planes meeting at a ridge peak. A hip roof is supported by hip rafters at each of the four corners. See also dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof, roof pitch.

hvac An acronym for heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning. A construction term that refers to objects associated with temperature control and air flow throughout a building, such as air ducts, air conditioners, furnaces, and so on.

J

joinAn editing procedure in which two arcs, lines, or polylines, whose end points are nearby, are converted into a single entity. See join sensitivity.

join sensitivity A setting that determines the acceptable distance between the end points of two entities, before they can be joined.

joist A structural element that runs horizontally in support of ceiling or floor. A joist is typically supported by a beam. See beam, rafter.

L

line A geometric entity consisting of two points, connected by a straight segment. Punch! lets you use lines to define property boundaries, animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects may be comprised of lines with additional properties, such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, ovals, polygons, polylines, rectangles, squares.

M

material A material is a textured or decorated representation that affects an object or component’s appearance. Brick, stone, carpet, fabric, wood, and grass are all examples of materials Punch! offers to enhance and customize your design. See also color tab, paint tab.


Glossary

mirrorAn editing feature that allows you to select an object or shape and place a horizontally or vertically reversed copy of it.

multigon A geometric entity consisting of multiple vertices, connected by straight line segments. Punch! allows you to convert multigons to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. Also called a polygon. See also arc, circle, oval, polylines, rectangle, square, curve, detail tab.

N

notation An annotation in the form of text, that can be used as a label, reminder, or description. You may include any type of information you want for yourself or anyone viewing your design.

nudge An editing feature that allows you to use the arrow keys to move a selection one grid unit to the left, right, top, or bottom. When Snap to Grid is turned off, Nudge moves the object or feature one pixel at a time, instead of one grid unit. See also grid, Snap to Grid.

O

object A representation of a “real-world” item available from the Furnishings library. An object may be comprised of entities, such as lines, circles, and polylines in 2D, but in 3D View, the object will be displayed as a realistic item. See also entity.

object selection mode An editing feature that allows you to control the size and location of an entire object. Using object selection mode, you can modify the size and location, without affecting the proportion. See also point selection mode.

offset dimensionAn annotation consisting of a length dimension that appears at a specific distance from the object or component it is measuring.

opacity A measure of an object’s transparency. The more opaque an object is, the less transparent it is. See also translucent, transparent.

organizer A file management feature that allows you to create custom categories to sort and store templates in some of the PowerTools. This is useful when working with different designs and while working with an assortment of templates.

ovalA geometric entity consisting of a closed curve that resembles a flattened circle. Punch! lets you use ovals to define property boundaries,


animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects may be comprised of lines with additional properties, such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, multigons, polylines, rectangles, squares.

P

paletteA collection of colors and materials you choose and organize, based on your design needs. Creating a palette is very helpful when working with and applying a variety of colors and materials throughout your design, because you can organize the contents into groups and name each group, based on where it belongs in your design. See also 3D View.

pan toolA viewing tool that lets you scroll, horizontally or vertically, over your design. See also zoom tool.

plan viewA 2D representation of a design in which the drawing is viewed from above.

plan scaleSee drawing scale.

PlantFinderA sorting feature that allows you to display only plants that meet your criteria. For instance, you can use the PlantFinder to narrow the offerings to only those plants that require only minimal sunlight.

polygonSee multigon.

PowerTool An add-on application that allows you to enhance your Punch! project.

proxy settings A virtual buffer between your computer and the information you are accessing on the Internet. Proxy settings can be customized to restrict your computer from certain information.

R

rafterA structural element that extends from the top of a wall to the ridge peak and supports a roof.

rectangle A geometric entity consisting of four points, connected by four straight line segments. Punch! allows you to convert rectangles to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc, circle, oval, multigon, polyline, multigon, square, curve, detail tab.

redoTo reverse the effects of an undo command. See also undo.

reference gridSee grid.

rim joist A structural element that ties the ends of floor trusses together. See also framing beam, beam.

roof pitch The angle of a roof commonly expressed as a ratio of vertical rise to horizontal run. A pitch of 8:12 means that the roof rises 8” for 12” of horizontal run.

room templateA pre-drawn design, for a kitchen, bath, or other room, that you can place in your drawing, then customize to fit your own design.

S

saltbox roofA roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of unequal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are supported by two irregularly-sized triangular wall extensions. See also dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

scale See drawing scale.

Snap to GridAn editing feature that allows you to place items at regular points in your drawing. When Snap to Grid is turned on, items that are placed in the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on.

square A polygon in which all four sides are of equal length. Punch! allows you to convert squares to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc, circle, curve, detail tab, oval, multigon, polyline, rectangle.

stud A structural element that runs vertically in support of the walls. See also framing beam, joists.

symbol2D representations of 3D objects such as furniture, doors, or electrical outlets.

T

template See room template.

texture A material surface, such as wood or brick, applied to a 3D wall or object. See also material.

translucent A characteristic of a material or object that describes light’s ability to pass through it. Translucency differs from transparency in that a transparent object, such as clear glass, can be seen through, while a translucent object, such as frosted glass, only allows light to pass through. See also transparent, opacity.

transparentA characteristic of a material or object that describes your ability to see through it. See also translucent, opacity.

true north A navigational term referring to the direction of the North Pole relative to the navigator’s position. See also compass.

truss A structural element that helps support a roof, top floor, or beam. A truss is designed in a triangular shape. See also, beam, joist.

U

undoTo reverse the effects of the most recent draw or edit operation. Punch! allows you to undo up to 50 operations. See also undo parameters.

undo parametersA setting that allows you to determine the number of operations you can undo. Punch! allows you to undo up to 50 operations; however, higher values may impact performance.

unit of measurement The notation system used to enter and display distances, angles, and areas. Punch! allows you to select either English, to display measurements using feet and inches, or Metric, to display measurements using meters.

URL An acronym for Uniform Resource Locator, which specifies a website’s unique address. Typically, URLs are prefaced by http://www.

USDA zone mapsA method for determining hardiness zones. Hardiness zones are determined based on average temperature and amount of sunlight.


Glossary

V

virtual ruler A visual drawing aid that allows you to determine lengths, in feet and inches. The virtual ruler can be positioned in any way and extended to reach from one end of a design to the other.

VRMLVirtual Reality Modeling Language, a standard file format for representing 3D objects on the World Wide Web.

W

wainscoting A decorative interior wall surface, typically made of wood, that contrasts with the wall surface above it.

walk-through See 3D walk through.

window grill The vertical and horizontal strips in a window that separate the panes of glass. Punch! allows you to customize your window grill style, so your window has one large piece of glass, or multiple panes.

window headerSee header.

window moldingThe wood casing around the outside of a window opening.

working elevationSee elevation.

working floor A working floor is a term that describes which level of your design you are currently working on.

Z

zone mapSee USDA zone map.

zoom factorA setting that allows you to control how much magnification is applied each time you click the zoom tool.


zoom tool A viewing tool that allows you to magnify your drawing.

Index

Numerics2D objects, convert to 3D (3D Custom Works-hop) 466

2D view 41

pan 42

reset view 42

viewing options (3D Custom Workshop) 480

zoom 42

3D animation path 288

3D Custom WorkshopAutoClick Placement 460

Decorator Palette 461

floor grid 435

front grid 435

save objects to library 432

side grid 436

3D rendereffects 284

3D selection tool 47

3D view 43

camera angle 274

cutaway slider 45

fly-around 272

in QuickStart 107

lighting intensity (3D Custom Workshop) 482

lighting intensity (Fireplace Wizard) 337

print 37

save view 295

shadows, adding 287

show/hide ceiling (QuickStart) 108

viewing speed 275

visible components 294

walk-through 271

3-point freehand roof tool 185

4-point freehand roof tool 185

Aaccess QuickPalette 95

accessories, windows 138

add point 241

addition, place automatically 123

aerial view, elevation 272

age, customizing plant 85

air conditioner, adding 197

air ducts, adding 193

align text 58

angled text 57

animation path 288

annotations 56

applymaterials 91

materials (3D Custom Workshop) 457

paint colors 87

arccircular (3D Custom Workshop) 452

drawing in 2D 235

open arc (3D Custom Workshop) 451

auto activate tool options 27

Auto Reset Tools (Door Designer) 303

Auto Reset Tools (Window Designer) 311

auto roofin QuickStart 108

on/off 182

auto-ceilingin Ceiling Designer 318

on/off 122

AutoClick Placement (3D Custom Workshop) 460

Auto-Elevate (Ceiling Designer) 323

auto-floor, on and off 122

automatic dimensioningchange font 65

turning off 63

automatic pool cleaner, adding (Pool Designer) 358

automation touch-panel, adding 167

auto-snap


Index

on/off 54

options 53

Bback view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

backup generator panel, adding 168

backup generator, adding 168

barrel ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320

base elevation, floors 145

base trim 86

baseboard heater 198

basic terminology 15

basketball goal, adding (Pool Designer) 363

bathroom (QuickStart) 107

bathtubs, adding 176

battery power supply, adding 170

bay wall 115

beamstiffener (foundation) 111

beam (framing)material type 246

size 246

bedroom (QuickStart) 107

blinds 138

blur factor (depth of field) 283

bottom view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

break a wall 124

bring to front 240

inPhotoView Editor 385

build green 29

Ccable jack 157

calculate pool volume (Pool Designer) 352

calculating construction costs 392

calculating square footage 266

camera (PhotoView) 381

camera angle 274

in 3D Custom Workshop 482

ceilingauto-ceiling in Ceiling Designer 318

auto-ceiling on/off 122

ceiling beam (Ceiling Designer) 320

ceiling cutout (Ceiling Designer) 319

Ceiling Designer3D render style 324

creating new 318

lighting intensity 325

navigation speed 324


organize templates 325

show/hide 3D components 324

ceiling elevations, define (Ceiling Designer) 323

ceiling fan, adding 156

ceiling height, setting 145

ceiling speaker, adding 162

chain-linked fence (Fence Designer) 372

chamfer 241

in Door Designer 305

in Mantel Designer 342

in Window Designer 313

chimney dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 335

chlorinator, adding (Pool Designer) 360

circledrawing in 2D 234

circular arcdrawing in 2D 236

drawing in 3D Custom Workshop 452

circular closed arcdrawing in 3D Custom Workshop 448

ClearViewin 3D Custom Workshop 478

ClearView render style 275

clipboard, copy/paste 255

closed arcdrawing in 3D Custom Workshop 447

closet (QuickStart) 107

coloradding (Fence Designer) 377

controlling in 3D Custom Workshop 484

plan layer 67

printing plan in color 35

reset all 68

search in 3D Custom Workshop 461

color ramp 88

color scheme, interface 28

colors, controlling (3D Custom Workshop) 484

columnadding 143

adding support column (framing) 248

cap, shaft, base properties 144

edit size 144

material, customizing (framing) 248

size, specifying (framing) 248

construction costs, calculating (Estimator) 392

construction materials (RealModel) 297

content folder 383

context-sensitive help 15

context-sensitive videos 16

contour render style 278

convert, degrees to radians (3D Custom Works-hop) 467

copy to clipboard 255

copying objects between floors 260

create ceiling category (Ceiling Designer) 326

create mantel category (Mantel Designer) 344

create template, ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 328

crown trimadding 86

remove 87

crown trim, remove 87

cursor dimension, on and off 63

curtains 138

curvedrawing in 2D 237


curve tension 238


curved edging (landscape) 220

curved wall 115

custom color palettein Fireplace Wizard 336

custom color, adding (Fence Designer) 377

customizing spreadsheet colors (Estimator) 390

cutaway slider 45

cutoutceiling (Ceiling Designer) 319

floor 137

roof 188

Ddeactivate undo 255

deckadd steps 204

deck cut-out 207

deck height 204

handrail height 204

handrails include/remove 204

railings, adding 205

skirt trim 204

staircase, editing 207

step height 205

deck plan tab 201

deck properties 250

decorator palette 291


default ceiling height 145

default colors and materials 96

default views (Fireplace Wizard) 337

define ceiling elevations (Ceiling Designer) 323

delete point 241

dental face (Mantel Designer) 340

depth of field 283

depth, pool (Pool Designer) 350

design options 268

detail plan tab 233

detailscreating (Section Detailer) 401

link properties (Section Detailer) 401

opening (Section Detailer) 401

detect all (3D Custom Workshop) 470

diameter dimension 61

digital picture, importing (PhotoView) 381

dimension increment, defining (Fireplace Wi-zard) 331

dimensionsadding between walls 59

change endpoint 59

hiding tiered exterior measurements 63

hiding, measurement indicators 59

room area 59

room dimensions 59

show, measurement indicators 59

walls 63

windows and doors 63

dimensions, display (Fence Designer) 376

dining room (QuickStart) 107

displacement 284

display settings 18

diving board, adding (Pool Designer) 363

dollhouse view 45

dome camera, adding 163

dome ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320

Door Designer 303

doors 125

hiding dimensions 59

organizing doors (Door Designer) 307

dormer, adding to roof 186

drag-and-dropartwork 77


Index

objects 74

wall accessories 77

drainadding (Pool Designer) 359

floor, adding 172

drapes 138

drawing from centerin 3D Custom Workshop 441, 466

drawing from cornerin 3D Custom Workshop 438, 441

in Section Detailer 412

in Symbol Editor 426

drawing mantel shapes 340

drawing precision (Door Designer) 306

drawing scale 263

drawing shapes in 3D Custom Workshop 441

driveway 218

ducts, adding 193

duplicate properties (3D Custom Workshop) 475

duplicatingin 3D Custom Workshop 475

in Section Detailer 407


Eedging 220

flip direction 220

style 220

vary heights 220

edit2D drawing 255

3D objects 75

3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 463

ceilings (Ceiling Designer) 322

material perspective (PhotoView Editor) 386

edit toolbar 26

electrical plan tab 149

elevateentire floor 258

objects 258

to an existing surface 258

Elevation Bar 258

elevation, aerial view 272

ellipses, see drawing circles and ovals 234

enclosing, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 456

english units 264


Estimator 389

excavate topography 232

existing files, opening 31

exiting 32

exporta pricelist (Estimator) 393

fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop (Fire-place Wizard) 338

mantel to 3D Custom Workshop (Mantel Designer) 346

exterior wall length, resize 120

extra scene lighting 287

extruding, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 466

Fface dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 332

family room (QuickStart) 107

fan, ceiling 156

features, moving between plans 261

Fence Designer 371

adding colors and materials 377

fence propertiespicket (Fence Designer) 374

privacy (Fence Designer) 375

rail (Fence Designer) 375

fencesadding (Fence Designer) 371

change style 223

drawing 222

resizing (Fence Designer) 376

styles (Fence Designer) 372

file format (PhotoView) 381

filesnew 31

opening 31

printing 35

saving 33

fill region 211

fillet 241




fillsreshaping fill region 211

filter downloaded content 27

filter selections 55

find applied tool 90

firebox dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 332

fireplace dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 331

fireplace properties and dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 332

flat roof 189

flat screen television, adding 160

flipin 3D Custom Workshop 473



in Trim Designer 398


PhotoView image 383

flip entire plan 262

floating thermometer, adding (Pool Designer) 360

flood lights, adding 153

floor cutout, drawing 137

floor drains 172

floor grid (3D Custom Workshop) 435

floor plan tab 115

Floor Plan Trace 267

floor slab/joist thickness 145

floor speaker, adding 162

flooringdrawing 136

joists 246

floorsadd bottom floor 147

add top floor 147

base elevation 145

delete floor 147

edit floor properties 145

insert new 147

flowers, adding 78

fly-aroundcenter of reference 272



speed 275

follow topography 259

foundation (framing)joist size 251

material 251

foundation piers 112

four-point freehand roof tool 185

framing beam 245

framing material 249

foundation 251

framing render style 275

free rotate 257

freehand roof tool 184

freeze detector, adding 169

front grid (3D Custom Workshop) 435

front view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

furniture, adding 74

Ggable ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320

gambrel roof 191

garage (QuickStart) 107

gas bib 171

gates 222

adding (Fence Designer) 371

resizing (Fence Designer) 376

glass break detectorceiling, adding 165

wall, adding 164

going green 29

gradient fillin Section Detailer 403

green tips 29

gridsettings 52

settings (3D Custom Workshop) 436

settings (Section Detailer) 412

settings (Symbol Editor) 426

show/hide grid 52

show/hide grid (Section Detailer) 413

show/hide grid (Symbol Editor) 426

snap grid 52

ground fill region 211

grouped apply (3D Custom Workshop) 458

grouping objects (3D Custom Workshop) 470

growing plants 85

Hhallway (QuickStart) 107

hand rails, adding (Pool Designer) 354

hardiness zone maps 82

hatch render style 278

hearthdimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 333

include/exclude (Fireplace Wizard) 333


Index

heat detector, adding 166

heat pump, adding 197

heating units, adding 197

hide cutaway slider 46

hide detection (3D Custom Workshop) 470

hide features in 3D 295

hide Floor Plan Trace image 268

hide layers (3D Custom Workshop) 472

hide plan layers 41

hide room name 59

hip ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320

home plans, sample 31, 109

home security, adding 163

home theater, adding 160

hose bib, adding 171

hot water heater, adding 179

how to estimate materials needed 392

How-To Center 17

hvac tab 193

Iidentify color, material, plant in 3D 90

importFloor Plan Trace 267

image 342

image (Fence Designer) 377

image (PhotoView) 381

materials 92

objects 33

POB file 33

insert new floor 147

insert PhotoView image 381

insert point (Mantel Designer) 342

installing software 14

insulation, wall 249

intensity, lightingin 3D Custom Workshop 482

in Fireplace Wizard 337

in Pool Designer 367

intercom, adding 169

interface color scheme 28

interrupt rendering 277

inverse fillet 241




Jjacks, phone and cable 157


join sensitivity (Door Designer) 306

join shapesin Door Designer 305, 313

joist (framing)angle 247

material type 247

rim-joist 247

size 247

spacing 247

Kkitchen (QuickStart) 107

Llabel leader dimension 62

ladder (Pool Designer)with steps 352

without steps 353

landscape plan tab 209

Landscape Quote 86

landscape, designing 209

laser alignment on/off 55

laundry room (QuickStart) 107

layershiding (3D Custom Workshop) 471, 472

renaming (3D Custom Workshop) 471

working in layers (3D Custom Workshop) 471

working with (3D Custom Workshop) 471

leader dimension 61

edit label text 62

endpoint style 62

label text alignment 62

leader type 62

update object label 62

leaf skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 360

left view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

length dimension 61

libraries tab 27

library paneling 86

remove 87

lightingadding (Fireplace Wizard) 337

adding interior 153

adding outdoor 286

adding outdoor (Pool Designer) 366

adjusting ambient light (outdoor) 286

adjusting ambient light(outdoor) 286

adjusting intensity (3D Custom Workshop)

482

adjusting intensity (Fireplace Wizard) 337

adjusting intensity (Mantel Designer) 343

adjusting intensity (outdoor) 286

adjusting intensity (outdoor) (Pool Desi-gner) 367

adjusting sun’s shadow (outdoor) 286

all fixtures on or off 287

daytime (outdoor) 286

nighttime (outdoor) 286

linestyle 239

weight 239

line, drawing in 2D 234

liner broom, adding (Pool Designer) 362

liner vacuum, adding (Pool Designer) 361

link properties (Section Detailer) 401

living room (QuickStart) 107

load bearing wall 249

locate plant 83

lock objects (3D Custom Workshop) 470

log home components 77

Lot Properties 265

Mmantel

dental face (Mantel Designer) 340

dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 334

include (Fireplace Wizard) 334

projection (Mantel Designer) 343

shape (Mantel Designer) 340

manual activate tool options 27

marker leader dimension 62

master bedroom (QuickStart) 107

master pricelist, creating in Estimator 392

matching apply (3D Custom Workshop) 458

matching scale (Floor Plan Trace) 267

material, printing template (RealModel) 299

materialsadding (Fence Designer) 377

apply (3D Custom Workshop) 457

applying 91

attaching (RealModel) 300

estimations (Estimator) 392

import 92

search in 3D Custom Workshop 461

measurement tools 25

measurements, using the Virtual Ruler 66

menu bar 24

metric units 264

mirrorin Door Designer 305



mirror (3D Custom Workshop) 474

modifying staircases 132

mosaic render style 278

motion detector, adding 164

move to back (QuickStart) 107

move to front (QuickStart) 107

move, entire plan 261

movingfeatures between plans 261

objects 256

objects between floors 260

multigondrawing in 2D 237


Nnetwork router, adding 167

new category, ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 326

new category, mantel (Mantel Designer) 344

normal apply (3D Custom Workshop) 458

notations 56

nudge 256

in 3D Custom Workshop 437, 472

Oobject-level editing 241


objects 74

converting 2D to 3D (3D Custom Works-hop) 466

copying 260

copying between floors 260

editing 75

elevating 258

moving 256

moving between floors 260

moving by coordinates 256

printing (3D Custom Workshop) 434

renaming 75

rotating 257

rotating (3D Custom Workshop) 469


Index

rotating (Pool Designer) 366

selecting (3D Custom Workshop) 463

selecting (Section Detailer) 412

selecting (Symbol Editor) 426

specifying 3D size (3D Custom Workshop) 470

office (QuickStart) 107

offset dimension 60

oil painting render style 278

opacity, in ClearView 276

open arcdrawing in 3D Custom Workshop 451

open staircases 132

opening a file (3D Custom Workshop) 431

organize decorator palettes 293

organize templates (Mantel Designer) 343

ornamental iron fence (Fence Designer) 372

orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 477

outdoor cabinet 214

hardware, add or remove 217

outdoor hose bib 171

ovaldrawing in 2D 234


Ppaint color, applying 87

pan (3D Custom Workshop) 477

pan tool 42

panning, 2D view 42

parameters, undo 255

paste from clipboard 255

pathway 218

change width 219

patiodraw 213

edit 213

perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 477

perspective editing (PhotoView Editor) 386

phone jack 157

photo beam, adding 165

photocell, adding 168

photograph (PhotoView) 381

Photo-Realisticlighting 287

rendering effects 282

rendering styles 278

PhotoView 381


file format 381

tips for using 381

PhotoView Editor 385

pi radian (3D Custom Workshop) 467

picket fence (Fence Designer) 372

properties 374

picture of my home (PhotoView) 384

piers, foundation 112

plan layershow/hide 41

viewing 43

plan tabs 24

plan, views 41

planar mapping 460

plane, drawing in 3D Custom Workshop 454

PlantFinder 82

plantsadding 78

customizing age 85

edit plant description and requirements 80

find by name 84

growth meter 85

inventory bar display 81

locate on Preview Bar 83

sorting/filtering 82

view plant description and requirements 80

plotter 35

plumbing tab 171

point-level editing 241


polygondrawing in 2D 235


pond, adding 211

poolaccessories, adding (Pool Designer) 362

depth (Pool Designer) 350

equipment, adding (Pool Designer) 357

options (Pool Designer) 352

pre-built steps, adding (Pool Designer) 357

shape (Pool Designer) 349

support system, adding (Pool Designer) 358

template, create (Pool Designer) 370

volume (Pool Designer) 352

Pool Wizard 347

preview bar 28

preview speed, setting (Animator) 289

print3D view 37

floorplans (3D Custom Workshop) 434

large-scale drawing 37

pricelist (Estimator) 393

print templates (RealModel) 298

printing drawing in color 35

printing floor plans 35

privacy fence (Fence Designer) 372

privacy fence properties (Fence Designer) 375

project setup 105

ProjecTape 72

projection, mantel shape (Mantel Designer) 343

properties tab 27

property linedefine coordinates 209

drawing manually 209

pumps (heat), adding 197

QQuickPalette

access 95

active palette 96

apply palette 95

create new palette 97

customize palette 97

delete palette 97

rename palette 97

QuickStartdisplay at startup 103

QuickStart 59 second video 104

Rradians (3D Custom Workshop) 467

radiator, adding 198

rafter properties 249

rail fence (Fence Designer) 372

properties 375

railingsadding 134

deck railing, adding 205

modifying 135

RealModel 271, 297

attaching template textures & colors 300

scale 298

recently opened files 31

rectangledrawing in 2D 233


redo 255

reference grid 52

reflectivity 284

region, fill 211

registers, adding 194

removedeck handrails 204

point 241

trim 86

wall trim 87

remove wall trim 87

rename floor 145

render final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 478

renderingadjust render quality 277

Photo-Realistic effects 282

Photo-Realistic styles 278

printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 434

render options 281

render options (QuickStart) 108

stop process 277

styles, 3D render 275

replacing PhotoView image 383

reposition floors 145

requirements, system 13

resetting 2D view 42

reshapeadd point 241

add points (Door Designer) 305

add points (Window Designer) 313

ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 322

fill 211

mantel (Mantel Designer) 340

remove point 241

remove points (Door Designer) 305

resizingbathtubs 176, 177

exterior wall 120

fences (Fence Designer) 376

gates (Fence Designer) 376

objects 75

PhotoView image 383

tubs 177

retaining walladding 224


Chapter 1

height 225

revolving, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 467

right view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

roofauto-generate (QuickStart) 108

constructing templates (RealModel) 299

cutout 188

dormer, adding 186

drawing a roof 182

freehand tool 184

gambrel 191

gambrel style 191

pitch, change 189

roof (framing)rafter material 249

rafter size 249

rafter spacing 249

truss spacing 249

roofing tab 181

room addition, adding 123

room name label 59

default font 63

room templates 99

room view 272

room visibility (QuickStart) 107

rotate 257

1-degree increment 257

3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 469

entire 2D plan 261

specified amount 257

rotated text 57

rotation origin visible (3D Custom Workshop) 484

Ssample plans 31, 109

satellite dish, adding 161

satellite receiver, adding 161

save 3D view 295

save as 33

save object to library (3D Custom Workshop) 432

saved 3D views 296

saving files 33

scale, defining (RealModel) 298

scanned image, importing (PhotoView) 381


screen colors 67

Section Detailer 401

securitysecurity access keypad (pedestal), adding

166

security access keypad (wall), adding 166

security camera, adding 163

security contact, adding 164

security control panel, adding 165

security keypad, adding 165

selecting in 3D 47

selection filter 55

selection mode (3D Custom Workshop) 463

selection, rotating 257

send to back 240

in PhotoView Editor 385

serial number 20

setting a nudge distance (3D Custom Works-hop) 437, 472

settings, display 18

setup project 105

shadd render stylePhoto-Realistic 278

shaded render style 275

shadows, adding 286, 287

in Fireplace Wizard 337

in Pool Designer 366

shape projection (Mantel Designer) 343

shape, mantel (Mantel Designer) 340

shape, pool (Pool Designer) 349

show Floor Plan Trace image 268

show plan layers 41

show QuickStart at startup 104

show room name 59

show topography lines 42

showers, adding 177

shrubs, adding 78

side grid (3D Custom Workshop) 436

sidewalk 218

sinksadding 174

editing 175

size, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 470

skewing objects (3D Custom Workshop) 468

skirt trim (deck) 204

skylight 190

slab foundation 113

slide, adding (Pool Designer) 364

SmartWand 94

smoke detector, adding 158

snap grid 52

snap grid, on and offin Section Detailer 413


snap grid, on and off (3D Custom Workshop) 437

snap options 53

snapsalignment 54

auto snap on/off 54

detection radius 55

intersections 54

object center 54

on segment 54

segment center 54

snap points (Door Designer) 306

software updates 18

speedfly-around 275

walk through 275

speed tips 18

split 2D/3D view 44

sprinkler heads, placing 225

squaredrawing in 2D 233

square footage, calculating 266

staircasesadding 130

deck, adding 205

deck, modifying 207

framing material 250

modifying 132

open riser 132

startupin design window 103

in QuickStart 103

status bar 28

stepsdeck, adding 204

deck, changing height 205

pool, adding (Pool Designer) 355

pool, adding pre-built (Pool Designer) 357

stiffener beams 111

stipple render style 278

stop rendering 277

straight edging (landscape) 220

sunlight color 287

surface mapping 460

surface skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 359

symbol categoriescreating (Symbol Editor) 417

deleting (Symbol Editor) 417

renaming (Symbol Editor) 417

Symbol Editor 417

symbolscreating (Symbol Editor) 417

moving (Symbol Editor) 417

symbols, 2D 76

system requirements 13

system settings 14

Ttabs

deck plan 201

detail plan 233

electrical plan 149

floor plan 115

foundation 111

hvac 193

landscape plan 209

plumbing 171

roofing 181

templatenew category (Ceiling Designer) 326

new category (Mantel Designer) 344

organize (Mantel Designer) 343

printing textures (RealModel) 299

room template 99

wall (RealModel) 298

textadding 56

alignment 58

at an angle 57

formatting 58

text & dimension toolbar 26

texture, attaching (RealModel) 300

textured view (3D Custom Workshop) 478

three-point freehand roof tool 185

tips & tricks 17


Chapter 1

title bar 23

toiletsadding 173

editing 173

tool options 27

toolbars 24

tools, measurement 25

top view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

topography lines, show 42

trace image (Mantel Designer) 342

tracing, floor plan 267, 268

tracking, constraining (Door Designer) 306

Training Center 17

translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 478

trees, adding 78

trim categoriescreating (Trim Designer) 395

deleting (Trim Designer) 395

renaming (Trim Designer) 395

Trim Designer 395

trim, remove 86

trimscreating (Trim Designer) 395

deleting (Trim Designer) 395

importing (Trim Designer) 395

moving (Trim Designer) 395

tubsadding 176

editing 176

turn off auto roof generation 182

two colors on one wall 124

Uundo 255

undo parameters 255

unit of measurement 264


update 3D view 295

update room finishes 95

update topography grid 266

updates, software 18

USDA zone maps 82

Vvents, adding 194

version number 20

video projector, adding 160

Videos 17


view2D plan only 41

2D view (3D Custom Workshop) 480

3D camera angle 274

3D fly-around 272

3D navigation 271

adding shadows 287

adjusting lighting (Pool Designer) 367

aerial 272

all floors in 2D 41

bird’s eye 272

ClearView (3D Custom Workshop) 478

controlling 2D/3D 41

final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 478


perspective/orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 477

split 2D/3D 44

textured (3D Custom Workshop) 478

translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 478

visible plans 41

wireframe (3D Custom Workshop) 478

working floor only 41

View icons 25

viewpoint angle 46

virtual ruler, show or hide 66

visual array tool 98

volleyball net, adding (Pool Designer) 362

Wwainscot

adding 86

remove 87

wainscot, remove 87

walk-throughadjusting elevation 271

speed 275

view 271

wallconstructing templates (RealModel) 299

insulation 249

load bearing 249

properties (framing) 249

retaining wall 224

retaining wall height 225

wall break tool 124

wall heater 198

wall speaker, adding 161

wall trim, remove 87

walls, drawing 115

wall-spacing dimensions 59

water transparency (Pool Designer) 352

welcome window at startup 104

window accessories 138

window categoriescreating (Window Designer) 314

deleting (Window Designer) 314

renaming (Window Designer) 314

Window Designer 311

window dimensions, hiding 59

window molding 86

windows 128

creating (Window Designer) 314

importing (Window Designer) 314

moving (Window Designer) 314

wireframe (3D Custom Workshop) 478

wireframe render style 275

wireframe, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 434

working elevation, setting 263

working floor button 24

working floor, viewing 41

working in groups (3D Custom Workshop) 470

workshop object, resize 75

workspace boundary (Door Designer) 306

Zzero-offset dimension 60

zoom (3D Custom Workshop) 477

zoom and pan toolbar 25

zoom factor 42

zoom tool 42


Chapter 1
